planet mentum cdma user guide

Cover Page

CDMA User Guide

for version 4.5

Copyright © 2008Mentum S.A. All rights reserved.

Notice

This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Mentum S.A. and may not be copied, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or reproduced in any format or media, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Mentum S.A. Information contained in this document supersedes that found in any previous manuals, guides, specifications data sheets, or other information that may have been provided or made available to the user. This document is provided for informational purposes only, and Mentum S.A. does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy, adequacy, quality, validity, completeness or suitability for any purpose the information contained in this document. Mentum S.A. may update, improve, and enhance this document and the products to which it relates at any time without prior notice to the user. MENTUM S.A. MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.

Trademark Acknowledgement

Mentum, Mentum Planet and Mentum Ellipse are registered trademarks owned by Mentum S.A. MapInfo Professional is a registered trademark of PB MapInfo Corporation. RF-vu is a trademark owned by iBwave. WaveSight is a trademark of Wavecall. This document may contain other trademarks, trade names, or service marks of other organizations, each of which is the property of its respective owner.

Last updated October 17, 2008

ContentsContents

MENTUM PRODUCTS

List of products 2

CONTACTING MENTUM

Getting technical support 4Send us your comments 4

INTRODUCTION Using this documentation 6Online Help 6Documentation library 8Notational conventions 9Organization of this user guide 10

CHAPTER 1Overview of W-CDMA

Understanding W-CDMA networks 14W-CDMA features 14

Multi-technology planning features 14W-CDMA analyses 15W-CDMA reports 16Scrambling code planning 16

Workflow for W-CDMA network planning 16Suggested reading 18

CHAPTER 2Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA

Understanding Mobile Technology projects 20Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project 20Gathering project information 20Creating a project for W-CDMA 20

To create a project for W-CDMA 21

i

ContentsCDMA User Guide

Opening a project 23To open a project 23

Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA 24To create a default settings file for W-CDMA 24

CHAPTER 3Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration

Understanding W-CDMA network configuration settings 28Workflow for defining a W-CDMA network configuration 28Defining network operators for W-CDMA 29

To define network operators for W-CDMA 29Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA 30

Spectrum allocation for W-CDMA 30W-CDMA carriers 31To create a new W-CDMA technology band 32

Defining W-CDMA network settings 33General settings for W-CDMA 33Correlation model settings for W-CDMA 34Power control settings for W-CDMA 35Carrier settings for W-CDMA 35To define general settings for W-CDMA 36To define correlation model settings for W-CDMA 38To define power control settings for W-CDMA 39To define carrier settings for W-CDMA 40To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMA 42To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMA 44

CHAPTER 4Defining W-CDMA Subscribers

Understanding W-CDMA subscribers 48W-CDMA subscriber types and rapid planning 49

Importing and exporting subscriber information 50To import pre-defined subscriber information 50To import or export subscriber information 51

Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types 51Defining clutter types for W-CDMA 52

To define clutter types for W-CDMA 54To assign clutter classes to clutter types for W-CDMA 56

ii


Defining W-CDMA bearers 57W-CDMA bearers 58To define W-CDMA bearers 59To define HSDPA bearers 62

Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA 63To define subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA 63To define subscriber equipment bands for W-CDMA 64

Defining session types for W-CDMA 66To define session types for W-CDMA 67

Defining quality types for W-CDMA 69To define quality types for W-CDMA 69

Defining service types for W-CDMA 70To define circuit-switched service types for W-CDMA 71To define packet-switched service types for W-CDMA 73

Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA 77To create a subscriber type for W-CDMA 78To define usage types for W-CDMA 81

CHAPTER 5Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites

Understanding W-CDMA sites and sectors 84Considerations for multi-band networks 84Workflow for configuring and placing W-CDMA sites 85Creating W-CDMA sites 85

To create a W-CDMA site 85Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors 87

Losses and gains 87To calculate base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors 89

Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors 92

To globally edit base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors 93

Defining W-CDMA sector settings 96Hardware settings for W-CDMA 96Resource settings for W-CDMA 97Implementation settings for W-CDMA 97Quality settings for W-CDMA 98Power settings for W-CDMA 99

iii


To assign carriers to sectors 99To define hardware settings 99To define sector resources 101To define implementation settings 103To define quality settings 104To define W-CDMA power settings 105

Editing sites and sectors 106To edit a site 107To globally edit W-CDMA sectors 107

Deleting sites 109To delete a site 109

Viewing W-CDMA carrier assignment and interference information 110To view W-CDMA frequency assignment and interference information 110

CHAPTER 6Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors

Understanding W-CDMA repeaters 114Repeaters and W-CDMA predictions 115

Workflow for adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors 115Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors 115

To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors 116To define service antenna settings for repeaters 119To define donor antenna settings for repeaters 121To define repeater prediction settings 123To define repeater equipment settings 125To define repeater carrier settings 127To edit repeater settings 127

Locating repeaters in a Map window 128To locate repeaters in a Map window 128

CHAPTER 7Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA

Understanding rapid planning for W-CDMA 130Prediction view files for W-CDMA analyses 130W-CDMA analysis layers 130

Understanding data rate negotiation 131Data rate downgrading 132Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation 132

iv


Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA 133Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings 133

To define default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings 134Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA 134

To create a new rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA 135To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node 136

Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA 136To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA 136

Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning 138To choose a defined subscriber type for W-CDMA rapid planning 139To choose a nominal subscriber for W-CDMA rapid planning 140

Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA 143To define rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA 143

Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA 144To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA 144

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 144To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 145

Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers 145To view W-CDMA analysis layers 145

Deleting analyses 146To delete analyses 146

CHAPTER 8Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA

Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA 148Monte Carlo phases 148Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs 150


Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers 157CPICH analysis 157Downlink interference analysis 160Uplink interference analysis 161Handover analysis 162Other analysis 164

Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 164Optimizing W-CDMA analyses 165

v


To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings 166Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings 167

To define default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings 167Defining default analysis layers for W-CDMA 167

To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list 168Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 168

To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 169Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA 170

To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA 170To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis 173To define Simulation Area settings for W-CDMA 173To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA 175To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA 177

Defining discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA 179To define discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA 180

Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 181To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 181

Adding an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node 182To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node 182

Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA 182To display discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA in table format 183

Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map 183To create an unserved subscriber traffic map 184

Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis 185

To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA 185Updating W-CDMA rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results 185

To update W-CDMA target values 186Defining W-CDMA analysis layers 186

To define the W-CDMA analysis layers to use in an analysis 187Generating W-CDMA analysis layers 188

To generate W-CDMA analysis layers 188Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 188

To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 189

vi


Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers 189To view W-CDMA analysis layers 189

Recoloring best serving sector layers 190To recolor best serving sector layers 190


Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for W-CDMA 191To obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis 192

Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors 194Workflow for analyzing CPICH pollution 196To analyze CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors 197

CHAPTER 9Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers

Understanding HSDPA in Mentum Planet 202HSDPA Monte Carlo analysis 203Downlink analysis 204Uplink analysis 205HSDPA analysis layers 206

Workflow for generating HSDPA analysis layers 209Understanding HSUPA in Mentum Planet 209

HSPA Rapid Planning analysis 211HSPA analysis 211

Workflow for generating HSPA analysis layers 213

CHAPTER 10Creating Scrambling Code Plans

Understanding scrambling code planning 216Workflow for scrambling code planning 216Creating a scrambling code plan 216

To create a scrambling code plan 217Defining general scrambling code plan settings 218

To define general settings 218Defining scrambling code plan exceptions 220

To define scrambling code planning exceptions 221

vii


Working with scrambling code planning results 222To modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector 222To view statistics for a plan 223To open a plan in Excel 223To save a plan 223To load a plan 223

CHAPTER 11Generating W-CDMA Reports

Understanding W-CDMA reports 226W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data 226W-CDMA analysis layer data 227Using report data to help in W-CDMA network analysis 228

Predefined report designs 228System-mobile-simple report 228Carrier-sector-mobile report 229Carrier-sector 229System-mobile 229Throughput 229Columns in predefined reports 229

Workflow for generating W-CDMA reports 239Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design 240

Modifying a predefined report design 240To generate a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design 240

Designing a W-CDMA report 241To design a W-CDMA report 241To define the data columns for a W-CDMA report 244To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report 245To save the W-CDMA report design 247To modify an existing W-CDMA report design 247To delete a W-CDMA report design 247

Generating a W-CDMA report 247To generate a W-CDMA report 248

Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers 248To calculate W-CDMA layer statistics 249To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table format 253To add W-CDMA layer statistics to a report design 254

viii


CHAPTER 12Overview of cdma2000

Understanding cdma2000 technology 258cdma2000 features 259

Multi-technology planning features 259cdma2000 analyses 259cdma2000 reports 260PN offset planning 260

Workflow for cdma2000 network planning 260Suggested reading 262

CHAPTER 13Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000

Understanding Mobile Technology projects 264Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project 264Gathering project information 264Creating a project for cdma2000 264

To create a project for cdma2000 265Opening a project 267

To open a project 267Converting cdma2000 projects from previous versions 268Creating a default settings file for cdma2000 268

To create a default settings file for cdma2000 268

CHAPTER 14Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration

Understanding cdma2000 network configuration settings 272Workflow for defining a cdma2000 network configuration 272Defining network operators for cdma2000 273

To define network operators for cdma2000 273Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 274

Spectrum allocation for cdma2000 274cdma2000 carriers 275To create a new cdma2000 technology band 276

Defining cdma2000 network settings 277General settings for cdma2000 277Correlation model settings for cdma2000 278Power control settings for cdma2000 279Carrier settings for cdma2000 279To define general settings for cdma2000 280

ix


To define correlation model settings for cdma2000 281To define power control settings for cdma2000 283To define carrier settings for cdma2000 284To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000 285

CHAPTER 15Defining cdma2000 Subscribers

Understanding cdma2000 subscribers 290cdma2000 subscriber types and rapid planning 291

Importing and exporting subscriber information 292To import pre-defined subscriber information 292To import or export subscriber information 293

Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types 293Defining clutter types for cdma2000 294

To define clutter types for cdma2000 296To assign clutter classes to clutter types for cdma2000 298

Defining cdma2000 bearers 299cdma2000 bearers 300To define cdma2000 bearers 302To define EV-DO bearers 305

Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 307To define subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 307To define subscriber equipment bands for cdma2000 307

Defining session types for cdma2000 309To define session types for cdma2000 310

Defining quality types for cdma2000 312To define quality types for cdma2000 312

Defining service types for cdma2000 314To define circuit-switched service types for cdma2000 314To define packet-switched service types for cdma2000 317

Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 321To create a subscriber type for cdma2000 322To define usage types for cdma2000 325

CHAPTER 16Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites

Understanding cdma2000 sites and sectors 328Considerations for multi-band networks 328Workflow for configuring and placing cdma2000 sites 329

x


Creating cdma2000 sites 329To create a cdma2000 site 329

Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors 331Losses and gains 331To calculate base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors 334

Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors 337

To globally edit base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors 338

Defining cdma2000 sector settings 341Hardware settings for cdma2000 341Resource settings for cdma2000 342Implementation settings for cdma2000 342Quality settings for cdma2000 344Power settings for cdma2000 345To assign carriers to sectors 345To define hardware settings 346To define sector resources 347To define implementation settings 349To define quality settings 350To define cdma2000 power settings 351

Editing sites and sectors 353To edit a site 353To globally edit cdma2000 sectors 353

Deleting sites 356To delete a site 356

Viewing cdma2000 carrier assignment and interference information 356To view cdma2000 frequency assignment and interference information 357

CHAPTER 17Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors

Understanding cdma2000 repeaters 362Repeaters and cdma2000 predictions 363

Workflow for adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors 363Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors 363

To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors 364To define service antenna settings for repeaters 367

xi


To define donor antenna settings for repeaters 369To define repeater prediction settings 371To define repeater equipment settings 373To define repeater carrier settings 375To edit repeater settings 375

Locating repeaters in a Map window 376To locate repeaters in a Map window 376

CHAPTER 18Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000

Understanding rapid planning for cdma2000 378Prediction view files for cdma2000 analyses 378cdma2000 analysis layers 378


Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 381Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings 381

To define default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings 382Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 382

To create a new rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 383To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node 384

Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 384To define rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 384

Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning 386To choose a defined subscriber type for cdma2000 rapid planning 387To choose a nominal subscriber for cdma2000 rapid planning 387

Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 391To define rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 392

Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 393To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 393

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 393To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 393

Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers 394To view cdma2000 analysis layers 394


xii


CHAPTER 19Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000

Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000 398Monte Carlo phases 398Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs 400


Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers 407Pilot analysis 407Forward link interference analysis 411Reverse link interference analysis 412Handoff analysis 413Other analysis 415

Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 415Optimizing cdma2000 analyses 416

To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings 417Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings 418

To define default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings 419Defining default analysis layers for cdma2000 419

To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list 420Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 420

To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 421Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 422

To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 422To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis 425To define Simulation Area settings for cdma2000 425To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 427To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000 429

Defining discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000 431To define discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000 432

Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 433To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 433

Adding an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node 434To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node 434

xiii


Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 434To display discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 in table format 435

Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map 435To create an unserved subscriber traffic map 436

Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis 437

To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma2000 437Updating cdma2000 rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results 437

To update cdma2000 target values 438Defining cdma2000 analysis layers 438

To define the cdma2000 analysis layers to use in an analysis 439Generating cdma2000 analysis layers 440

To generate cdma2000 analysis layers 440Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 440

To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 441Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers 441

To view cdma2000 analysis layers 441Recoloring best serving sector layers 442

To recolor best serving sector layers 442Deleting analyses 443

To delete analyses 443Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for cdma2000 443

To obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis 444Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors 446

Workflow for analyzing pilot pollution 448To analyze pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors 449

CHAPTER 20Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers

Understanding EV-DO analysis layers 454Forward link analysis 454Reverse link analysis 457EV-DO analysis layers 458

Workflow for generating EV-DO analysis layers 462

xiv


CHAPTER 21Generating PN Offset Plans

Understanding PN offset planning 464How PN codes are assigned in Mentum Planet 464

Preparing input data for PN offset planning 466Neighbor list 466Interference matrix 466

Workflow for generating PN offset plans 467Creating PN offset plans 467

To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings 468To create a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool 468

Working with PN offset plans 473To view or edit the properties of a plan 473To copy a PN offset plan 473To delete a PN offset plan 474To display PN offset assignments in the Map window 474To edit the PN offset assignments in a plan 474To add a PN offset plan to a project 474To export PN offset assignments 475

Analyzing PN offset plans 475To analyze a PN offset plan 476To view PN offset plan analysis layers in a Map window 478To display a PN offset plan analysis report 478

Displaying PN offset reports 478To display a PN offset report 479

Applying PN offset plans 479To apply a PN offset plan to a project 480

CHAPTER 22Generating cdma2000 Reports

Understanding cdma2000 reports 482cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data 482cdma2000 analysis layer data 484Using report data to help in cdma2000 network analysis 484

xv


Predefined report designs 484System-mobile-simple report 484Carrier-sector-mobile report 485Carrier-sector 485System-mobile 485Throughput 485Columns in predefined reports 485

Workflow for generating cdma2000 reports 494Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design 494

Modifying a predefined report design 494To generate a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design 495

Designing a cdma2000 report 495To design a cdma2000 report 496To define the data columns for a cdma2000 report 499To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report 500To save the cdma2000 report design 501To modify an existing cdma2000 report design 501To delete a cdma2000 report design 502

Generating a cdma2000 report 502To generate a cdma2000 report 502

Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers 503To calculate cdma2000 layer statistics 503To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table format 508To add cdma2000 layer statistics to a report design 508

508

xvi


APPENDIX A 511Modeling W-CDMA Networks

APPENDIX B 521W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format

APPENDIX C 523W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format

APPENDIX D 533Modeling cdma2000 Networks

APPENDIX E 543cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format

APPENDIX F 545cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format

INDEX 555

xvii


xviii

Mentum Products

This chapter contains the following section:■ List of products

The Mentum Product portfolio provides a range of

products for planning and maintaining wireless

networks.

This section describes the products that are available

as part of the portfolio. For additional details about

any of these products, see the Mentum® web site at

http://www.mentum.com.

1

http://www.mentum.com

Mentum ProductsCDMA User Guide

2

List of productsThe following table describes wireless network planning and optimization products. The table does not provide details about specific features and tools. For more information, see the introductory chapters in the User Guide for the specific product or visit the Mentum web site at http://www.mentum.com.

Product Description

Mentum Planet A Windows-based wireless network planning and analysis tool. You can add technologies and tools to support the planning functions that you require. Depending on the options that you choose, Mentum Planet provides support for the following technologies:■ TDMA/FDMA—GSM (including GPRS and EGPRS), IS-136, AMPS,

NAMPS, and iDEN■ CDMA—W-CDMA (UMTS, including HSPA), cdma2000 (including

IS-95, 1xRTT, EV-DO)

Specialized modules

Measurement Data Package

Test mobile and scan receiver functionality that can be added to Mentum Planet so that you can import and analyze measurement data and increase the accuracy of predictions.

Universal Model

Propagation model that automatically adapts to all engineering technologies (micro, mini, small and macro cells), to all environments (dense urban, urban, suburban, mountainous, maritime, open), and to all systems (GSM, GPRS, EDGE, UMTS, WIFI, WIMAX) in a frequency range that spans from 400MHz to 5GHz.

Indoor/Outdoor Indoor/outdoor module that links Mentum Planet with iBwave RF-vu™ allowing you to view and plan indoor/outdoor networks and manage RF-vu projects using the Mentum Planet Data Manager.

Optimization applications

Mentum Ellipse®

An integrated software solution for the optimal planning and design of point-to-point and point-to-multipoint radio transmission links.

Renaissance Frequency planning tool that uses evolutionary algorithms to find the very best frequency plan that will minimize interference across the network.

Capesso™ Optimisation tool that enables engineers to improve upon manual optimisation techniques by allowing them to consider and adjust multiple input parameters simultaneously. The result is a quicker and more cost-effective convergence towards a 'best network' configuration.

http://www.mentum.com/mentum/products.php

Contacting Mentum

This chapter contains the following sections:■ Getting technical support■ Send us your comments

Mentum is committed to providing fast, responsive

technical support. This section provides an extensive

list of contacts to help you through any issues you

may have.

We also welcome any comments about our

documentation. Customer feedback is an essential

element of product development and supports our

efforts to provide the best products, services, and

support we can.

3

Contacting MentumCDMA User Guide

4

Getting technical supportYou can get technical support by phone or email, or by going to http://www.mentum.com/index.php?page=customer-care&hl=en_US. Email is the best way of getting technical support.

North AmericaPhone: +1 866 921-9219 (toll free), +1 819 483-7094 Fax: +1 819 483-7050Email: [email protected]: 8am – 8pm EST/EDT (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays)

Europe, Middle East, and AfricaPhone: +33 1 39264642Fax: +33 1 39264601Email: [email protected]: 9am – 6pm CET/CEST (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays)

Asia PacificPhone: +852 2824 8874Fax: +852 2824 8358Email: [email protected]: 9am – 6pm HKT (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays)

When you call for technical support, ensure that you have your product ID number and know which version of the software you are running. You can obtain this information using the About command from the Help menu.When you request technical support outside of regular business hours, a Product Support Specialist will respond the next working day by telephone or email, depending upon the nature of the request.

Send us your commentsFeedback is important to us. Please take the time to send comments and suggestions on the product you received and on the user documentation shipped with it. Send your comments to:[email protected]

http://www.mentum.com/index.php?page=customer-care&hl=en_US

http://www.mentum.com/index.php?page=customer-care&hl=en_US

mailto:[email protected]




Introduction

This chapter contains the following sections:■ Using this documentation■ Organization of this user

guide

This user guide provides the necessary information to

plan W-CDMA and cdma2000 networks. It is

divided into two sections. Section 1 focuses on the

workflow and tasks required to plan and analyze a

W-CDMA network while Section 2 focuses on the

workflow and tasks required to plan and analyze a

cdma2000 network. For more information, see

“Organization of this user guide” on page 10.

This chapter describes how to use the documentation.

5

Chapter 3CDMA User Guide

Using this documentationBefore using this documentation, you should be familiar with the Windows environment. It is assumed that you are using the standard Windows XP desktop, and that you know how to access ToolTips and shortcut menus, move and copy objects, select multiple objects using the Shift or Ctrl key, resize dialog boxes, expand and collapse folder trees. It is also assumed that you are familiar with the basic functions of MapInfo Professional®. MapInfo Professional functions are not documented in this User Guide. For information about MapInfo Professional, see the MapInfo online Help and MapInfo Professional User Guide. You can access additional MapInfo user documentation from the MapInfo website at www.mapinfo.com.All product information is available through the online Help. You access online Help using the Help menu or context-sensitive Help from within a dialog box by pressing the F1 key. If you want to view the online Help for a specific panel or tab, click in a field or list box to activate the panel or tab before you press the F1 key. The following sections describe the structure of the online Help.

Online HelpFrom the Help menu, you can access online Help for Mentum Planet software and for MapInfo Professional. This section describes the structure of the Mentum Planet online Help. The online Help provides extensive help on all aspects of software use. It provides

■ help on all dialog boxes■ procedures for using the software■ an extensive Mentum Planet documentation library in PDF

format■ User Guides

The following sections provide details about the resources available through the online Help.

Resource RoadmapWhen you first use the online Help, start with the Resource Roadmap. It describes the types of resources available in the online Help and explains how best to use them. It includes a step-by-step guide that walks you through the available resources.

6

http://reference.mapinfo.com/#mi_pro

IntroductionCDMA User Guide

PrintingYou have two basic options for printing documents:

■ If you want a good quality print of a single procedure or section, you can print from the Help window. Click Print in the Help window.

■ If you want a higher quality print of a complete User Guide, use Adobe Reader to print the supplied print-ready PDF file contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library. Open the PDF file and choose File ➤ Print.

Library SearchYou can perform a full-text search on all PDF files contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library if you are using a version of Adobe Reader that supports full-text searches. The PDF files are located in the Mentum Planet 4\Help folder.

Frequently Asked QuestionsThe Frequently Asked Questions section provides answers to common questions about Mentum Planet. For easy navigation, the section is divided into categories related to product functionality.

“What’s This?” Help“What’s This?” Help provides detailed explanations of all dialog boxes.

User GuidesAll User Guides for Mentum Planet software is easily accessible as part of the online Help.

You can also perform a search on all online Help topics by clicking the Search tab in the Help window. Type a keyword, and click List Topics to

display all Help topics that contain the keyword. The online Help duplicates the information found in the User Guide PDF files in order to provide more complete results. It does not duplicate the information in the Release Notes, or Glossary.

7


Documentation libraryMentum Planet comes with an extensive library of User Guides in PDF format. The following table provides details about the documentation supplied with Mentum Planet.

Additional documents, including Application Notes and Technical Notes, are available on the Mentum Web site: http://www.mentum.com.

Document Enables you to

Mentum Planet User Guide Plan and analyze simulated wireless communication networks.

Grid Analysis User Guide Perform operations on spatial data that is stored in grids, and display, analyze, and export digital elevation models (DEM) and other grid-based data.

Indoor/Outdoor Integration User Guide

Integrate indoor networks into Mentum Planet and learn how to view, edit, and manage indoor projects.

TDMA/FDMA User Guide Plan and analyze TDMA/FDMA networks.

CDMA User Guide Plan and analyze W-CDMA (UMTS) and cdma2000 networks.

Data Manager User Guide Learn how to use the Data Manager.The Data Manager enables users to work with centralized Mentum Planet data stored in an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server database.

Data Manager Server Administrator Guide

Learn how to install and configure the Data Manager Server on database and file servers in a network environment, and how to manage access to project data.

Installation Guide Install Wireless Network Planning software.

Glossary Search for commonly used technical terms.

Release Note Learn about new features and known issues with the current release of software.

8

http://www.mentum.com

IntroductionCDMA User Guide

Notational conventionsThis section describes the textual conventions and icons used throughout this documentation.

Textual conventionsSpecial text formats are used to highlight different types of information. The following table describes the special text conventions used in this document.

IconsThroughout this documentation, icons are used to identify text that requires special attention.

Data Manager Server Release Note

Learn about new features and known issues with the current release of Data Manager Server software.

MapInfo Professional User Guide

Learn about the many features of MapInfo Professional, as well as basic and advanced mapping concepts.

bold text Bold text is used in procedure steps to identify a user interface element such as a dialog box, menu item, or button. For example:In the Select Interpolation Method dialog box, choose the Inverse Distance Weighting option, and click Next.

courier text Courier text is used in procedures to identify text that you must type. For example:In the File Name box, type Elevation.grd.

bright blue text Bright blue text is used to identify a link to another section of the document. Click the link to view the section.

➤ Menu arrows are used in procedures to identify a sequence of menu items that you must follow. For example, if a step reads “Choose File ➤ Open,” you would click File and then click Open.

< > Angle brackets are used to identify variables.For example, if a menu item changes depending on the chosen unit of measurement, the menu structure would appear as Display ➤ <unit of measurement>.

Document Enables you to

9


Organization of this user guideThis user guide explains how to use Mentum Planet to plan networks that contain CDMA technologies. It is divided into two sections:

■ Section 1 is organized according to the workflow that you would typically follow to plan and analyze a W-CDMA network.

■ Section 2 is organized according to the workflow that you would typically follow to plan and analyze a cdma2000 network.

Each chapter in this guide provides details about how to perform a step in the planning process and explains how it relates to the other steps. Before you begin, you should read the “Understanding...” sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.

This icon identifies a workflow summary, which explains a series of actions that you will need to carry out in the specified order to complete a complex task.

This icon identifies a cautionary statement, which contains information required to avoid potential loss of data, time, or resources.

This icon identifies a tip, which contains shortcut information, alternative ways of performing a task, or methods that save time or resources.

This icon identifies a note, which highlights important information or provides information that is useful but not essential.

10

Section 1: W-CDMA

Section 1W-CDMAThis section explains how to use the W-CDMA technology provided with

Mentum Planet.

For information about cdma2000, see “Section 2: cdma2000” on page 255.

Chapter 1: Overview of W-CDMA

1.
Overview of W-CDMA
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding W-CDMA

networks■ W-CDMA features■ Workflow for W-CDMA

network planning■ Suggested reading

This chapter provides an overview of W-CDMA and

presents a typical workflow for W-CDMA planning.

13


Understanding W-CDMA networksWideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) is a third-generation technology. W-CDMA networks can support a wide range of services (e.g., voice and high-speed data) and service levels simultaneously. As a third-generation (3G) technology, W-CDMA is one of the most sophisticated technologies available. As a result, planning W-CDMA networks is more complex than planning traditional second-generation (2G) voice-centric networks.Unlike other technologies, W-CDMA does not provide dedicated time slots to each user. All signals within a W-CDMA network share the same bandwidth, because each signal is spread across the entire 5 MHz channel. Although a coded signal is broadcast to all users, users to whom the signal is not directed receive the signals (or a portion thereof) as interference. Interference includes energy from non-orthogonal signals broadcast from the same serving site and signals directed at users served by another site. In a W-CDMA network, the amount of internal and external interference across the network determines the network capacity (i.e., the amount of interference is directly linked to the number of calls supported by the network).In the dynamic environment of a W-CDMA network, interference levels fluctuate according to the number and location of users. Interference affects the range of sector coverage and the number of users that can be served. For more information, see “Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks” on page 511.

W-CDMA featuresMentum Planet enables you to plan and assess the coverage and performance of your multi-layer (2G and 3G) and multi-technology networks using features described in the following sections.

Multi-technology planning featuresMentum Planet enables you to define a W-CDMA configuration simultaneously with TDMA/FDMA configurations.The Subscriber Manager enables you to effectively plan your network with a diverse mix of subscribers and usage types. You can group the service, bearer, quality, and session requirements of each subscriber into subscriber types, which are used when you analyze the network.

14

Overview of W-CDMACDMA User Guide

W-CDMA analyses

You can generate analyses using one of two methods:■ Monte Carlo■ rapid planning

Monte CarloThe Monte Carlo option enables you to perform a detailed analysis of the network using Monte Carlo simulation techniques to analyze a set of randomly generated points (i.e., subscribers) distributed according to traffic maps. For more information, see “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

Rapid planningThe rapid planning option provides a faster alternative for generating analysis layers based on user-defined levels of network loading on the uplink and downlink. The simulation runs only once, and does not generate the detailed operating points that the Monte Carlo simulation generates. This option is useful when you want a quick overview of your network. You can then use the Monte Carlo option for a more detailed view. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129.

W-CDMA analysis layers

Analysis layers are generated for both the Monte Carlo and rapid planning options. Analysis layers enable you to compare and query layers of information for details on interference, coverage, and handover. For example, the generated analysis layers can help you to determine:

■ common pilot channel (CPICH) coverage ■ uplink interference■ downlink interference■ throughput■ handover states and constraints■ path balance between the downlink and the uplink

You can generate analysis layers for the entire network or for a particular geographic region within the network. For more information, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

15


W-CDMA reports

The Report Designer enables you to view data from antenna patterns, sector settings, Monte Carlo simulations, and W-CDMA analysis layers in a report. You can output reports to a Microsoft® Excel (.xls) file, MapInfo (.tab) file, or HTML (.htm) file. You can also calculate statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers and obtain per-pixel information about W-CDMA analyses. For more information, see “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

Scrambling code planningThe Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to efficiently allocate scrambling codes to sectors in your network. It also enables you to manage scrambling code exceptions and illegal scrambling codes.For more information, see “Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans” on page 215.

Workflow for W-CDMA network planningThe workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.Before you begin this workflow, you should review the list of Mentum Planet activities listed in Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. You should also read the “Understanding...” sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.Step 1 Create a project. See “Chapter 2: Creating a Mobile Technology

Project for W-CDMA” on page 19.

Step 2 Define your W-CDMA network configuration as follows:

■ Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you plan to analyze. For general procedures for working with traffic maps, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Define subscribers using the Subscriber Manager. See “Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers” on page 47.

16

Overview of W-CDMACDMA User Guide

Step 3 Optionally, edit the propagation models supplied with Mentum Planet. See Chapter 4, “Working with Propagation Models”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 4 Configure and place sites. See “Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites” on page 83.

Step 5 Optionally, analyze survey data or tune propagation models. See Chapter 4, “Working with Propagation Models”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 6 Optionally, if you have purchased Capesso, optimize your sites using the workflow described in the Capesso online Help.

Step 7 Generate a rapid planning or Monte Carlo analysis and view results. See:■ “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses

for W-CDMA” on page 129■ “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for

W-CDMA” on page 147■ “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on

page 225

Step 8 Optionally, plan scrambling codes. See “Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans” on page 215.

Step 9 Optionally, create coverage maps and FCC Service Area Boundary reports, see Chapter 15, “Generating Reports”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

17


Suggested readingHolma H., A. Toskala. HSDPA/HSUPA for UMTS: High Speed Radio Access for Mobile Communications, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Laiho, J. , A.Wacker, T. Novosad. Radio Network Planning and Optimization for UMTS, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Nawrocki, Maciej J., Mischa Dohler, A. Hamid Aghvami, Understanding UMTS Radio Network Modelling, Planning and Automated Optimization, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Kim, Kyoung Il. Handbook of CDMA System Design, Engineering, and Optimization, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1999.Lee, Jhong Sam & Leonard E. Miller. CDMA Systems Engineering Handbook. Artech House Publishers, 1998.Yang, Samuel C. CDMA RF System Engineering. Artech House Publishers, 1998.

18

Chapter 2: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA

2.
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding Mobile

Technology projects■ Workflow for creating a Mobile

Technology project■ Gathering project information■ Creating a project for

W-CDMA■ Opening a project■ Creating a default settings file

for W-CDMA

This chapter explains how to create a Mobile

Technology project.

Once you have created a project, you can define

network settings and carrier settings, as described in

the following chapters.

19


Understanding Mobile Technology projects In Mentum Planet, a project defines which elevation, clutter, and site file to use for analyses. You need to create a Mobile Technology project before you can define network and carrier settings, place sites, or generate analysis layers. For detailed information on projects, see the Mentum Planet User Guide.When you create a mobile technology project, you can design a network that supports a variety of technologies, including W-CDMA, cdma2000, and TDMA/FDMA.Once you have created a Mobile Technology project, you must specify that you want to use W-CDMA technology and define W-CDMA network, subscriber, and sector settings.

Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology projectStep 1 Gather technical information to support the project. See

“Gathering project information”.

Step 2 Create the Mobile Technology project. See “Creating a project for W-CDMA” on page 20.

Gathering project informationTo create a Mobile Technology project, you must have a digital elevation model (DEM) file and, optionally, a clutter file. The results of network analyses will be more accurate and complete if you start with as much information as possible. It is recommended that you also have the following:

■ technical information about sites and sectors, such as location, power, azimuth, tilt, and twist

■ manufacturer’s electronic antenna patterns

Creating a project for W-CDMAThe Project Wizard leads you through the process of creating a project and, by default, is automatically displayed upon startup of Mentum Planet.If you want Mentum Planet to automatically open the last project, instead of the Project Wizard, in the Startup Options section of the User Preferences dialog box, choose the Open Most Recent Project option. See “Defining User Preferences” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

20

Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMACDMA User Guide

You can use remote project folders to store and access Mentum Planet project data. For example, you can use shared project folders for the following types of project files to conserve disk space on your local computer:

■ bin files■ signal (field) strength files■ prediction view files (CDMA technologies only)

By default, these files are saved in the local project folder. If you use shared project folders, the project files are stored in the shared folders, instead of the local project folder. The shared folders must have read/write access permissions for all Mentum Planet users accessing the shared folders.

You can choose to use a workspace to save your Map window settings, although this is not required. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To create a project for W-CDMA 1 Start Mentum Planet.

By default, the Project Wizard opens when you start Mentum Planet. To use the wizard at any other time, choose File ➤ New Project.

2 Click Next on the first page of the Project Wizard.3 In the Mobile Technology dialog box, choose a W-CDMA default

settings file and click OK.

When you choose a default settings file, default network settings, including appropriate spectrum, are automatically applied to the settings in the Network Settings dialog box and W-CDMA is enabled on the Network Technologies panel. You can modify these settings after you create the project. The default settings are based on defined standards for the technology. These standards are available from various organizations. For CDMA technologies, this list includes 3GPP2 (http://

If you are using shared folders and do not enable the corresponding check box in the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab in the

Project Settings dialog box, the shared path is not stored in Data Manager when you check in the project. For any Data Manager users who perform a Get on the project, all data will be stored within their local project folder.

21

http://www.3gpp2.org


www.3gpp2.org), TIA/EIA (http://www.tiaonline.org) and ANSI (http:// www.ansi.org).

4 Follow the pages of the Project Wizard and supply the appropriate information to create your project.

5 Click Finish.

The Project Settings dialog box opens.

6 On the Data tab, type a project description in the Description box.7 In the Project File box, type a name for the project file or accept the

default.

By default, the folder name specified in the Wizard is used as the .dBp file name.

8 If you want to use a workspace, enable the Use a Workspace check box.

For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

9 If you want to update the workspace file automatically each time you close a project, enable the Workspace Autosave check box.

With both the “Use a Workspace” and “Workspace Autosave” check boxes enabled, the specified workspace will be automatically saved when you close a project. When you re-open the project, the project will be displayed exactly as it appeared when you last closed the project.

10 Click the Folders tab.11 If you want to change the default paths for bin, signal strength, prediction

view, or settings files, for any of the following boxes, click Browse, navigate to the shared folder, and click OK.■ Bin—<project>\bin folder, used for prediction files■ Signal Strength—<project>\SignalStrength folder, used for

field strength files■ Prediction View—<project>\PredictionView folder, used when

you generate a CDMA Monte Carlo simulation■ Global—Program Files\Mentum Planet 4\Global folder, used

for default settings files12 If you intend to use the Data Manager with shared project files, in the

Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab, and in the

22


http://www.tiaonline.org

http://www.ansi.org

http://www.ansi.org


Sharing section, enable the check boxes for each of the file types that reference shared project data.

For information about the other options on the Advanced Options tab, press the F1 key. For more detailed information, see “Defining output settings” in Chapter 8, “Generating Predictions”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

For information about the CDMA Analysis Optimization settings, see “Optimizing W-CDMA analyses” on page 165.

13 Click OK to save your Mentum Planet project.

The Project Explorer opens, docked at the left edge of the application window.

Opening a project You must close an open project before opening a new one. Only projects you have recently worked with appear in the Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box.

To open a project1 Choose File ➤ Open Project.

The Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box opens.

When you create a project, a set of default propagation model files is copied to the Model folder located within the project folder. Each

propagation model references a default Clutter Property Assignment (.cpa) file containing settings appropriate for the model. Ensure that the clutter properties defined for the propagation model are set for the clutter grid file you specify in the Project Settings dialog box.

For information on creating a default settings file, see “Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA” on page 24.

To open the Project Settings dialog box once a project is open, choose Edit ➤ Project Settings, or click the Project Settings button on the

Analysis toolbar.

23


2 If you want to see the paths in the Most Recently Used Projects list, enable the Show Path check box.

3 Do one of the following:■ Choose a project in the Most Recently Used Projects list and

click Open.■ Click Browse, locate the project you want to open and then click

Open.

If you are opening a project that contains predictions from an earlier version of Mentum Planet, see “Opening and closing projects” in Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet,” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA When you create a project, you are prompted to choose a default settings (.gsm) file. Mentum Planet includes default settings files for common technologies. You can, however, create a custom default settings file that will automatically appear in the Mobile Technologies list.A default settings file for W-CDMA contains the settings that are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, such as information about which technologies are enabled in your network and how the spectrum is allocated. When you open a project, the values contained in the W-CDMA default settings file are loaded in the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box.

To create a default settings file for W-CDMA1 Define the network settings.

For more information, see “Chapter 3: Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration” on page 27.

2 Export the network settings to a network settings (.gns) file to the Mentum Planet 4\global\GSM\DefaultSets folder.

For more information on how to export a network settings file, see “Exporting and importing Mobile Technology network settings files” in Chapter 3, “Defining Network Technologies and Services”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

24


3 In the Mentum Mentum Planet 4\Global\GSM\DefaultSets folder, copy any one of the existing default project settings (.gsm) files and rename it.

You must retain the .gsm extension. This will become the new default settings file.

4 Open Notepad or any other ASCII text editor.5 Open the default settings file you created in Step 3 and edit the network

settings parameter to refer to the network settings file you created in Step 2.

For example:[Network Settings]

Default Settings File=myNetworkSettings.gns

Do not modify any other parameters in the file.

6 Save the default settings file.

The default settings file will be listed in the Mobile Technology dialog box when you create a project.

25


26

Chapter 3: Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration

3.
Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration

network configuration settings■ Workflow for defining a

W-CDMA network configuration

■ Defining network operators for W-CDMA

■ Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA

■ Defining W-CDMA network settings

This chapter describes how to define a W-CDMA

network configuration.

27


Understanding W-CDMA network configuration settingsW-CDMA network configuration settings enable you to define spectrum and operators for your W-CDMA network. In addition, you can configure carriers and define other system-level settings. For each carrier, you can define priorities (preference weightings) and soft thresholds, which are used in conjunction with sector settings to allocate subscribers to carriers during network analyses.You can also define HSDPA and HSUPA settings, which are used for HSDPA and HSUPA analyses, if you have purchased an HSDPA or HSUPA license.If you want to model other technologies, you can enable them and define spectrum and other settings.If you chose a default W-CDMA settings file when you created the project, W-CDMA is automatically added to the Network Technologies panel in the Network Settings dialog box, and spectrum and carriers are allocated. In addition to W-CDMA, you can add other technologies as required. For more information on adding other technologies, see Chapter 3, “Defining Network Technologies and Services”, and Chapter 4, “Defining Network Configuration”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.When you enable technologies, you can assign colors that apply to each technology. You can also assign colors to other network operators in the same or neighboring geographic areas. These colors enable you to graphically display how the spectrum is divided when you allocate portions of the spectrum to each technology. For more information, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.

Workflow for defining a W-CDMA network configurationStep 1 Define network operators in your network. See “Defining network

operators for W-CDMA” on page 29.

Step 2 If required, allocate spectrum and assign carriers to W-CDMA. See “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.

Step 3 Define general, correlation model, power control, and carrier settings for W-CDMA. See “Defining W-CDMA network settings” on page 33.

28

Defining a W-CDMA Network ConfigurationCDMA User Guide

Defining network operators for W-CDMA Network operators are the companies that share the same or neighboring geographic area. One operator, the Home operator, is included by default. This operator represents the network of the company for which you work. On the Spectrum Allocation panel of the Network Settings dialog box, different colors are used to identify the technology type and the network operators. The home operator is not assigned a color, but uses the color that has been assigned for the technology. Additional operators are assigned a unique color to visually indicate the division of the available spectrum.For more information, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.

To define network operators for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Network Settings.

The Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box opens, with the Network Technologies panel selected by default. One or more technologies will be enabled, depending on the default settings file you chose when you created the project.

2 If you want to change the color for a technology, in the Technologies table, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.

29


3 To add a network operator, click Add below the Network Operators table.

4 If you want to rename the operator, click in the Name column for the operator and type a new name.

5 If you want to change the color for an operator that you have added, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.

You cannot assign a color to the Home operator. The color assigned for the technology is used for the Home operator.

6 Do one of the following:■ Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings

dialog box.

■ Choose another item in the tree view.

Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA Spectrum allocation involves assigning bands to technologies and network operators, and defining the spectrum range and carriers for each band. This section describes how to allocate the spectrum and define carriers for W-CDMA.If you chose a default W-CDMA settings file when you created the project, spectrum is automatically allocated and carriers are assigned, but you can modify the spectrum and add new bands as required.For more information on allocating spectrum and defining carriers for other technologies, see “Chapter 4: Defining Network Configuration” in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

Spectrum allocation for W-CDMA

W-CDMA technology can occupy more than one band. This type of configuration is necessary when the technology occupies spectrum in separate

You can also access the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box by clicking the Network Settings button on the Mobile Technology

toolbar.

30


bands or blocks of spectrum within one band, but not contiguous carrier numbers. You can define as many as 15 bands.

If the band is assigned to the Home operator, you must define■ the technology for the band■ the start and end downlink frequencies, which must be within the

range allowed for W-CDMA within your area■ the starting carrier number, which corresponds to the first carrier

at the start of the allocated bandIf a band is assigned to another network operator (i.e., a competitor), you can only assign the start and end downlink frequencies, not the technology or the carriers.

W-CDMA carriers Carriers are the frequencies that carry signals for each band. When you add a technology band, a new set of carriers is added automatically and spaced along the band.You assign carriers when you define W-CDMA sectors for your project. For more information, see “Defining W-CDMA sector settings” on page 96.

If you have more than one band defined for W-CDMA, and you want to generate predictions that include carriers from two different bands, you

need to ensure that your sectors are configured correctly. For more information, see “Considerations for multi-band networks” on page 84.

When you assign carriers to technologies across multiple bands, you must ensure that the carrier numbers are unique to each technology;

you cannot allocate the same number for a technology twice. For example, you can have carrier number 1 in W-CDMA and carrier number 1 in GSM, but you can only have carrier number 1 in W-CDMA once.

31


To create a new W-CDMA technology band 1 In the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, choose

Spectrum Allocation in the tree view.

2 On the Spectrum Allocation panel, click Add.

A new band is added to the list.

3 If you want to allocate spectrum to another network operator, choose the operator from the list in the Operator column.

The operators in the list are the ones that you defined on the Network Technologies panel (see “Defining network operators for W-CDMA” on page 29). The default operator is the Home operator. If you allocate spectrum to an operator other than the Home operator, you can view the spectrum assigned to the operator, but not the carriers or technologies. This enables you to visually model the ranges of spectrum that belong to your competitors or other adjacent operators.

4 In the Band Name column, type a name for the band, or accept the default.

5 In the Downlink Center Frequency column, type a value in the Start and End boxes to indicate the lower and upper frequencies for the band.

6 In the Carrier Start column, type the starting carrier number for the band, or accept the default.

The Carrier End column updates automatically based on the carrier spacing defined for W-CDMA.

32


7 In the Technology Type column, choose W-CDMA from the list.8 To add another band, click Add, and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.9 Click Refresh Carriers.

The carriers required for each technology band are automatically added to the Carriers list on the Carrier tab of the W-CDMA panel of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.


dialog box.■ Choose another item in the tree view.

Defining W-CDMA network settingsAfter you have allocated spectrum and defined carriers for your network, you can define the W-CDMA network settings. These settings are described in the following sections.

General settings for W-CDMAThe general settings enable you to view the spreading chip rate of the system, and to define

■ the common pilot channel (CPICH) pollution margin, which is used to determine CPICH polluters when generating analyses. Servers outside of this range are not considered polluters.

■ interference settings for other systems. These values are used to account for interference that is not specifically modeled in Mentum Planet.

You can also choose curves for CPICH factor mapping and usage factor mapping. The CPICH factor mapping and usage factor mapping are combined

The frequency values entered in the Start and End boxes in the Downlink Center Frequency column are the center frequencies of the

first and last carriers in the list you are allocating. The Spectrum graph showsthe actual spectrum occupied by all these carriers. Therefore, the start frequency displayed in the graph is half the carrier bandwidth lower than the center frequency defined for the first carrier, and the end frequency is half the carrier bandwidth higher than the center frequency defined for the last carrier in the table.

33


in the CPICH - Pollution Index layer. The CPICH - Pollution Index layer shows the proportion of traffic likely to be affected by CPICH pollution, providing a lesser weighting to areas where CPICH pollution may exist but the affected traffic is low. The curves are used as follows:

■ CPICH Factor Mapping—This curve maps CPICH factors to CPICH ratios. The CPICH factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1. Typically, if the CPICH ratio exceeds 7 dB, establishing a CPICH is unlikely. If it is less than 7 dB, establishing a CPICH is more likely. The CPICH factor is high (close to one) if establishing a CPICH in a bin is unlikely, and low (close to zero) if establishing a CPICH is likely.

■ Usage Factor Mapping—This curve maps usage factors to user densities. The usage factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1 that is determined for each bin in the analysis area. The usage factor is high (close to one) in bins where the need to establish a CPICH is high, and low (close to zero) in bins where the need to establish a CPICH is low.

You can edit the usage and CPICH curves to modify the relationship between the X- and Y-axes. This relationship affects the final calculated CPICH Pollution Index values. Adjusting the usage and CPICH curves enables you to model possible changes to your network or isolate any factors causing CPICH pollution. For example, if you move the usage curve to the right, higher user density/average user density ratio values must be met before the bins are considered to be areas where the need for CPICH coverage is high.

Correlation model settings for W-CDMA The correlation model settings enable you to define settings for modeling fading. You can define settings for the following two types of correlation models for slow fading of signals:

■ Angular—uses a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. The correlation factor is based on the angular separation of the two sectors at the mobile. The correlation factors are used in the calculation of

The X-axis of the usage factor curve is in milli-Erlangs per km2. If you have assigned a traffic map with values in subscribers per km2 to any

subscriber types, the values will be converted to Erlangs per km2 before the usage factor curve is applied.

34


handover gain and in the generation of fading signal values. For more information on the calculations used to determine the angular correlation factor, see “Using a correlation model to model slow fading” on page 516.

■ Non-angular—uses correlation factors for co-site sectors and non co-site sectors

For more information on slow fading, see “Slow fading” on page 515.

Power control settings for W-CDMA The power control settings enable you to define power control errors that you can simulate during an analysis (see “To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA” on page 170). Power control errors are caused by delays of power control commands and power control step, and can affect network performance. For more information on how effective power controls can control interference, see “Controlling interference” on page 514.

Carrier settings for W-CDMA The carrier settings enable you to define the power amplifier (PA) threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings for the carriers that you created on the Spectrum Allocation panel. The PA threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings are soft thresholds. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA threshold or noise rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached.If there are no more carriers, the traffic will exceed the soft limits rather than be blocked. For more information on how to define carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.You can define the standard that is assigned to each carrier:

■ Rel 99—the carrier supports Rel 99 traffic only (QPSK modulation)

■ Rel 99 & HSDPA—the carrier supports Rel 99 and HSDPA carriers (QPSK and 16QAM modulation)

■ HSDPA—the carrier supports HSDPA traffic only (QPSK and 16QAM modulation)

■ Rel 99 & HSPA—the carrier supports Rel 99 and HSPA carriers■ HSPA—the carrier supports HSDPA traffic on the downlink and

HSUPA traffic on the uplink.

35


PA ThresholdThe PA Threshold value is a soft target for subscribers using Rel 99 bearers. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.If you have assigned HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, the PA threshold is also used to determine how much power is available for HSDPA channels. Unused power within the PA threshold is available for HSDPA, after the Rel 99 traffic and common channels have had their share. For example, a PA threshold of 100% means that all PA power is shared between Rel 99 channels and HSDPA; a PA threshold of 60% means that 40% of the PA power is reserved for Rel 99 channels and is unavailable for HSDPA.For HSDPA only carriers, the PA Threshold is considered a hard limit. The HS-DSCH power in a carrier is the unused power of the PA up to the PA Threshold.

To define general settings for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Network Settings.2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA.

The W-CDMA panel opens with the General tab selected by default.

36


3 In the CPICH Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the power-to-interference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a CPICH signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default.

4 Type a value in the Downlink Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the downlink.

5 Type a value in the Uplink Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the uplink.

6 In the Best Ec Threshold box, type a value to define the threshold for the CPICH - Best Ec Server analysis layer.

This value is used only for the CPICH - Best Ec Server analysis layer. The analysis layer shows the best server at each location where the Ec is above this value. For more information on analysis layers, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

7 In the CPICH Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:■ Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use,

and then click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a CPICH Factor

Mapping curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.

The CPICH Factor Mapping curve is used to determine the likelihood of establishing a pilot for each bin in the analysis area.

37


8 In the Usage Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve: ■ Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use,

and then click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Usage Factor


The Usage Factor Mapping curve is used with the CPICH Factor Mapping curve to determine the CPICH Pollution Index analysis layer.



■ Click another tab.

To define correlation model settings for W-CDMA 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA.2 On the W-CDMA panel, click the Correlation Model tab.

3 On the Correlation Model tab, do one of the following:■ To use an angular correlation model, choose Angular from the

list, and type values in the boxes in the Parameters table. For

38


more information on these parameters and the associated equation, see “Slow fading” on page 515.

■ To use a non-angular correlation model, choose Non-Angular from the list, and type values in either of the following boxes in the Parameters table:

■ Inter-site Correlation Factor—the correlation factor for signals arriving from co-site sectors or carriers, which can be other sectors within a site or other carriers within a sector

■ Intra-site Correlation Factor—the correlation factor for signals arriving from sectors at different sites


dialog box.■ Choose another item in the tree view.■ Click another tab.

To define power control settings for W-CDMA 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA.2 On the W-CDMA panel, click the Power Control tab.

39


3 Type a value in either of the following boxes to define the power control deviation:■ Uplink Power Control Deviation—the standard deviation of

the uplink signal due to power control errors■ Downlink Power Control Deviation—the standard deviation of

the downlink signal due to power control errors4 Type values in either of the following boxes to define the power control

error:■ Mean Uplink Power Control Error—the mean uplink signal

error due to power control errors.■ Mean Downlink Power Control Error—the mean downlink

signal error due to power control errors.5 Do one of the following:

■ Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings dialog box.

■ Choose another item in the tree view.■ Click another tab.

To define carrier settings for W-CDMA 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA.2 On the W-CDMA panel, click the Carrier tab.

40


3 For each carrier listed in the Carrier column, type values in any of the following columns:■ Channel Name—an optional user-defined channel name. By

default, the Channel Name is the same as the Carrier. If you type user-defined channel names in the Channel Name column, they will be used throughout Mentum Planet instead of the Carrier.

■ PA Threshold—the target percentage of the power at the power amplifier for all sectors assigned to the carrier. For more information, see “PA Threshold” on page 36. For information on assigning carriers to sectors, see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99.

■ Noise Rise—the noise rise target for all sectors assigned to the carrier. This value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.

■ Preference Weightings—a relative weighting value for the carrier that represents the distribution of preferred use for the carriers listed in the Carrier column. When you assign weightings for carriers, the Preference column will automatically update to display the percentage of use for each carrier. If you

41


assign a preference weight of 0, it does not mean that the carrier will not carry any traffic, but that it is the least preferred carrier.

For more information on the Carriers table, press the F1 key.

4 From the Standard column, choose the type of 3GPP W-CDMA carrier:■ Rel 99■ Rel 99 & HSDPA■ HSDPA■ Rel 99 & HSPA■ HSPA

For more information, see “Carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 35. If you choose either HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA, an HSDPA node is created under the W-CDMA node in the Network Settings tree view. When you choose HSPA or Rel 99 & HSPA, both an HSDPA and an HSUPA node are created under the W-CDMA node in the Network Settings tree view.



To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMAThe HSDPA panels are only available if you assigned HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA to one or more carriers on the W-CDMA Carriers tab. For more information, see “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40.You must have a license to generate HSDPA analyses.

1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand W-CDMA and choose HSDPA General.

Three HSDPA panels are displayed.

42


2 On the HSDPA General tab, enable any of the following check boxes:■ Conversational—quality of service class that is guaranteed.

This class is given priority over all other traffic when allocating traffic or negotiating data rates.

■ Streaming—quality of service class used for such activities as web casts.

■ Interactive—quality of service class reserved for interactive activities.

■ Background—the last quality of service class to be considered when allocating traffic or negotiating data rates.

The traffic classes you enable affect how traffic is allocated and how data rates are negotiated.

3 Click the TFRCs tab.4 In the Use Data Rates With section, enable the check boxes for the

number of codes you want to use for the chosen Transport Format and Rate Combinations (TFRCs). The number of codes you enable affects the available data rates.

For example, if you enable 1 Code and 5 Codes, and enable TFRCs 1, 2, and 3, then only the data rates for 1 Code and 5 Codes will be available for TFRCs 1, 2, and 3. The maximum available data rate would be 1.78 Mbps (with TFRC 3). For information on HSDPA data rates, see Table 9.1 on page 205.

43


5 Enable the check box beside each TFRC (Transport Format and Resource Combination) that you want to use and type a value in the corresponding Ec/Nt for Max Data Rate column or accept the defaults.

The Ec/Nt Code value represents the ratio of the HS-DSCH channel symbol energy to the total spectral noise density.

6 Click the Terminal Downlink Data Rates tab.7 From the Terminal Category list, choose the terminal category you want

to use.

In this release, only HSDPA terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are modeled.

8 In each field of the Data Rate (kbps) column, type a new value or accept the default.

9 From the Modulation list for each data rate, choose the corresponding modulation.

10 From the Codes list, choose the corresponding codes.11 In the Ec/Nt (dB) column, for each data rate, type a new Ec/Nt value or

accept the default.12 To delete a data rate, choose a row in the table and click Remove.13 To add a new data rate, choose the data rate above which you want to

insert a new data rate and click Add.14 Do one of the following:



To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMAThe HSUPA panel (for uplink elements) is always shown with the HSDPA panel (for downlink elements). It is only available if you assigned HSPA or Rel 99 & HSPA to one or more carriers on the W-CDMA Carriers tab. For more information, see “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40.You must have a license to generate HSPA analyses.

44


1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand W-CDMA and choose HSUPA.

The FRCs panel is displayed.

2 Enable the check boxes for the number of codes you want to use for the chosen Fixed Reference Channels (FRCs).

Each FRC corresponds to a TTI length (2 or 10ms) and the number of codes used for each spreading factor.

45


46

Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers

4.
Defining W-CDMA Subscribers

subscribers■ Importing and exporting

subscriber information■ Workflow for creating

W-CDMA subscriber types■ Defining clutter types for

W-CDMA■ Defining W-CDMA bearers■ Defining subscriber

equipment types for W-CDMA■ Defining session types for

W-CDMA■ Defining quality types for

W-CDMA■ Defining service types for

W-CDMA■ Defining subscriber types for

W-CDMA

This chapter describes how to use the Subscriber

Manager to define the subscribers in your network.

Subscribers are categorized into types, which are

used when you generate an analysis of your

W-CDMA network. Creating subscriber types that

account for the possible variations of subscribers

enables you to generate reliable and comprehensive

analyses of your W-CDMA network.

47


Understanding W-CDMA subscribers The characteristics of subscribers are defined using the categories in the Subscriber Manager. You can create a diverse mix of subscribers by defining different services, quality types, and user equipment types and assigning them to subscriber types.Subscriber types are used with Monte Carlo and rapid planning analyses. Rapid planning analyses can also use a nominal subscriber, which contains a subset of the subscriber information. The nodes within the Subscriber Manager represent building blocks for subscriber types:

■ Subscriber Types—consolidate the information from the other nodes in the Subscriber Manager into various combinations to represent the mix of subscribers in your network.

■ Services—are the applications that a subscriber uses. You can define circuit-switched services and packet-switched services. HSDPA can only be used with packet-switched services.

■ Qualities—define the guaranteed and maximum data rates of a service.

■ Session Types—model the stream of packets which is used to calculate the effective amount of time that a subscriber uses a packet-switched service. You can assign session types to packet-switched service types.

■ Subscriber Equipment Types—represent the types of mobile equipment that are available in your network.

■ Bearers—represent traffic channels, and are assigned to subscriber equipment types.

■ Clutter Types—enable you to define the characteristics of the environments in which services are used. Typically, a Clutter Type includes one or more clutter classes.

For each subscriber type, you must choose a subscriber equipment type and traffic map. You can define multiple usage types, each of which comprises weightings to spread subscribers within the four different environments, a quality, and a service type. Figure 4.1 shows how the information related to subscriber types is organized hierarchically. This hierarchy is reflected in the workflow for defining subscriber types. For example, you need to define bearers (or use the defaults) before you define subscriber equipment bands, because you need to assign

48

Defining W-CDMA SubscribersCDMA User Guide

bearers to subscriber equipment bands. For details on the workflow, see “Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types” on page 51.

Figure 4.1 Subscriber Manager information hierarchy

For a detailed example of how to define a subscriber type, see “Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA” on page 77. This example shows you how to define usages, explains the effect of weighting, and describes how the settings that you specify for the subscriber type translate into a real-world scenario.Mentum Planet provides a set of default items for the Subscriber Manager, including bearers, clutter types, services, and subscriber types. To use the defaults, you must import subscriber settings using the Import Wizard. See “Importing and exporting subscriber information” on page 50.

W-CDMA subscriber types and rapid planning If you are generating a rapid planning analysis, you can use the subscriber types defined using the Subscriber Manager or you can use a nominal subscriber. Rapid planning uses only a small subset of the information in the Subscriber Manager. Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics quickly, rather than investing the time required to define detailed subscriber types using the Subscriber Manager. For more information on defining a nominal subscriber, see “Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning” on page 138.

Environments Services Qualities

Session TypesClutter Types

Usages

Technology Bands

Subscriber Equipment Types

Subscriber Types

Bearers

(defined as part of Subscriber Types)

(defined for each ClutterType and weighted per Usage)

49


Importing and exporting subscriber informationYou can import or export subscriber data using Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. In order to simplify the process of subscriber creation, you can use pre-defined subscriber worksheets to set common subscriber values. Pre-defined templates are located in the Subscriber Data folder within a project folder.

To import pre-defined subscriber information1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import.

The Import Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard, see Chapter 13, “Working with Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

2 On the File Location page, do the following:■ Choose Microsoft Excel.■ Click the Browse button, navigate to the Subscriber Data folder

located within the project folder, choose the pre-defined templates you want to use and click Open.

3 Click Next.4 On the Data Selection page, enable the check boxes next to the data you

want to import and click Finish.

As illustrated in Figure 4.1 on page 49, subscriber types consist of many inter-related elements. In order for the import of pre-defined

subscriber types to be successful, all elements must be defined.

Before using the pre-defined templates, review the details in the Readme.txt file located in the Subscriber Data folder.

50


To import or export subscriber informationWhen you export data, an Excel Spreadsheet is created that contains subscriber settings divided into different worksheets.

1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import or Export.

The Import Wizard or Export Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard or Export Wizard, see Chapter 13, “Working with Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

2 Follow the prompts in the Wizard.

Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber typesStep 1 Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you want to

analyze. For information on creating traffic maps, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 If required, define clutter types. See “Defining clutter types for W-CDMA” on page 52.

Step 3 If required, define bearers and then define subscriber equipment types, assigning bearers to the technology bands for each type. See■ “Defining W-CDMA bearers” on page 57■ “Defining subscriber equipment types for

W-CDMA” on page 63

Step 4 If required, define session types, and then define service types, assigning session types to packet-switched services. See■ “Defining session types for W-CDMA” on

page 66■ “Defining service types for W-CDMA” on page 70

Step 5 If required, define quality types. See “Defining quality types for W-CDMA” on page 69.

51


Step 6 If required, create subscriber types. See “Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA” on page 77.

Defining clutter types for W-CDMA Clutter types are groupings of clutter classes contained in the clutter grid. For more information, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.Grouping clutter classes simplifies your workflow by enabling you to define characteristics only once for the type (rather then once for each clutter class in the clutter grid). For example, you could create a type called Populated Areas - Low Density, and assign the clutter classes Suburban, Town, Village, and Semi-Rural to it.For each clutter type, you can define the characteristics of the environments within that clutter type. The available environments are:

■ Outdoor—open air environments■ Indoor—buildings or structures (normally representing areas

where single wall penetration is required)■ Deep Indoor—in-building areas where two-wall penetration is

required, or dense buildings where higher than normal penetration losses are experienced

■ Vehicular—moving vehiclesYou can enable one or more of the environments for a clutter type. Environments are used when you define usage types for a subscriber type (see “Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA” on page 77 for details). For each usage type, you can define a weighting indicating the amount of time that usage type occurs in each environment (for example, you could define a business subscriber who uses voice service in an outdoor environment 10% of the time). For all of the environments, you can define the penetration loss and the required fast fading margin. For the Vehicular environment, you can also define the speed at which the vehicle is traveling. Figure 4.2 shows a sample clutter file, and shows how example clutter types could be applied to the clutter classes in the file. In the figure, the Village and Suburban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - Low Density

To simplify the creation of subscriber types, you can import default subscriber settings and then modify the settings as required. See

“Importing and exporting subscriber information” on page 50.

52


clutter type, and the Urban and Dense Urban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. Figure 4.2 also provides example settings for each clutter type. These settings are typical of urban and suburban environments.

Figure 4.2 Examples of clutter types

When you run a Monte Carlo simulation, if an environment does not apply to a particular type of clutter (for example, in Figure 4.2, the deep indoor environment does not apply to the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type), the simulation will not place any subscribers in that type of clutter in that environment. In the example in Figure 4.2, no subscribers would be using

Clutter type:Populated Areas - High Density

Outdoorfast fading: 7 dBpenetration loss: 0 dB

Indoorfast fading: 0 dBpenetration loss: 11 dB

Deep Indoorfast fading: 0 dBpenetration loss: 22 dB

Vehicularfast fading: 3 dBpenetration loss: 6 dBspeed: 30 km/h

Dense urban

Village

Suburban

Clutter type:Populated Areas - Low Density



Deep Indoornot enabled


Urban

53


services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type, but you could have subscribers using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type.When you assign clutter classes to a clutter type, each clutter class inherits the settings that you defined for the clutter type. The W-CDMA Simulation tool will use default settings, shown in Table 4.1, for clutter classes that are not assigned to a clutter type.

For Downlink Orthogonality, the default value is 100%, and for Slow Fading Standard Deviation, the default value is 7 dB.

To define clutter types for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Clutter Types and choose New.

The Create New - Clutter Type dialog box opens.

Table 4.1 Default environment settings

Setting Outdoor Vehicular Indoor Deep Indoor

Fast fading margin 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

Penetration loss 0 dB 7 dB 10 dB 20 dB

Speed N/A 50 km/h N/A N/A

54


2 In the Name box, type a name for the clutter type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the clutter type.4 To define the orthogonality factor for the clutter type, type a value in the

Downlink Orthogonality box.

A value of 100% represents perfect orthogonality.

5 To define the standard deviation for slow fading of the clutter type, type a value in the Slow Fading Standard Deviation box.

This value is used to model the shadowing from obstacles that cannot be handled by a propagation model. Slightly higher values (approximately 8 dB) may be appropriate for high density urban areas, lower values (approximately 6.5 dB) for open areas.

55


6 Enable any of the following check boxes to choose environments for the clutter type and define the fast fading margin and penetration loss specific to the environment:■ Enable Outdoor—enables the outdoor environment for the

clutter type■ Enable Vehicular—enables the vehicular environment for the

clutter type■ Enable Indoor—enables the indoor environment for the clutter

type■ Enable Deep Indoor—enables the deep indoor environment for

the clutter type

For more information on the settings associated with these environments, press the F1 key.

7 If you enabled the Vehicular environment, type a value in the Vehicular Speed box or accept the default.

The speed is used in conjunction with the sector settings to determine whether a subscriber will be served by a sector. Subscribers that exceed the maximum speed for a sector will not be served by the sector. For more information, see “Quality settings for W-CDMA” on page 98

8 Click OK.

To assign clutter classes to clutter types for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Clutter Types and choose Assign Clutter Classes.

The Assign Clutter Classes dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing clutter type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the clutter type and choosing Edit.

56


2 Choose a clutter type from the Clutter Types list, and then choose one or more clutter classes from the Unassigned Clutter Classes list, and click Assign.

The clutter classes in the Unassigned Clutter Classes list are defined in the clutter grid file for the project. For more information, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

The W-CDMA Simulation tool will use default settings for any unassigned clutter classes.

3 Click Save and then click Close.

Defining W-CDMA bearers Bearers represent the traffic channels in terms of their service data rate and dedicated bearers in terms of their channel data rate. Bearers are displayed under the Bearers node in the Subscriber Manager and are assigned to

To unassign clutter classes from a clutter type, choose a clutter class under a clutter type node in the Clutter Types section, and click

Unassign.

You can create a new clutter type by clicking New in the Assign Clutter Classes dialog box. To modify the properties of the new clutter type,

click Edit. The Edit - Clutter Type dialog box opens.

57


subscriber equipment types. A default set of bearers is supplied with Mentum Planet, but you can define additional bearers or modify any of the default bearers.The following sections provide information about W-CDMA bearers. For information about cdma2000 bearers, see “Defining cdma2000 bearers” on page 299.

W-CDMA bearersW-CDMA bearers are configured with

■ direction (uplink or downlink)■ service and channel data rates■ signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) to frame erasure rate (FER)

mapping table ■ downlink channel elements■ downlink DPCH power offsets

Bearer Eb/No to FERThe Eb/No to FER mapping is defined using a curve that can be created or edited using the Curve Editor. When you generate analysis layers, this mapping is used to calculate the Downlink Service FER value from the Downlink - Eb/No analysis layer. For information on the Downlink - Eb/No layer and the Downlink Service FER value, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.To ensure that borderline Eb/No values are accounted for, the points you define for the curve should exceed the Eb/No values that you are interested in analyzing. If values generated by the analysis exceed your defined range, they will be represented by the last defined point. The Curve Editor interpolates values linearly, based on Eb/No and FER pairs. The FER values are calculated as follows:

■ For Eb/No values greater than the highest point in the curve, the FER at that highest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 4.3, for Eb/No values over 8.7 dB, a FER value of 0% is assigned.

■ For Eb/No values defined in the range of the curve, the Curve Editor linearly assigns a FER value based on the two nearest

58


values, above and below. In the example in Figure 4.3, an Eb/No value of 4.3 dB is assigned a FER value of 12%.

■ For Eb/No values less than the lowest point in the curve, the FER at the lowest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 4.3, for Eb/No values less than -2.3 dB, a FER value of 90% is assigned.

Figure 4.3 Curve Editor displaying the linear relationship between Eb/No and FER

To define W-CDMA bearers1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Bearers and choose New.2 In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer

Required list, choose W-CDMA Bearer, and click OK.

The Create New - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box opens.

59


3 In the Name box, type a name for the bearer.4 In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer.5 In the Direction section, choose one of the following options to define the

direction of the bearer:■ Uplink■ Downlink

Typically, you would create a set of two bearers: one for the uplink and one for the downlink.

6 In the Service Data Rate box, type the service data rate for the traffic channels.

7 In the Channel Data Rate box, type the channel data rate for the dedicated bearers.

8 From the Technology Type list, choose the type of technology for the bearer.

The only technology available for the bearer is W-CDMA.

60


9 In the S/N to Error Rate Mapping section, do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to

FER curve, and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER

curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.

10 If you are defining a downlink bearer, in the Number of Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer.

This number represents the number of channel elements required for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network).

The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box.

11 If you are defining a downlink bearer, type values for the following:■ Maximum DPCH Power Offset—the maximum power

correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates.

■ Minimum DPCH Power Offset—the minimum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates.

12 Click OK.

You can modify the properties of an existing bearer from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the bearer and choosing Edit.

61


To define HSDPA bearers1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-


Required list, choose HSDPA Bearer, and click OK.

The Create New - HSDPA Bearer dialog box opens.

3 In the Name box, type a name for the bearer.4 In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer.

The direction of the HSDPA bearer is uplink.

5 In the Service Data Rate box, choose the service data rate for the traffic channels.

6 In the Channel Data Rate box, type the channel data rate for the dedicated bearers.


The only technology available for the bearer is W-CDMA.

62


8 In the S/N to Error Rate Mapping section, do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to



9 In the Number of Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer.

This number represents the number of channel elements required for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network).


10 Click OK.

Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA The Subscriber Manager enables you to group the mobile equipment types in your network into subscriber equipment types. When you create a subscriber equipment type, you can define subscriber equipment technology band types that contain information about the performance of subscriber equipment for a particular technology and band.For example, you could create a subscriber equipment type that contains five subscriber equipment technology bands that represent the capabilities of the mobile on each of the bands. For more information on creating technology bands, see “To create a new W-CDMA technology band” on page 32.

To define subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Subscriber Equipment Types and choose New.

The Create New - Mobile Equipment dialog box opens.

2 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber equipment type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the subscriber equipment

type.4 Click OK.

63


To define subscriber equipment bands for W-CDMAWhen you define subscriber equipment bands, you define the characteristics of the band, and then assign bearers to it.If you assign multiple bearers to the equipment band, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, the most efficient bearer that meets the quality requirement of the service for the subscriber type will be used for each individual subscriber in the analysis. The most efficient bearer is the bearer with the highest data rate.

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, expand Subscriber Equipment Types, expand an equipment type, right-click Technology Bands and choose New.

The Create New - Mobile Equipment Technology Band dialog box opens.

64


2 To define the transmit power, type a value in the following boxes:■ Maximum Transmit Power—the maximum transmit power at

the power amplifier output■ Minimum Transmit Power—the minimum transmit power at

the power amplifier output3 In the Maximum Active Servers box, type a value to define the

maximum number of handover servers in the active set (i.e., the number of rake fingers) supported by the equipment type.

4 In the Antenna Gain box, type a value to define the antenna gain.5 In the Receiver Noise Figure box, type a value to define the noise figure

of the receiver.6 In the Body Loss (Voice) box, type a value to define the body loss for

voice traffic.7 In the Body Loss (Data) box, type a value to define type a value to define

the body loss for data traffic.8 From the Technology Band list, choose the band for this equipment type.

Technology bands are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Defining W-CDMA network settings” on page 33.

9 If the mobile equipment type supports HSDPA, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the HSDPA Terminal Category list.

10 In the Bearers section, do either of the following:■ To assign a bearer to the equipment type, choose a bearer from

the Available list and click Add. The bearer is added to the Assigned list.

■ To unassign a bearer from the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Selected list and click Remove. The bearer is added to the Available list.

11 Click OK.

You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber equipment technology band from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the

subscriber equipment technology band and choosing Edit.

65


Defining session types for W-CDMA Session types are used to characterize the size and distribution of sessions in your network. A session defines the characteristics of a subscriber’s use of a packet-switched service (for example, e-mail or Web browsing), and consists of one or more packet arrivals. Once you create session types, they can be assigned to packet-switched services. For more information on packet-switched services, see “Defining service types for W-CDMA” on page 70.For packet-switched traffic, the distribution of packets during simulation impacts how queued traffic is modeled. Packet-switched sessions use the traffic model recommended by the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) to model packet traffic. This model is described in UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0, “Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS): Selection procedure for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS”, which is available at http://www.etsi.org.Figure 4.4 shows how a packet call is modeled using this traffic model. The horizontal axis represents the time elapsed, and the vertical lines represent individual packets. The arrival of several packets in a burst is called a packet call, and the arrival of these packet calls is called a packet service (or packet-switched) session. The reading time is the amount of time that a user spends studying data before making another packet call.

Figure 4.4 Packet service session

Individual packet

First packetarrives at base

station buffer Packet calls

Interarrivaltime between

packetsLast packet arrives at basestation buffer

Packet service session

Packet timeout

Reading time

Time

66

http://www.etsi.org

http://www.etsi.org


When you define session types using the Session Type dialog box, the following values in the dialog box refer to the ETSI model:

■ Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)■ Mean Reading Time (Dpc)■ Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)■ Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)■ Packet Timeout

Values used in the ETSI model are displayed in brackets following the label. For example, Mean No. of Packet Calls refers to the Npc value in the ETSI model.

To define session types for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Session Types and choose New.

The Create New - Session Type dialog box opens.

2 In the Name box, type a name for the session type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the session type.

67


4 To define the packet settings, type a value in any of the following boxes (see Figure 4.4 for details about how these values are modeled):■ Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)—the mean number of packet

calls in a packet service session■ Mean Reading Time (Dpc)—the mean reading time between

packet calls in seconds. ■ Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)—the mean

number of packets in a packet call■ Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)—the mean

interarrival time between packets■ Packet Timeout—the time between the last packet in a packet

call and the designated end of the packet call (i.e., before the reading time starts)

5 In the Packet Size Distribution section, choose an option to model the distribution of packet sizes:■ Pareto—uses a Pareto distribution model■ Poisson—uses a Poisson distribution model

6 To define the packet size based on distribution type, do one of the following:■ If you chose Pareto as the distribution type, type a value in all of

the following boxes to define the packet size:■ Packet Size Alpha—the Alpha packet distribution

parameter for Pareto distributions■ Minimum Packet Size—the minimum size of a packet■ Maximum Packet Size—the maximum size of a packet

■ If you chose Poisson as the distribution type, type a value in the Mean Packet Size box to define the mean packet size.

7 Click OK.

You can modify the properties of an existing session type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the session type and choosing

Edit.

68


Defining quality types for W-CDMAWhen you define the usages for subscriber types, you can specify the quality for each usage. The quality type defines two levels of throughput in each direction for the service assigned to the usage. Each quality type contains settings for the guaranteed and maximum data rates of the service. When you generate an analysis, if the guaranteed data rate is not available at a location, then the service is not available at that location.

To define quality types for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Qualities and choose New.

The Create New - Quality dialog box opens.

2 In the Name box, type a name for the quality type.3 In the Comment box, type a description for the quality type.4 To define the uplink data rate, type values in any of the following boxes:

■ Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate—the guaranteed uplink data rate required by the quality type

■ Maximum Uplink Data Rate—the maximum uplink data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate.

The guaranteed uplink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the uplink. If a bearer with a rate that falls

69


between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served.

5 To define the downlink data rate, type values in any of the following boxes: ■ Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate—the guaranteed downlink

data rate required by the quality type■ Maximum Downlink Data Rate—the maximum downlink data

rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate.

The guaranteed downlink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the downlink. If a bearer with a rate that falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served.

6 In the Traffic QoS Class section, choose the traffic class that applies to the quality and its associated data rates.

7 Click OK.

Defining service types for W-CDMA Service types are the applications that your subscribers are using. You can define the following types of services:

■ Circuit-switched (such as voice)—these types of services are delay intolerant, and require dedicated bearers

■ Packet-switched (such as Web browsing)—these types of services have various levels of delay tolerance, from delay intolerant to delay tolerant. The delay-intolerant services require dedicated bearers, while the delay-tolerant services will use shared bearers if available in the technology.

You can modify the properties of an existing quality type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the quality type and choosing

Edit.

70


To define circuit-switched service types for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Services and choose New.2 In the New Service dialog box, choose Circuit Switched Service from

the list, and click OK.

The Create New - Circuit Switched Service dialog box opens.

3 In the Name box, type a name for the circuit-switched service type.4 In the Comments box, type a description for the circuit-switched service

type.5 In the Erlangs per Subscriber box, type a value to define the number of

Erlangs generated by each subscriber type associated with this service.

During a Monte Carlo analysis, when subscribers are distributed using the traffic map associated with the subscriber type, this value determines the number of subscribers that are distributed per service. For example, a value of 1 in this box results in one subscriber distributed for each subscriber in the traffic map. A value of 0.5 results in half the number of subscribers that are in the traffic map being distributed.

71


6 To define the percentage of time that traffic is transmitted in a direction, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Uplink Activity Factor—the percentage of time uplink traffic is

actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.■ Downlink Activity Factor—the percentage of time downlink

traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.

7 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit

control overhead for uplink traffic■ Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit

control overhead for downlink traffic

The Uplink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically based on the Uplink Activity Factor and Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead. The Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead is calculated as a percentage of the Uplink Activity Factor and then added to the Uplink Activity Factor. For example, if the Uplink Activity Factor is 50% and the Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead value is 2%, then the Uplink Channel Activity Factor is 51 = (50+50*0.02).

The Downlink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically in the same way, based on the Downlink Activity Factor and Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead.

8 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited.

You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority overrides the service priority.

9 To define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered, type a value in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box.

The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for

72


the Downlink - Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less downlink service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector downlink service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including CPICH - Ec/Io.

10 To define the maximum FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Required Uplink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

uplink■ Required Downlink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

downlink

11 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box.

12 Click OK.

To define packet-switched service types for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Services and choose New.2 In the New Service dialog box, choose Packet Switched Service from


The Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing circuit-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the circuit-switched

service type and choosing Edit.

73


3 In the Name box, type a name for the packet-switched service type.4 In the Comments box, type a description for the packet-switched service

type.5 In the Input Load section, do one of the following to define the mean

input load:■ To define the mean input load in kilobits per hour, choose the

Kilobits/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

■ To define the mean input load in sessions per hour, choose the Sessions/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

■ To define the mean input load in Erlangs per subscriber, choose the Erlangs/Subscriber option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

These values represent the average input load over a sustained period, not a peak or instantaneous load.

74


6 From the Session Type list, choose a session type for this service type.

For more information on session types, see “Defining session types for W-CDMA” on page 66.

7 In the Symmetry section, do one of the following to define the primary and non-primary traffic on the channel:■ Choose the Uplink option as the primary direction of traffic, and

then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and non-primary directions.

■ Choose the Downlink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and non-primary directions.

The asymmetry factor defines the relationship between primary traffic and non-primary traffic. For example, choosing Downlink as the primary direction and defining an asymmetry factor of 0.1 would set the uplink traffic to be 0.1 times that of the primary downlink direction.

8 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes: ■ Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit and

control overhead for uplink traffic■ Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit and

control overhead for downlink traffic9 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, and enable the Use Priority check box for the subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority will override the service priority for that subscriber type.



75


the Downlink - Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less downlink service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector downlink service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including CPICH - Ec/Io.

11 To define the FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Required Uplink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

uplink■ Required Downlink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

downlink


13 If you want to view information about the uplink and downlink channel activity factors, click Illustration.

The Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box opens. This dialog box enables you to choose bearers that could potentially be assigned to this service. When you choose a bearer, the fields update to show the values that would be used in an analysis for this service type if the bearers were to be used for this service.

76


14 From the Uplink Bearer and Downlink Bearer lists, choose the bearers for which you want to view statistics.

The other fields in the dialog box automatically display values depending on uplink bearer and downlink bearer that you choose.

The bearers that you choose in the entries in the Illustration window are for illustration purposes only. They do not affect the analysis.

15 Click Close to close the Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box.

16 Click OK to close the Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box.

Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA Subscriber types are defined by:

■ the subscriber equipment used■ the traffic map on which the subscriber type is based■ the different kinds of services that a subscriber uses and the

quality that applies to each service■ the environments where the usage takes place

The information contained in a subscriber type is used when you generate Monte Carlo simulations or analysis layers.

ExampleYou might create a subscriber type called Advanced Business that represents subscribers who use mobiles as their primary business tools. The subscribers represented by this type use their mobiles for everything from downloading email to placing cellular calls. After you create the usage types, you can assign a ratio to determine the proportion of the traffic that is in each of the

You can modify the properties of an existing packet-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the packet-switched


The total number of subscribers is defined by the traffic map and scaling, not by the number of usage types or environments. The total

number of subscribers for each subscriber type is spread across the usage types and environments defined for the subscriber type.

77


available environments. In addition, you can set the service type and quality type for each usage type. For example, if you set up four usage types for the Advanced Business subscriber type, you could assign the weightings, service types, and quality types shown in Table 4.2.

In this example, the total weighting value calculated across all usage types is 40. Therefore, the Advanced Business subscriber type uses Usage 1 50% of the time, Usage 2 10% of the time, Usage 3 20% of the time, and Usage 4 20% of the time.

To create a subscriber type for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Subscriber Types and choose New.

The Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box opens.

Table 4.2 Example usage type settings

Usage type Indoor Deep

Indoor Outdoor Vehicular Service type Quality type

1 5 5 5 5 Voice 12.2kbps_Conver-sational

2 1 2 1 0 Video 64kbps_Streaming

3 2 2 4 0 WWW 144kbps_Interactive

4 2 2 4 0 Email 12.2kbps_Back-ground

78


2 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber type.3 In the Comment box, type a description for the subscriber type.4 In the Traffic Scaling box, type a value to define how much traffic should

be scaled up or down from the traffic map associated with the subscriber type.

Values greater than 1.0 indicate a greater number of subscribers of this type than the value indicated in the associated traffic map.

5 If you want to define the priority in which the subscriber is served or provided with the best level of service when network capacity is limited, enable the Use Priority check box and type a priority value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority.

If you enable this check box, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, this subscriber is served according to the priority that you define. If you do not enable this check box, the traffic is allocated according to the priority set

79


for the services, which is defined in the Priority box for both circuit-switched and packet-switched services.

6 In the Variance section, choose one of the following options to define the variability of the number of subscribers generated by different Monte Carlo runs:■ Mean—the same mean number of subscribers will be used on

every run.■ Poisson—a Poisson distribution of subscribers will be used.■ User Defined—choose this option to define a custom Poisson

distribution with modified variability. A value of 1 is a standard Poisson distribution.

7 From the Subscriber Equipment Types list, choose the equipment type of the subscriber type.

For more information on creating a subscriber equipment type, see “Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA” on page 63.

8 From the Traffic list, choose the traffic map that you want to associate with the subscriber.

You can only choose traffic maps in subscribers/km2 or Erlangs/km2. Traffic maps in Kbps/km2 are not valid. The type of traffic map that you choose affects the service types that are available in the usage types section. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For information on generating and adding a traffic map to the project, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

9 Define usage types as described in “To define usage types for W-CDMA” on page 81.

10 Click OK.

You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber type and choosing

Edit.

80


To define usage types for W-CDMA 1 In the Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box, click New.

A new row is created in the table.

2 Click in the Short Name box and type a description for the usage type.

The description can be up to eight characters in length.

3 To define the weighting ratio for each clutter type, click in each of the following boxes and type values or accept the defaults:■ Indoor Weighting—the weighting for indoor usage as a ratio

between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type■ Deep Indoor Weighting—the weighting for deep indoor usage

as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

■ Outdoor Weighting—the weighting for outdoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

■ Vehicular Weighting—the weighting for vehicular usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

Values must be positive integers. For more information, press the F1 key or see “Example” on page 77 for information about how the weighting numbers are used.

4 Click in the Service box and choose a service type for the usage type from the list.

Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For more information about circuit-switched and packet-switched service types, see “Defining service types for W-CDMA” on page 70.

You can create traffic maps using the information defined in the Subscriber Manager. The traffic maps combine the voice and packet

usages for all defined subscriber types. For more information, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

81


5 Click in the Quality box and choose a quality type for the usage type from the list.

For more information about quality types, see “Defining quality types for W-CDMA” on page 69.

6 To add another usage type, repeat Step 1 to Step 5.7 Click OK.

82

Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites

5.
Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding W-CDMA sites

and sectors■ Considerations for multi-band

networks■ Workflow for configuring and

placing W-CDMA sites■ Creating W-CDMA sites■ Calculating base station link

budgets for W-CDMA sectors■ Globally editing base station

link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors

■ Defining W-CDMA sector settings

■ Editing sites and sectors■ Deleting sites■ Viewing W-CDMA carrier

assignment and interference information

This chapter describes how to configure and place a

W-CDMA site, define sector settings specific to

W-CDMA, and globally edit W-CDMA sector

properties.

Once you have defined the W-CDMA network

configuration, you can configure and place the sites

in your network.

83


Understanding W-CDMA sites and sectors When you define the sectors in a site, you need to define the following settings specific to W-CDMA technologies:

■ Carrier assignments (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99)

■ Hardware settings (see “Hardware settings for W-CDMA” on page 96)

■ Resource settings (see “Resource settings for W-CDMA” on page 97)

■ Implementation settings (see “Implementation settings for W-CDMA” on page 97)

■ Quality settings (see “Quality settings for W-CDMA” on page 98)

■ Power settings (see “Power settings for W-CDMA” on page 99)For more information about general site and sector properties, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about TDMA/FDMA site and sector properties, see Chapter 5, “Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

Considerations for multi-band networks If your network is configured with multiple bands (see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30), and you want to generate different predictions for carriers on two different bands, you need to do the following:

■ configure two different sectors, with same location and azimuth, but different antenna patterns and propagation models (see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide)

■ assign a carrier from one band to one sector and the second band to the second sector (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99)

■ when you generate the analysis, include both sectorsIn the area where both sectors can serve subscribers, the subscribers that are served by each sector will depend on the carrier preference weightings, and

84

Configuring and Placing W-CDMA SitesCDMA User Guide

the PA power and noise limits. For more information, see “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40.This gives you the flexibility of simulating different scenarios, for example:

■ If all carriers have the same preference weightings, subscribers will be allocated equally between the two sectors, except for an area at the fringe where only the stronger sector can work, until the PA power and noise limits are reached. At this point, subscribers will be allocated to the remaining carrier or carriers.

■ Carriers on the weaker sector could be given a zero preference weighting, so that only the stronger sector will be allocated subscribers until the PA power and noise limits are reached. Any additional subscribers would then be allocated to the weaker sector. In this case, more users in the fringe area could be blocked.

Workflow for configuring and placing W-CDMA sitesStep 1 Define the network configuration. See “Chapter 3: Defining a W-

CDMA Network Configuration” on page 27.

Step 2 Configure and place W-CDMA sites. See “Creating W-CDMA sites” on page 85.

Creating W-CDMA sitesThis section describes how to configure and place W-CDMA sites using a new site configuration.You can also create and place sites based on an existing site configuration. For more information, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To create a W-CDMA site 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and

choose New.2 In the Site Configuration dialog box, choose the Create a New

Configuration option, and click Continue.

The Site Properties dialog box opens.

3 Click the Site tab, and type a prefix for the site in the Site ID box.

85


4 If you want to add additional site information, type additional identifiers or descriptions in the Site UID, Site Name, or Site Name 2 boxes.

5 Define the remaining site settings.

General site settings are described in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

6 Click the Sectors tab, and then click in the Technology field and choose W-CDMA from the list.

7 Define the remaining general sector settings.

General sector settings are described in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

If you want to calculate the radiated power for a sector, you must place the site first. Complete this procedure and then see “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87.

8 On the Sectors tab, click Add Sector to add as many sectors to the site as required.

If you define W-CDMA sector settings before adding other sectors, the settings that you used for the last sector will be automatically applied to the new sectors that you add.

9 Click the Site tab and do either of the following to place the site:■ Click in the Map window to add a site at that location.■ Enable the Manual Entry check box, choose the coordinate

units from the Units list, type the coordinates in the X/Long and Y/Lat boxes, and click Place Site.

The created site is displayed in the Map window and a site with the name <Site>_1 is added to the Sites category in the Project Explorer.

10 If you want to use the configuration again, choose File ➤ Save Configuration As, type a name for the site configuration (.dsc) file in the File Name box, and click Save.

Site configuration files are stored in the Config\GSM subfolder of the project folder. For more information on using an existing site configuration, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you save the .dsc file, the settings for individual sectors (defined in the Sector Settings dialog box) are not saved.

86


11 When you have finished placing sites, click Close.

Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to calculate the radiated power for a sector based on the power output of the sector’s power amplifier (PA) plus or minus system gains and losses. You can also use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box to define settings for specific sites, sector groups, or flags. For more information, see “Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors” on page 92.The value for ERP or EIRP on the Sectors tab of the Site Properties dialog box is the same as the value for CPICH EIRP in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box. The ERP or EIRP values on the Sectors tab are read-only and are calculated as shown in Equation 5.1.

Equation 5.1 CPICH EIRP calculation

When you generate predictions, the power value used is the value in the ERP or EIRP box for the sector.

Losses and gainsThe Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to define specific losses and gains for the sector and updates the total power for the sector using these values.For both the downlink and uplink, a default antenna gain value is added based on the antenna type assigned to the sector. You cannot modify this value.All new sites are also given a default Feeder value on both the downlink and the uplink to account for cable and connector losses. A default BTS Noise Figure is assigned to the uplink to account for base station receiver noise gain. You should modify the BTS Noise Figure according to the hardware manufacturer's specifications.You can add additional losses and gains as required. Because the Friis noise formula (see Equation 5.2) is used to calculate the Uplink Noise Figure, the

You can edit the properties of a single site after you place it. In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose

Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, edit the properties, click Apply, and then click Close.

CPICH EIRP First carrier CPICH power Antenna boresight gainDownlink losses and gains

+ +=

87


order of the items on the Base Station Losses & Gains tab in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box must match the hierarchy of the sector hardware (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2). By default, the BTS Noise Figure is always the last item in the list.

Figure 5.1 Example sector hardware configuration

The hardware configuration shown in Figure 5.1 would be represented in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box in Mentum Planet as shown in Figure 5.2.

Figure 5.2 Example Uplink Losses & Gains settings

The Uplink Composite Noise Figure (Composite System Noise Figure (NFs)) is calculated as follows, using the Friis noise formula:

Equation 5.2 Uplink Composite Noise Figure calculation

Antenna

Antenna Feeder TailTower Mounted Amplifier (TMA)

FeederFeeder Tail

BTS Amplifier

88


Where:All terms are in their linear form.

is the Composite System Noise Factor (linear ratio).

is the Composite System Noise Figure.

is the Noise Factor of individual elements (linear ratio).

is the numerical gain of individual elements (linear ratio).

Note that a loss (in dB) is taken as negative gain:

So, for passive elements:

To calculate base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site for

which you want to modify the base station link budget settings, and choose Edit.

2 In the Site Properties dialog box, click the Sectors tab.

Some subscriber-related settings must be configured in the Subscriber Manager. For more information see “Defining subscriber equipment

types for W-CDMA” on page 63.

If you are using an Excel spreadsheet to import base station link budget settings, you must use the Index column to specify the order of the

items in the Losses and Gains list. For more information, see “Importing and exporting project data” in Chapter 13, “Working With Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

fs f1f2 1–

G1-------------

f3 1–G1G2--------------

f4 1–G1G2G3--------------------- …

fn 1–G1G2G3…G n 1–( )---------------------------------------------+ + + + +=

fs

NFs 10log10fs=

f1…fn

G1…Gn

G 10G db( )

10----------------

=

f 10NF db( )

10-------------------

=

f 1G----=

89


3 Click in the ERP or EIRP box of the sector you want to modify, and then click the Base Station Link Budget (...) button.

The Base Station Link Budget dialog box opens with the Uplink tab selected.

4 Do one of the following to choose the carrier(s) to which you want to apply the settings:■ If you want to apply the settings to a single carrier, choose a

carrier from the Carrier list.■ If you want to apply the settings to all carriers on the sector,

enable the Apply the Same Settings to All Carriers check box.5 On the Base Station Losses & Gains tab, do the following to modify the

Feeder settings or accept the defaults:■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal

noise associated with the gain.6 To modify the BTS Noise Figure value, type a value in the Noise Figure

box.

90


7 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the uplink:■ Click Add.■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal

noise associated with the gain.■ If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change

the order of items in the list of losses and gains.8 To remove an item from the Uplink tab, choose the item and click

Remove.

The Uplink Composite Noise Figure box at the bottom of the Base Station Link Budget dialog box updates to reflect the loss, gain, and noise figure values.

9 Click the Downlink tab at the bottom of the Base Station Losses & Gains tab and do the following to modify the Feeder value for the downlink, or accept the default:■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.

10 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the downlink:■ Click Add.■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change

the order of items in the list of losses and gains.11 To remove an item from the Downlink tab, choose the item and click

Remove.

The Total EIRP and CPICH EIRP boxes update to reflect the loss or gain values.

91


12 To modify power information for the sector, type values in any of the following boxes:■ PA Power—the power at the power amplifier. When you change

this value, the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power. The Total EIRP box updates automatically to reflect the new Total EIRP for the power amplifier. You can also modify the PA power on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. See “To define hardware settings” on page 99. The two boxes are interdependent. Changes in one location are reflected in the other location.

■ CPICH Power—the power of the CPICH channel. When you change this value, the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power and the CPICH EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 5.1 on page 87.

■ CPICH % of PA Power—the CPICH power as a percentage of PA power. When you change this value, the CPICH Power updates automatically to reflect the new ratio and the CPICH EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 5.1 on page 87.

■ Total EIRP—the total PA power for the sector (calculated as PA Power + Downlink losses and gains). When you change this value, the PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the change and the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power.

13 Click OK.

The ERP or EIRP value is updated for the sector.

Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool enables you to define base station link budget settings and apply them to specific sites, sector groups, or flags. You can add, remove, update, and reorder base station link budget settings.

92


For example, you could use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool with a newly created project to define a common set of losses and gains according to the hardware used most often in your network. Using these common settings as a base, you could then define individual or unique sector settings as required.Before using the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool, you should be familiar with the Base Station Link Budget tool. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87.

To globally edit base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:

■ To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags, and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box opens, displaying the Uplink/Reverse settings for the first sector in the group, the first sector with the specified flag condition, or the first sector chosen in the Project Explorer.

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box is not technology-dependent and will update all of the sectors you choose

with the same settings. Depending on the options you choose, existing settings may be lost.

93


2 From the Action list, choose the type of action that you want to perform:■ Insert—adds additional losses/gains in the order specified, but

leaves existing settings intact.■ Remove—removes any losses/gains that match the specified

name/order. You can choose to exclude individual losses/gains.■ Replace—replaces the values for the specified losses/gains.■ Update—updates values for losses/gains that match the

specified name/order. You can choose to update the name, the associated value, or both.

You can only choose one action each time you apply changes to the base station link budget settings. If you want to perform multiple actions, use the Apply button each time you define settings for a specific action. If you choose another action before applying the new settings, the changes for the current action will be lost.

94


3 If you chose either Remove or Update in Step 2, choose one of the following filters from the Action Options list:■ By Name & Order—removes/updates only existing losses/

gains that match both the name and specified order.■ By Name Only—removes/updates only existing losses/gains

with the same name.■ By Order Only—removes/updates only existing losses/gains

that match the specified order.4 On the Uplink/Reverse tab, do any of the following.

■ If you chose Insert, Remove, or Replace in Step 2, and you want to add an item, click Add, then from the Type list choose Loss or Gain, type a name in the Name box and a value in the Value box. If you are adding a gain, a type a value in the Noise Figure box. You can add additional losses/gains as required.

■ If you chose Remove in Step 2, enable the check box beside each item that you want to remove.

■ If you chose Replace in Step 2, modify the values for the losses/gains that you want to replace as required

■ If you chose Update in Step 2, enable the check box and modify the values for each field that you want to update.

The options that are available will depend on the action that you chose in Step 2.

5 If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.

6 If required, click the Downlink/Reverse tab and repeat Step 2 to Step 5.7 Do one of the following:

■ To apply your changes and exit from the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box, click OK.

■ To apply your changes and choose a new action from the Action list, click Apply and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.

95


Defining W-CDMA sector settings For each site in your project, you need to define W-CDMA sector settings. The first step in defining sector settings is assigning the carriers to the sector. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.After you assign carriers to sectors, you can define sector settings for each carrier as described in the following sections. The sector settings that are available will be slightly different, depending on the type of carrier.

Figure 5.3 W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box showing the Hardware panel

Hardware settings for W-CDMAHardware settings enable you to define the equipment for the sector, including channel elements, noise figure, throughput, and link loss. A channel element

96


is a logical controller on a channel element card or server that controls and routes data for services in the W-CDMA network. The number of channel elements required per service depends upon the amount of throughput the service needs and the vendor’s equipment. Services that require higher throughput may need more channel elements. As part of the hardware settings, you can also activate a specific technology for a sector and, in this way, conserve network resources by offering only those services needed. For example, if a sector is serving a sparsely populated area you can activate only R99 even though the carrier is both R99 and HSDPA. For more information, see “To define hardware settings” on page 99.

Resource settings for W-CDMAResource settings enable you to define how best to allocate sector resources so that the maximum number of subscribers are served. Mentum Planet considers the traffic channel limitations as well as the uplink and downlink elements defined per carrier in the network analysis.For more information, see “To define sector resources” on page 101.

Implementation settings for W-CDMAImplementation settings enable you to define noise rise and traffic power settings for rapid planning.

Rapid planning settingsRapid planning provides a quick method of generating analysis layers, as an alternative to the Monte Carlo simulation. It also provides the ability to create layers for a given network or sector loads. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129. The rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel are used when layers are generated using the rapid planning option. Unlike the Monte Carlo method, which obtains many values required to compute analysis layers from the operating points file, the Rapid Planning method does not generate an operating points file. Instead, the Rapid Planning method derives most of the values required to compute analysis layers from the Powers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power values are the two exceptions; to determine these values, the Uplink Noise Rise, DPCH Total Traffic Power,

97


and, for HSDPA, HS-DSCH Power values should be manually defined for the sector.

The Uplink Noise Rise value is used to calculate equivalent Current Total Receive Power, which is required to compute all uplink analysis layers. The DPCH Total Traffic Power and, for HSDPA carriers, the HS-DSCH Power are used to calculate Total Traffic Transmit Power, which is used to compute most CPICH, downlink, and HSDPA analysis layers. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power are also used to compute the Other - Path Balance layer.For more information, see “To define implementation settings” on page 103.

Quality settings for W-CDMAQuality settings enable you to define settings related to the quality of service for the sector, including, among others, the maximum number of subscribers, maximum speed of vehicular subscribers, and the handover margin.The maximum speed assigned to the sector is used to determine whether subscribers in a vehicular environment will be served by the sector. Vehicular subscribers have an expected speed associated with them depending on the clutter class in which the service is being provided. This speed is defined when you create clutter types (see “Defining clutter types for W-CDMA” on page 52). Subscribers in all environments other than vehicular are assigned a fixed speed of 3 km/h. If the vehicular subscriber speed exceeds the maximum, then the subscriber is not served by the sector. This enables you to ensure that fast-moving subscribers are not served by certain sectors (for example, microcells). The maximum speed is used when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, During the random pattern generation phase, if a randomly generated subscriber has an associated speed that exceeds the sector limit, the subscriber will not be served by the sector.For more information, see “To define quality settings” on page 104.

If you do not define these values manually, you can enable the Override All Cell Loads option on the System panel of the Analysis

Settings dialog box, and define values for DPCH Available Traffic Power, HS-DSCH Available Traffic Power, HS-DSCH Activity Factor, and Uplink Load. For more information, see “To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA” on page 136.

98


Power settings for W-CDMAPower settings enable you to define the power requirements for the sector, including the limits for CPICH power, control channels, and traffic power.For more information, see “To define W-CDMA power settings” on page 105.

To assign carriers to sectors 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, double-click a site.


2 In the Site Properties dialog box, on the Sectors tab, click W-CDMA Settings.

The Carriers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box opens by default.

3 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check boxes next to the carrier IDs that you want to assign to the sector.

Only the technology bands that are assigned the W-CDMA technology are displayed in this section. When you enable a carrier, the carrier is added to the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box tree view. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA” on page 30.

4 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.

To define hardware settings 1 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Hardware. 2 On the Hardware panel, in the Technology section, activate a technology

for the sector by choosing one of the available technologies from the Activated Technology list.

3 In the HSDPA section, enable the 16-QAM supported if you want the sector to support 16-QAM modulation.

99


4 In the Throughput Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:■ Maximum Pooled Downlink Throughput—the maximum

throughput for all traffic on the same carrier of the site■ Maximum Packet Throughput—the proportion of the

maximum throughput that is allowed for packet sessions■ Maximum Circuit Throughput—the proportion of the

maximum throughput that is allowed for circuit sessions

The Throughput Per Carrier settings apply only to Rel 99 Subscribers. HSDPA throughput control is not explicitly enforced.

The sum of the maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput can exceed 100%, but within the analysis, the total of maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput cannot total more than 100%.

Throughput for an analysis is calculated using the number of subscribers carried multiplied by the rate used for each subscriber modified by the activity factor (which is dependent on the bearer used for the service).

5 In the Base Station Link Budget section, if you want to modify any of the values, click Base Station Link Budget.

The values shown in this section are read-only, and are calculated using the Base Station Link Budget tool. For information on using the Base Station Link Budget tool, see “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87.


If you open the Base Station Link Budget tool from the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, the carrier displayed is the carrier from which the

tool was launched. If the carrier is an EV-DO carrier, the Pilot Power column and the Percentage column are read only columns.

100


To define sector resources 1 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Resources. 2 On the Resources panel, in the Traffic Channel Codes section, type a

value in the Maximum Number of Codes box to define the maximum number of codes that can be allocated to traffic channels.

The Maximum Number of Codes value applies only to Rel 99 subscribers. For Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, this value should be set to reflect the actual number of Traffic Channel Codes used or reserved only by Rel 99 subscribers. HSDPA Traffic Channel Codes are not explicitly accounted for. It is implicitly assumed that HSDPA will use the leftover Traffic Channel Codes in the base station that are not assigned to Rel 99 subscribers.

3 For HSDPA carriers or HSDPA & Rel 99 carriers, from the HS-DSCH Codes list, choose the number of HS-DSCH traffic codes to use in the network analysis.

4 In the Uplink Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:■ Total Available For The Site—displays the number of channel

elements available.■ Total Dedicated For The Sector—displays the number of

channel elements dedicated for the sector.■ Primary (Per Sector)—the number of channel elements

assigned to this carrier on this sector for primary traffic. Primary traffic consists of the subscribers with this sector designated as the best server.

■ Primary Pooled (Per Site)—the number of channel elements pooled for this carrier for all sectors on this site for primary traffic. You can combine primary and pooled channel elements, or use only one or the other. If you want to specify that all of the channel elements on the site are pooled, type 0 in the Primary (Per Sector) box and type the total number of channel elements in the Primary Pooled (Per Site) box. When you generate an analysis, when this number has been reached, new calls for this sector will be blocked.

■ Additional For Handover—the number of channel elements allocated for handover for all sectors on the site for this carrier.

101


For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handover, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handover, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handover are available.

These channel element settings apply only to Rel 99 Subscribers. HSDPA Channel Elements are not explicitly accounted for on the downlink. For details on how these values are used to calculate the Total Available For the Site and Total Dedicated For the Sector values, press the F1 key.

5 In the Downlink Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:■ Total Available For The Site—displays the number of channel





■ Additional For Handover—the number of channel elements allocated for handover for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handover, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handover, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handover are available.


102


To define implementation settings 1 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Implementation.2 If you want to manually assign a scrambling code index or modify the

scrambling code index assigned to the sector, type a value in the Scrambling Code Index box.

The Scrambling Code and Scrambling Code Group values update automatically. For more information on scrambling codes, see “Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans” on page 215.

3 Beside the HSDPA Scheduler Gain box, do one of the following to define the BTS scheduler gain:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the scheduler

gain curve, and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a scheduler gain


If you do not assign a Scheduler Gain curve, Mentum Planet assumes that there is no gain.

4 In the Rapid Planning section, define the settings for rapid planning:■ Uplink DPCH Noise Rise—the noise rise in the receiver, above

the thermal noise floor, generated by traffic links.■ DPCH Total Traffic Power—for Rel 99 and Rel 99 & HSDPA

carriers, the total traffic transmit power for dedicated Rel 99 channels for the sector.

■ HS-DSCH Power—for HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel.

For information on how these values are used, see “Rapid planning settings” on page 97.

5 For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, in the HS-DSCH Activity Factor box, type the HSDPA downlink shared channel average activity factor.

This setting is used to model the bursty nature of packet-type traffic, such as Web browsing.


103


To define quality settings 1 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Quality. 2 On the Quality panel, in the Quality Parameters section, type values in

any of the following boxes:■ CPICH Target Ec/Io—the target common pilot channel

(CPICH) signal-to-noise ratio (Ec/Io) that the system can attain■ HS-SCCH Target Ec/Nt—the target High Speed Shared

Control Channel Ec/Nt that the system can attain. This parameter is only visible when the carrier is HSDPA.

■ Maximum DPCH Noise Rise—the maximum noise rise permitted for the sector. This value is used to limit the number of users in a system based on noise rise.

■ Maximum Users (Per Sector)—the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector.

■ Maximum Rel 99 Users (Per Sector)—the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector on a Rel 99 carrier. This parameter is only visible when for Rel 99 carriers.

■ Maximum HSDPA Users (Per Sector)—the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector on a HSDPA carrier. This parameter is only visible when for HSDPA carriers.

■ Handover Margin—the soft handover margin. For soft handover, the system will consider all cells that are within the value of the Handover Margin value from the best server and also the CPICH Target Ec/Io value.

■ Maximum Intra-Site Servers—the maximum number servers from the same site that are permitted for this sector

■ Maximum Cell Radius—the maximum cell radius permitted for this sector

■ Maximum Speed—the maximum speed permitted for this sector


104


To define W-CDMA power settings 1 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Powers. 2 On the Powers panel, from the Transmit Power Parameters In list,

choose the unit in which the transmit power settings are defined.3 In the Absolute Power Values section, type a value in the Total PA

Power box to define the maximum power output by the sector's power amplifier (PA).

The Total PA Power value and the PA Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87.

4 To define CPICH power, do one of the following:■ To define a fixed value for the CPICH power, type a value in the

Fixed CPICH Power box. The Fixed CPICH Power value and the CPICH Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87.

■ To automatically optimize CPICH power, enable the Optimize CPICH check box and define the range of CPICH values in the Maximum CPICH Power and Minimum CPICH Power boxes.

If you choose to optimize CPICH power, the analysis calculates the required CPICH power to ensure that all the users achieve the required Ec/Io (Monte Carlo analyses only).

5 In the Control Powers (Relative to CPICH Power) section, type values in the following boxes:■ Relative SCH/P-CCPCH Power—the synchronization channel

(SCH)/primary common control physical channel (P-CCPCH) power relative to the CPICH power

■ HS-SCCH Power—the power of the High Speed Shared Control Channel. This parameter is only visible if the sector is using a HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA carrier.

■ HSUPA Control Channels Power—the combined power required for the E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel), E-

105


RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel), and the E-HICH (E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel).

■ Other Common Channel Powers—the power for other common channels relative to the CPICH power

6 In the Traffic Power Limits (Relative to Max CPICH Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to HSDPA carriers):■ Maximum DPCH Power—the maximum service power for a

single DPCH relative to the maximum CPICH power. Note that it is also possible to define the Maximum DPCH Power for individual bearers (excluding HSDPA bearers) using the Maximum DPCH Power Offset value in the Edit - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.

■ Minimum DPCH Power—the minimum service power for a single DPCH relative to the maximum CPICH power. Note that it is also possible to define the Minimum DPCH Power for individual bearers (excluding HSDPA bearers) using the Minimum DPCH Power Offset value in the Edit - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.

7 In the Other User Interference section, type a value in the Average PRACH Interference Power box to define the interference for the physical random access channel (PRACH) channel.

The Average PRACH Interference Power value is used to model the uplink power that is used during Monte Carlo analyses. During Rapid Planning analyses, the HSDPA uplink power is modelled using Uplink Noise Rise setting on the Implementation panel.


Editing sites and sectorsYou can edit individual sites or you can use the Global Editor to edit one or more sites.

106


To edit a site 1 Do one of the following:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click on the site that you want to edit and choose Edit.

■ Click the Edit Site button on the Site toolbar and then click in the Map window on the site that you want to edit.


2 If there is more than one site at the chosen location, choose the site you want to edit from the Editing Site list.

3 Do one of the following:■ Modify any of the site properties and save them as a new

configuration if required. For information, see “Creating W-CDMA sites” on page 85.

■ Load an existing configuration by choosing File ➤ Open Configuration.

4 Click Apply to update your project.5 Click Close.

To globally edit W-CDMA sectors

You can easily edit W-CDMA-specific sector properties for individual carriers assigned to sites in your project or for a particular group of sites using the W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box. You can also add or remove carriers from sites.The W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box is different from the standard Global Edit dialog box that you can use with other technologies because it only contains settings that are specific to W-CDMA. For more information on the standard Global Edit dialog box, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

If you are modifying the W-CDMA power values, you have the option of viewing data in dBm or Watts. However, if you want to modify the

Average PRACH Interference Power, you will only be able to use the full range of values available for the field if you are using the dBm option.If you prefer to use Watts, you can use the Watts option when you are modifying other power values, and then change the units to dBm before modifying the value for PRACH.

107


1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:■ To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and

choose Global Edit ➤ W-CDMA.■ To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites,

right-click and choose Global Edit ➤ W-CDMA.■ To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the

group and choose Global Edit ➤ W-CDMA.■ To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category,

enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags and choose Global Edit ➤ W-CDMA.

The W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box opens.

108


2 In the Sector Selection section, choose one of the following options:■ All—apply changes to all sectors■ Current Selection—apply changes to the sectors that are

selected in the Map window. For more information, see the “Choosing sites” section in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Group—apply changes only to sectors in group chosen from the list

3 In the Carrier Selection section, choose one of the following options from the Action list for each carrier ID that the changes affect:■ Modify Existing—modify the sector settings for existing

carriers■ Modify/Create—add a new carrier to the sector and modify the

sector settings for existing carriers■ Delete—delete this carrier from the sector■ Do Not Modify—do not modify the sector settings for this

carrier4 In the Cell Equipment Parameters section, enable the check box beside

each setting that you want to update in the chosen table, click in the Value column and type a new value for each setting.

5 Click Apply to update the settings and then click Close.

Deleting sitesYou can delete sites using the Project Explorer or the Map window.

To delete a site ■ Do one of the following:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site, choose Delete, and click Yes to confirm the deletion.

■ In the Map window, choose the site, right-click and choose Delete, and then click Delete to confirm the deletion.

109


Viewing W-CDMA carrier assignment and interference information

Once you have created a project and assigned carriers to sectors, you can use the Carrier In-Map Display tool to view co-channel and adjacent channel interference in the Map window. You can also view carrier allocation information.

To view W-CDMA frequency assignment and interference information1 On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Carrier In-Map Display

button, and then click in the Map window near the sector for which you want to view interference information.

If you want to view only carrier allocation information, you can click anywhere in the Map window.

The Carrier In-Map Display window opens with the Interactive tab open by default. The Sector ID box shows the name of the sector closest to where you clicked in the Map window and the Technology box displays the sector assigned to the sector.

The display in the Map window updates to identify sectors in the Map window that are co-channel interferers with the selected sector. For each sector that is a co-channel interferer, the numbers of the carriers that cause co-channel interference are displayed in the Map window. For the selected sector, carrier information is displayed in red.

110


2 Do any of the following:■ To view other types of interference in the Map window, from the

View list, choose the type of interference that you want to view. The display in the Map window updates to show the interferers.

■ To choose another sector for which to view interference information, click in the Map window near the sector.

■ To display the results again for a sector that you selected previously, choose the sector from the Sector ID list.

3 If you want to view information in the Map window about frequency allocation, click the Sector Selection tab.

111


4 From the View in Map Window list, choose Carriers.5 From the Technology list, choose W-CDMA.

The list section of the dialog box updates to show all of the carriers assigned to the technology.

6 Choose one or more of the listed items to display in the Map window and click Display.

7 In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which you want to display the information.

8 If you want to choose a different group of sectors for which to display the selected information, click Update Selection, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose another group of sectors and click OK.

9 If you want to clear the display, click Clear.

Visibility of the Carrier In-Map Display is affected by the same settings that control the visibility of site labels. If you cannot see the sector

information in the Map window, see “Displaying and formatting site labels” in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide for information about changing the appearance of labels.

112

Chapter 6: Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors

6.
Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors

repeaters■ Workflow for adding repeaters

to W-CDMA sectors■ Adding repeaters to W-CDMA

sectors■ Repeaters and W-CDMA

predictions■ Locating repeaters in a Map

window

This chapter describes how to add repeaters to

W-CDMA sectors in your project.

113


Understanding W-CDMA repeaters Repeaters are used to retransmit signals received from donor sectors to locations that have insufficient coverage. For example, repeaters can be used to extend coverage or fill in shadow areas caused by hills, large buildings, and other structures that obstruct signals.A repeater receives a signal from the donor antenna of a donor sector, and then amplifies and retransmits the signal through its service antenna. Repeaters are primarily used to reduce path loss without providing an increase in network capacity. Generally, repeaters add noise and amplify noise in the uplink, which can limit their effectiveness; however, a well placed repeater can reduce noise levels within a W-CDMA network and enhance the overall capacity.Implementing repeaters can be an efficient and cost-effective method of increasing the received signal strength for mobiles in an area without having to place additional sites.A repeater’s power is defined by its Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP). EIRP measures the maximum radiated power in the direction of the maximum gain relative to an isotropic antenna (typically in the direction the antenna is pointing).The EIRP of W-CDMA repeaters is based on the CPICH power of the first active carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 6.1.

Equation 6.1 Repeater EIRP

Where:CPICH Power is the pilot power of the first carrier from the W-CDMA Sector Settings of the donor sector.

Lm is the masked path loss between the base station transmitter and the repeater.

GD is the repeater donor antenna gain.

LD is the repeater donor antenna system loss (typically feeder loss).

GR is the repeater gain.

LR is the repeater loss.

LS is the repeater service antenna system loss (typically feeder loss).

Repeater EIRP = CPICH Power – Lm + GD+ LD+ GR – LR – LS + GS

114

Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA SectorsCDMA User Guide

GS is the repeater service antenna gain.

Repeaters and W-CDMA predictionsWhen you generate predictions for a sector that has one or more repeaters assigned to it, signal strength grid (.grd) files are generated for the sector and for each repeater. W-CDMA analyses use the separate predictions for the donor sectors and repeaters.A combined signal strength file is also generated, which merges the separate sector and repeater signal strength files. Combined signal strength predictions are used when the full coverage area of a sector is required, such as when you generate a traffic map or interference matrix, or analyze the interference between two sectors.After you have generated predictions for a sector, you can choose to view a prediction for the donor sector or individual repeaters. You can also view a combined prediction that displays the combined signal strengths of the donor sector and all of its repeaters. For information on generating and viewing predictions, see “Chapter 8: Generating Predictions” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Workflow for adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectorsStep 1 Configure and place W-CDMA sites. See “Chapter 5: Configuring

and Placing W-CDMA Sites” on page 83.

Step 2 Add repeaters to sectors with insufficient coverage. See “Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors” on page 115.

Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectorsTo add a repeater to a sector, you must define general settings, such as the donor sector for which the repeater will retransmit a signal, and the location of the repeater. You must also define settings for service and donor antennas, predictions, repeater links, and carriers.You can add repeaters manually or you can import them from an existing file.

115


To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the sector to

which you want to add a repeater, and choose Add Repeater.2 Click in the Map window in the location where you want to add the

repeater.

The Repeater Settings dialog box opens with the general settings panel selected by default.

3 In the Repeater-Site ID box, type a unique name for the repeater.4 If you want to add additional information, such as the associated Site ID,

in the Repeater-Site UID box, type an identifier or description.5 If you want to change the donor sector, choose a sector from the list.

116


6 Do one of the following to define the status of the repeater:■ To set the repeater as active, enable the Active check box.■ To set the repeater as inactive, clear the Active check box.

Inactive repeaters are not used for predictions or analyses.

7 If you want to change the symbol and color settings used to represent active or inactive repeaters in the Map window, in the Color/Symbol for All Repeaters section, click the Active or Inactive swatch, choose the font, font size, symbol, color, rotation angle, background, and effects, and then click OK.

You can only change the symbol and color settings for the status (Active or Inactive) that you applied to the repeater in Step 6. The symbol and color settings will be applied to all Active or Inactive repeaters.

8 In the Repeater Connection Type section, choose one of the following options:■ RF—an antenna is used for communication between the donor

sector and the repeater.■ Fiber—a fiber-optic link is used for communication between the

donor sector and the repeater.

If you choose the Fiber option, the donor antenna settings do not apply (see “To define donor antenna settings for repeaters” on page 121).

9 If you want to place the service antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Service Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes.

The values displayed by default correspond to the location that you clicked in the Map window in Step 2.

10 If you want to place the donor antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Donor Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes.

By default, the donor antenna and service antenna are placed at the same location.

11 Define the service antenna settings.

See “To define service antenna settings for repeaters” on page 119.

12 If you chose the RF option in Step 8, define the donor antenna settings.

See “To define donor antenna settings for repeaters” on page 121.

117


13 Define the repeater prediction settings.

See “To define repeater prediction settings” on page 123.

14 Define the repeater equipment settings.

See “To define repeater equipment settings” on page 125.

15 Define the repeater carrier settings.

See “To define repeater carrier settings” on page 127.

16 Click Create to add the repeater to the sector, and then click Close to close the Repeater Settings dialog box.

The repeater is displayed in the Sites category of the Project Explorer under both the Repeaters node and the chosen donor sector.

You can also change the status of a repeater by right-clicking a repeater node in the Project Explorer and choosing Activate Repeater

or Deactivate Repeater.

118


To define service antenna settings for repeaters1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Service

Antenna.

2 On the Service Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list.

This is the pattern that the service antenna will use to retransmit the signal received from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.

3 If you want to view or modify the antenna pattern, click Edit.

For more information on modifying antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

119


4 If you are using an antenna pattern with electrical downtilt, from the Electrical Tilt list, choose the electrical downtilt pattern that you want to use.

For information on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 Type values in the following boxes:■ Azimuth—the horizontal direction the service antenna looks

towards. An azimuth value of 0 degrees is true north, 90 degrees is east, 180 degrees is south, and 270 degrees is west. As you rotate clockwise, the azimuth increases.

■ Tilt—the number of degrees that a service antenna is tilted upward or downward. A positive (+) tilt value points the antenna upwards, while a negative (-) tilt value points the antenna downwards.

■ Twist—the number of degrees that a service antenna is twisted counter-clockwise or clockwise. A positive (+) twist value rotates the antenna counter-clockwise, while a negative (-) twist value rotates the antenna clockwise.

■ Height—the height of the service antenna from ground level.6 In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:

■ Use DEM Elevation—sets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file.

■ Manual Entry—enables you to define the elevation height for the repeater. Type the elevation height in the Elevation box. This option is useful if the repeater is being used as a microcell for indoor coverage.

7 In the System Losses box, type a value for the service antenna system feeder loss or any additional antenna system-related losses.

8 Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.

120


To define donor antenna settings for repeaters

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Donor Antenna.

2 On the Donor Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list.

This is the pattern that the donor antenna will use to receive the signal from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.



Donor antenna settings only apply if the repeater type is RF. If a fiber-optic connection is used between the donor and service antenna, the

donor antenna settings do not apply. For more information, see “To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors” on page 116.

121



For details on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 In the Height box, type the height of the donor antenna from ground level.

6 In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:■ Use DEM Elevation—sets the elevation height based on the

repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. This is the default option.


7 In the System Losses box, type a value for donor antenna system feeder loss or any other antenna system-related losses.

The Isolation box indicates the calculated value of isolation between antennas (masked path loss). For an accurate isolation value, the antenna patterns assigned to the repeater must have a full definition of the vertical pattern (all angles).


122


To define repeater prediction settings1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Predictions.

2 On the Predictions panel, choose a propagation model from the Propagation Model list.

3 In the Number of Radials box, type the number of radials to be used in the prediction.

Prediction calculations are performed along radial lines. A higher number of radials will produce more accurate results, but the calculation will take more time.

4 In the Propagation Distance box, type the maximum distance from the repeater for which the signal strength will be calculated.

123


5 Do one of the following:■ In the Masked Path Loss from Donor box, type a value for the

repeater amplifier system loss.■ Click Calculate, and in the Calculate Masked Path Loss dialog

box, type a value for any other known losses in the Additional Losses box, choose the propagation model you want to use to calculate the path loss, and click OK. The value in the Masked Path Loss from Donor box is automatically updated.


For maximum accuracy, enter a measured value of pathloss in the Masked Path Loss From Donor box. The measured pathloss can be

determined by measuring the signal strength with a known EIRP from the donor sector. If you choose to calculate the masked path loss, ensure you specify an appropriate model. The most appropriate propagation model will depend on the specifics of the environment between donor sector and the repeater donor antenna. If you suspect obstruction at the repeater location, choose a deterministic model with the correct receiver height. You may need to create a model specifically for repeater installations.Mentum Planet will not update the stored masked pathloss automatically, even if the current value is generated using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box. If there are changes to the network that would impact the pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, you must apply a new value to the repeater, either by manually entering a new value in the Repeater Settings dialog box or re-calculating the value using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box.

124


To define repeater equipment settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Equipment.

The gain of a repeater in Mentum Planet is maintained at a constant level. Any changes to the donor sector and repeater system that affect

the power received by the repeater will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. For example, a change in the masked pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, the donor sector’s pilot power, or the antenna system at the donor sector which results in a change to the EIRP of the sector, will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. The EIRP value at the repeater will also change in line with a change in either of the repeater’s antenna systems. As such, it is important to review repeater settings following any changes of this nature.

125


2 On the Equipment panel, do either of the following to define the repeater EIRP:■ In the Power EIRP box, type the CPICH EIRP based on the

CPICH power of the first carrier on the donor sector. The value in the System Loss box is updated based on the value you enter.

■ In the Gain box, type a value for the repeater system gain. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.

3 In the System Loss box, type a value for the repeater system loss.

The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.

4 In the Noise Figure box, type a value for the noise contribution of the repeater to the uplink.

5 In the Forward Max Power Per Carrier box, type a value for the achievable limit of power for the carrier.

6 In the Reverse Eb/No adjustment box, type a value for any adjustment that should be applied to the required Eb/No for signals through the repeater in the reverse path.

This value can be used to take into account the effects of the fixed path of signals through the repeater, for example, to simulate the effect of a lack of diversity gain on repeated signals at the donor sector.


126


To define repeater carrier settings1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Carriers.

2 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check box beside each of the carriers that you want assigned to the repeater.

All of the carriers assigned to the donor sector are enabled by default.


To edit repeater settingsAfter you have added a repeater to a sector, you can edit the repeater at any time.

1 In the Project Explorer, in the tree view of the Sites category, expand the site and sector to which the repeater belongs.

2 Right-click the repeater that you want to edit and choose Edit.

The Repeater Settings dialog box opens.

127


3 If you want to change the donor sector (re-parent), choose a sector from the Donor Sector list.

4 Modify the other repeater settings as required.

For information, see “Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors” on page 115.

5 Click Apply and then click Close.

Locating repeaters in a Map window You can use the Project Explorer to locate repeaters in a Map window.

To locate repeaters in a Map window■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the repeater

and choose Locate.

The repeater is selected in the Map window.

You can also access all of the repeaters in your project from the Repeaters node in the Sites category of the Project Explorer.

128

Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA

7.
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding rapid planning

for W-CDMA■ Workflow for generating a

rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

■ Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings

■ Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

■ Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA

■ Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning

■ Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA

■ Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

■ Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information

■ Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers

■ Deleting analyses

This chapter describes how to generate a rapid

planning analysis and view results.

A rapid planning analysis provides a quick

simulation of your network. You can use the results

of a rapid planning analysis to make adjustments to

your project settings and then run a more detailed

Monte Carlo analysis.

129


Understanding rapid planning for W-CDMA Rapid planning uses minimal settings to generate a set of analysis layers that you can use to analyze your network quickly. The analysis runs only once and generates analysis layers automatically (as opposed to a Monte Carlo analysis, for which you can generate layers automatically or as a separate step). A rapid planning analysis does not require as much time as a Monte Carlo analysis, but it also does not generate the detailed subscriber information that is generated with a Monte Carlo analysis. For more information on Monte Carlo simulations, see “Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA” on page 148.

Prediction view files for W-CDMA analyses Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. By default, prediction view files are created when you generate an analysis. Using prediction view files is optional. You can determine whether or not to use them by considering the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. See “Optimizing W-CDMA analyses” on page 165 for more information.

W-CDMA analysis layers The analysis layers that you can generate using rapid planning depend on whether you choose to use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager or a nominal subscriber. For more information on choosing subscribers, see “Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning” on page 138.

■ If you use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager, the layers available are the same as the analysis layers available when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation, with the exception of the Downlink - Throughput and Uplink - Throughput analysis layers. Throughput layers are not available for rapid planning.

■ If you use a nominal subscriber, the throughput layers are not available, and the CPICH - Pollution Index layer is also not available, because no traffic map is used in this kind of rapid planning analysis.

For details on each analysis layer, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

130

Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMACDMA User Guide

Understanding data rate negotiationBy default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 7.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates. It is also assumed that HSDPA traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background).Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.

Table 7.1 Data rate negotiation process for W-CDMA

If you don’t want data rate negotiation to be simulated in your network, define only one bearer within the quality constraints you set in the

Subscriber Manager.

Available Technology Layers

Service/QoS Combination

Rel 99 & HSDPA & GSM Rel 99 & GSM HSDPA &

GSM GSM Only

Voice (Circuit Conversational below 15 kbps)

Carried on Rel 99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in Rel 99)

Carried on Rel 99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in Rel 99)

On GSM as Voice

On GSM as Voice

Circuit Conversational above 15 kbps)

Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99


On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data

Circuit streaming Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99


On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data

131


Data rate downgradingIn the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 7.1 on page 131 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the GSM network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.

Analyzing the results of data rate negotiationMentum Planet provides several means of analyzing the results of data rate negotiation. You can:

■ view coverage maps showing the coverage probability for different rates for one usage. In particular, you can view the Downlink - Bearer Coverage layer, the Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage layer as well as the Uplink - Bearer Coverage layer and Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage layer.

■ review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector- mobile report. See “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

Packet Conversational/Streaming

Negotiated within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99


On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data

Packet or Circuit Interactive/Background

Negotiated within HSDPA then within R99, then on GSM as Data

Negotiated within R99 then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99

Negotiated within HSDPA then on GSM as Data if blocked in HSDPA

On GSM as Data



Rel 99 & HSDPA & GSM Rel 99 & GSM HSDPA &

GSM GSM Only

132


Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

Step 1 Define prediction view settings. See “Optimizing W-CDMA analyses” on page 165.

Step 2 Define rapid planning settings for the sectors that you want to include in your analysis. See “To define implementation settings” on page 103.

Step 3 If you want to use the same settings for a number of analyses, define default analysis settings. See “Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings” on page 133.

Step 4 Create a new rapid planning analysis. See “Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA” on page 134.

Step 5 Define the analysis settings and generate the analysis. See “Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA” on page 136.

Step 6 View the results of the analysis. See “Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 145.

Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settingsIf you want to use the same settings for a number of rapid planning analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.

133


To define default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings.2 Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK.

For more information defining analysis settings, see the following sections:

■ “Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA” on page 136

■ “Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning” on page 138

■ “Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA” on page 143

Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the W-CDMA Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.

A Monte Carlo analysis takes more time than rapid planning, but generates detailed subscriber information that a rapid planning analysis does not. For

The Runtime Parameters settings in the Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings dialog box apply only to Monte Carlo analyses. For more

information, see “To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175.

A rapid planning analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the W-CDMA technology. If you want to

perform analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

134


more information on Monte Carlo analyses, see “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

To create a new rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose New Network Analysis.

The W-CDMA Analysis dialog box opens.

2 In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis.3 In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.4 From the Analysis Mode list, choose Rapid Planning and click OK.

A new W-CDMA analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.

If you want to generate network analyses at the same resolution as predictions created using either the Volcano or WaveSight propagation

models, you need to specify the resolution of the analyses in the Analysis Resolution box and choose an elevation file and, optionally, a clutter file, that uses the same resolution as the predictions on the Advanced tab in the Propagation Model Editor.

If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node, choose Select Sectors,

and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use, and click Continue.If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see “Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA” on page 144.

135


To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses nodeIf you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the W-CDMA Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.

1 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the W-CDMA_Analyses folder in the current project folder.

2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses.

The list of analyses updates to show the new analysis.

Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA System settings enable you to define network characteristics that you want to simulation in your analysis (e.g., slow fading and soft handover gain).

To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate.

The W-CDMA Simulation dialog box opens.

2 In the tree view, choose System.

136


3 If you want to calculate soft handover gain due to macro-diversity, enable the Use Soft Handover Gain check box.

If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handover will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handover gain is not taken into account for the uplink link analysis for the mobile.

4 From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer.

The CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the third best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the third best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.

137


5 If you want to override the rapid planning settings on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel for this analysis, enable the Override All Cell Loads check box.

Typically, you would use the Override All Cell Loads option if you are doing nominal planning or network dimensioning. If you are optimizing an existing network using switch statistics, you would use the rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel for the sector.

6 For each applicable W-CDMA carrier, define the following:■ DPCH Uplink Load—For Rel 99, Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA,

and Rel99 & HSPA sectors, the percentage of cell loading you want to target on the DPCH uplink.

■ Total Uplink Load—For Rel 99 & HSPA, and HSPA sectors, the percentage of cell loading that you want to target for the uplink. This load percentage is used to update the total noise rise per sector

■ DPCH Available Traffic Power—For Rel 99, Rel 99 & HSDPA, and Rel 99 & HSPA sectors, the percentage of the total power available for the dedicated physical channel (DPCH).

■ HS-DSCH Available Traffic Power—For Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA, Rel99 & HSPA, HSPA sectors, the percentage of the total power available for the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH)

■ HS-DSCH Activity Factor—For Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA, Rel99 & HSPA, HSPA sectors, the downlink shared channel average activity factor.

The total power available is the remaining PA power after power for the CPICH and other common channels has been assigned.

7 Choose another item in the tree view.

Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning When you choose subscriber types for a rapid planning analysis, you have two options:

■ You can choose a subscriber type that you have defined using the Subscriber Manager. For information on the Subscriber

138


Manager, see “Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers” on page 47.

■ You can choose the Nominal Subscriber type, which enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics for a simple rapid planning analysis. This option is available only for rapid planning.

To choose a defined subscriber type for W-CDMA rapid planning1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree

view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, choose the Subscriber Manager option.

The Monte Carlo planning option requires the detailed information provided by the Subscriber Manager.

139


3 Enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the analysis.


To choose a nominal subscriber for W-CDMA rapid planning Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define the minimum subscriber settings required to run a rapid planning analysis.

1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, choose the Nominal Subscriber option.

140


3 On the Nominal Subscribers tab, in the Mobile Equipment section, define values for the following:■ Max Transmit Power—maximum transmit power at the mobile

power amplifier in the box.■ Antenna Gain—the antenna gain for the mobile equipment

band type used by the nominal subscriber type ■ Body Loss—the signal loss as a result of the proximity of

objects located near the transmitter.■ Max Active Servers—the maximum number of handover

servers supported by the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use

■ Noise Figure—the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use

4 If the network supports HSDPA, in the HSDPA section, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the associated list.

Only terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are available in this release.

5 In the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box, type a value to define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered.

The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Downlink - Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

6 From the Environment list, choose one of the following environment types for the nominal subscriber:■ Outdoor—open air environments■ Indoor—buildings or structures■ Deep Indoor—dense buildings, such as office towers■ Vehicular—moving vehicles

In order to view results for a chosen environment, you must have specified the environment parameters in the New Clutter Type or Edit Clutter Type dialog box in the Subscriber Manager and you must have assigned the clutter classes to the appropriate clutter types.

7 Click the Nominal Bearers tab.

141


8 In the Downlink Bearer section, define values for the following:■ Required Downlink Eb/No—the received signal-to-noise ratio

(Eb/No) required for a given quality, such as FER, on the downlink.

■ Downlink Service Traffic Rate—the data rate for the downlink.■ Maximum DPCH Power Offset—the maximum power

correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber.

This box, in conjunction with the Minimum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.

■ Minimum DPCH Power Offset—the minimum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber.

This box, in conjunction with the Maximum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.

■ Downlink Eb/No to FER—do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No

to FER curve, and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to

FER curve, and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.

For details about how the Eb/No to FER curve is used, see “Defining W-CDMA bearers” on page 57.

9 In the Uplink Bearer section, define values for the following:■ In the Required Uplink Eb/No box, type the received signal-to-

noise ratio (Eb/No) required for a given quality, such as FER, on the uplink.

■ In the Uplink Service Traffic Rate box, type the data rate for the uplink traffic.


142


Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA The analysis area is the area over which the analysis is computed. You have the option of using the full area covered by the analysis or defining boundaries to limit the analysis area. By limiting the analysis area, you can significantly reduce the computation time by eliminating all of the areas in which you are not interested.

To define rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the

tree view.2 On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:

■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions

■ Use Analysis Bounds—enables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following:

■ Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes■ Click Update Bounds With Active View if you have

resized or zoomed your Map window. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window.

■ Use An Analysis Grid—enables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, “Working with the Grid Manager”, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

■ Use An Area Grid—enables you to choose a predefined area grid. For information on creating area grids, see Chapter 14, “Working with Grids”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

143


3 In the Analysis Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the analysis.

For more information on this box, press the F1 key.


Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Before generating a rapid planning analysis, you must define the settings on each panel in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box as described in “Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA” on page 136.

To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, click Analyze.

2 If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue.

3 In the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK.

By default, the check boxes are enabled for all of the layers that you chose in the analysis layer filter.

A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include the layers in the analysis.

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information You can generate a network analysis for sectors identified with certain flags and conditions. For example, you could generate a network analysis for sites in Phase 1 that are installed and operational. To do this, you define the flags and conditions, and then generate a network analysis. In the Select Sectors dialog box, you choose the Flags Filter. For more information on flags and conditions, see “Working with flags”, in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

144


To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions

that you want to use.2 In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis and choose

Select Sectors.3 In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose Flags Filter and click Continue.4 In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis you want to

generate and choose Generate.5 Define the analysis settings as described starting in “Defining rapid

planning system settings for W-CDMA” on page 136, and then follow the procedure described in “To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA” on page 144.

Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers Once you have generated your analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.

To view W-CDMA analysis layers■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category,

right-click an analysis layer under the W-CDMA Analysis node and choose View.

The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.

To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the W-CDMA

Analysis node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove.

You can obtain statistical and composite reports for the analysis layers using the Layer Statistics Analysis tool. For more information, see

“Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

145


Deleting analyses Files generated from a network analysis can take up a lot of hard disk space. You can delete analyses that are no longer required.

To delete analyses1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, do any of

the following:■ Choose one or more analyses, right-click and choose Delete.■ Expand an analysis node, choose one or more analysis layers,

right-click and choose Delete.2 In the Mentum Planet dialog box, click Yes.

The analyses or analysis layers you chose are removed from the Project Explorer and the files are deleted from the project folder.

146

Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA

8.
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding Monte Carlo

analyses for W-CDMA■ Understanding data rate

negotiation■ Workflow for generating a

Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

■ Optimizing W-CDMA analyses

■ Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings

■ Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

■ Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA

■ Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

■ Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA

■ Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis

■ Generating W-CDMA analysis layers

■ Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors

This chapter describes how to generate a Monte

Carlo analysis for W-CDMA and view results. A

Monte Carlo analysis provides two types of results:

■ information about sectors, carriers and subscribers in your network

■ analysis layersYou can also generate a rapid planning analysis,

which provides only analysis layers, but takes less

time. For more information on rapid planning, see

Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for

W-CDMA.

147


Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMAA Monte Carlo analysis uses Monte Carlo simulation techniques to determine the characteristics of your network over repeated runs.A run consists of the distribution of random numbers of subscribers throughout the analysis area in a random pattern, and an analysis of the uplink and downlink. On the last run, operating points and discrete subscriber information are generated. Once the runs are completed, you can view the results and generate analysis layers (either automatically or as a separate step).Statistically, individual runs are of little value. However, over many Monte Carlo runs, the average result provides a realistic representation of network performance. The results are averaged to create the operating points that are used when you generate analysis layers. The following sections describe the phases of a Monte Carlo run and explain the methods for determining how many runs are required.

Monte Carlo phasesThis section explains the phases of a Monte Carlo run:

■ placing subscribers in a random pattern■ uplink and downlink analysis■ generation of operating points and subscriber information

Placing subscribers in a random patternEach run begins with the placement of subscribers in a random pattern throughout the analysis area. This pattern is created using input values from the carriers defined for the band and the subscribers defined in the Subscriber Manager. The random distribution pattern corresponds to the traffic map, and is an efficient method for establishing transmission patterns when the exact location of each subscriber cannot be established.

Analyzing the uplink and downlinkThe goal of the uplink and downlink analysis phase is to determine the subscribers that can be served, taking into account the impact of each served subscriber on the network.The uplink analysis begins by considering the subscribers in the simulation, then the serving sectors for each subscriber.

148

Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMACDMA User Guide

The uplink analysis ■ determines the best uplink server that is also the best downlink

server■ identifies the second and third best uplink servers■ calculates the handover gain based on the degree of correlation

of the active serving sectors and adjusts the uplink power accordingly

■ calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks that the required coverage probability is achieved

■ calculates the noise rise and checks that the limit is not exceeded on all sectors

■ checks that the cell radius and speed limit are not exceededThe downlink analysis

■ calculates the required downlink power of the serving sector■ determines whether the received serving sector common pilot

channel (CPICH) power-to-interference ratio (Ec/Io) is above the target


■ checks that the channel element, user limit, PA power, throughput, and code limits are not exceeded

The analysis also checks the carrier soft limits for noise rise and PA threshold, as defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. Subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.

Generating operating points and subscriber information On the last run, operating points and subscriber information are generated. Operating points provide detailed information about each sector, carrier, and subscriber type in the analysis. The operating points are averaged and stored.You can view the actual values (i.e., standard deviation and range) of the operating points by opening the operating points text (.txt) file that is stored in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project. For more information on

149


operating points, see “Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format” on page 523.You can also view the mean values of the operating points by designing a report using one of the following types of report data:

■ System-mobile■ Carrier-sector■ Carrier-sector-mobile■ Throughput

For more information, see “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.Subscriber information provides details on the coverage status of subscribers (also known as discrete subscribers). Snapshots of each subscriber’s status are compiled on each run of the simulation. When the simulation is complete, the coverage status of each subscriber is displayed automatically in the Map window. The discrete subscriber information is also stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) that you can view. For more information, see “Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA” on page 182 and “Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 521. In order to get a visual snapshot of the results of data rate negotiation across the network, you can create a traffic map that highlights unserved subscribers. The unserved traffic maps are created using the discrete subscribers table that is generated during a Monte-Carlo analysis. See “Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map” on page 183.

Defining the number of Monte Carlo runsBefore you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, you must define the number of runs to complete. You have two options for determining the number of runs:

■ user-defined method■ convergence method

These options are defined on the Runtime Parameters panel of the W-CDMA Simulation tool dialog box, and are described in detail in the following sections. You can choose either the user-defined method, or the convergence method, or you can choose a combination of both methods. For more information on the Runtime Parameters panel, see “To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175.

150


User-defined method Using the Fixed Number of Runs option on the Runtime Parameters panel, you can define the exact number of runs to complete in the Monte Carlo analysis.You need to consider the minimum number of runs that will present an accurate model of the system; with too few runs, the results will not accurately reflect the distribution of subscribers within the network. Too many runs will not degrade the outputs of the analysis, but may take a long time. If the analysis does not achieve what you consider to be an accurate model of the network using the number of runs that you specified, you can generate additional runs. See “To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA” on page 185.The number of runs required to achieve a given level of accuracy can vary dramatically based on several factors, which include the following:

■ the number of bins in the analysis, which is directly proportional to the analysis area and resolution. The number of bins in the analysis has an impact as it will provide the number of potential points for subscribers. The more potential points for subscribers, the greater the likelihood of variation.

■ the number of subscribers to be spread. This, coupled with the type of subscriber (for example, high data rate subscribers) and the traffic map, has potentially the greatest impact on the number of runs required. If you spread very few subscribers over a large area, then you need many runs to get a good statistical representation. If these subscribers are spread in a limited area, then fewer runs are likely required.

■ the impact of each individual subscriber on the analysis, which is essentially the required Eb/No. Higher data rate subscribers create a bigger load and have a bigger impact in all respects. They are also are more likely to be served or not served.

■ the potential variation in the locations of the subscribers in the analysis according to the assigned traffic maps. A flat traffic map will likely require more runs than a map where all of the subscribers are concentrated.

■ the number of sectors in the analysis. A greater number of servers, coupled with the potential for overlapping coverage areas, handover regions, and gaps in coverage, results in a higher

151


potential for different sectors providing service, and more runs being required.

In general, the greater potential variability then the greater the number of runs required to ensure a reasonable level of accuracy. It is often useful to do a single run first, especially for large analyses. A single run can identify obvious errors quickly, for example, incorrect PA power settings for a sector. To help determine whether additional runs are required, you view discrete subscriber information (see “Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA” on page 182) and you can generate reports to view the operating points. For more information on reports, see “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

Convergence method The Convergence Achieved option on the Runtime Parameters panel enables you to have more refined control over the simulation process than the Fixed Number of Runs option.The distribution of subscribers is affected by the traffic density. The greater the traffic density, the fewer runs will be required.Using this approach, the runs continue until the convergence target is reached. After each run, the tool calculates the convergence factor (see “Convergence factor calculation” on page 153). When the convergence factor is equal to or less than the value that you define in the Convergence Achieved box, the runs are complete.To achieve results that are statistically valid, you must determine an appropriate Convergence Achieved value. If you specify a lower value (for example, 1%), more runs will be required for the solution to converge. A lower Convergence Achieved value generally requires a higher resolution digital elevation model (DEM) to ensure accurate results. If the DEM has low resolution, small variations in the interference calculations between runs might cause significant differences in the coverage area for a particular site.The Convergence Achieved option requires a minimum of three runs to complete.

152


Convergence factor calculationThe following calculations are used to determine the convergence factor during a run.First, the number of dropped users is calculated using Equation 8.1.

Equation 8.1 Mean number of dropped users

Where: is the mean number of dropped users for a particular run

is the number of simulation runs

The divergence of consecutive values is continually calculated using the mean value. For example:

Equation 8.2 Divergence of consecutive values

Where: is the maximum number of dropped users

is the minimum number of dropped users

is the mean number of dropped users for a particular run


The value from Equation 8.1 and the divergence value from Equation 8.2 are then used to determine the convergence factor, as shown in Equation 8.3.

Equation 8.3 Convergence factor

Mean number of dropped users Sn

Sii 0=

n

∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞

n--------------------= =

S

n

Divergence Max Sn 4,Sn– 3,Sn– 2,Sn– 1,Sn }–Min Sn 4,Sn– 3,Sn– 2,Sn– 1,Sn}–{

–{=

Max

Min

S

n

Sn

Divergence( ) Sn( )⁄ 100×

153


Understanding data rate negotiationBy default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 8.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates. It is also assumed that HSDPA traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background).Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.

Table 8.1 Data rate negotiation process for W-CDMA


Subscriber Manager.



R99 & HSDPA & GSM R99 & GSM HSDPA &

GSM GSM Only


Carried on R99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in R99)

Carried on R99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in R99)

On GSM as Voice

On GSM as Voice


Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99


On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data

Circuit streaming Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99


On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data

154


Data rate downgradingIn the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 8.1 on page 154 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the GSM network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.



■ review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector-




On GSM as Data

On GSM as Data


Negotiated within HSDPA then within R99, then on GSM as Data

Negotiated within R99 then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99

Negotiated within HSDPA then on GSM as Data if blocked in HSDPA

On GSM as Data



R99 & HSDPA & GSM R99 & GSM HSDPA &

GSM GSM Only

155


mobile report. See “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

■ create a traffic map from the un-served users based on a Monte Carlo analysis. See “Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map” on page 183.

■ use the Grid Info tool or the Info tool to view details about the data rate negotiation. See “Chapter 5: Working with the Grid Manager” in the Grid Analysis User Guide. For information about the Info tool, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide.

■ browse the discrete subscriber table for details about data rate negotiations. In particular, examine the following columns:

■ Block Reason. See “Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 521.

■ Achieved Downlink Rate. See “Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 521.

■ Achieved Uplink Rate. See “Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 521.

■ Negotiation State. See “Negotiation States”.

Negotiation StatesYou can generate a Monte Carlo analysis with discrete subscriber information. When you do so, the discrete subscriber table contains a Negotiation State column. There are five possible states:

■ Non-negotiated—a subscriber who is carried at the maximum data rate on both the uplink and downlink.

■ Forward negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where the downlink is at less than the maximum downlink data rate, but the uplink is at the maximum data rate.

■ Reverse negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where the uplink is at less than the maximum uplink data rate, but the downlink is at the maximum data rate.

■ Negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where neither the downlink or uplink are at the maximum data rates.

■ Not Served—a subscriber can not be served.

156


Understanding W-CDMA analysis layersAnalysis layers are generated after the final Monte Carlo run. The following types of analysis layers are available to enable you to visualize and optimize the coverage of your network:

■ Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) analysis■ Uplink interference analysis■ Downlink interference analysis■ Handover analysis■ Throughput analysis■ Path balance analysis■ HSDPA analysis (see “Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and

HSUPA Analysis Layers” on page 201)■ HSUPA analysis (see “Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and

HSUPA Analysis Layers” on page 201)W-CDMA analysis layers are stored in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project.

CPICH analysis CPICH analysis layers (see Table 8.2 on page 158) enable you to visualize CPICH coverage and interference over the analysis area.As a subscriber becomes more distant from the serving site, the path loss increases, decreasing the CPICH power (Ec). As the subscriber moves away from the serving site and closer to other sites, interference (Io) occurs. The boundary of CPICH coverage varies due to load, environmental, and bearer conditions. Generating CPICH analysis layers enables you to quantify this effect by calculating the maximum propagation loss for a given load,

W-CDMA analysis layers are generated separately from TDMA/FDMA analysis layers. For more information on TDMA/FDMA analysis layers,

see Chapter 7, “Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

157


environment, or bearer. For more information, see “CPICH interference” on page 513.Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers

Layer Description

CPICH - Best Server Displays the coverage area of each sector’s CPICH.The coverage area is based on achieving at least the CPICH Target Ec/Io defined in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. See “To define quality settings” on page 104.

CPICH - Composite Best Server

Identical to the CPICH - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

CPICH - Ec/Io Displays the CPICH Ec/Io at each bin based on the power limits defined in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box (see “To define W-CDMA power settings” on page 105) rather than the CPICH Target Ec/Io value. See “To define quality settings” on page 104.

CPICH - Coverage Displays the coverage area of all the sectors within the analysis area

CPICH - 2nd Server Displays the second best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - 3rd Server Displays the third best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - 4th Server Displays the fourth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - 5th Server Displays the fifth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - 6th Server Displays the sixth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - 7th Server Displays the seventh best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

CPICH - Best Ec Server

Displays the best server at each location where the Best Ec is better than the value defined in the Best Ec Threshold box on the General tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, or null if the Best Ec is worse than the threshold value.

158


CPICH - Composite Best Ec Server

Identical to the CPICH - Best Ec Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

CPICH - Best Ec Displays the Ec (the energy received per chip) for the best CPICH.

CPICH - Total Ec Displays the total Ec for the pilots in the active set. The total Ec is computed as the sum of Ec powers of the pilots in active set.

CPICH - Pollution Index Displays the areas in your coverage region where CPICH coverage is not sufficient. The CPICH - Pollution Index is a numeric grid (.grd) file that uses a percentage for each bin. Values closer to 100% indicate areas where CPICH pollution and/or CPICH coverage may be a problem.This index is created based on the number of users in an area (usage factor) and the probability of CPICH pollution (CPICH factor) in that area. High values occur when there is a low CPICH-to-interference ratio and/or there is a high concentration of users in relation to the available signal strength. The usage factor is based on the traffic map and the usage factor curve defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box and the traffic factor is based on the CPICH factor curve define in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.

CPICH - Delta Ec/Io Displays the difference in CPICH Ec/Io between the best server and the server that you choose in the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer box on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box. See “To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA” on page 170 for details.

CPICH - Polluters Displays the number of CPICH polluters at each bin. A CPICH is a polluter if it is not a best or handover server and its Ec/Io is within the CPICH Pollution Margin defined in the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box. See “To define general settings for W-CDMA” on page 36.

Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

159


Downlink interference analysis Downlink interference analysis layers (see Table 8.3) enable you to determine the interference generated on the downlink connections in your network.

CPICH - Worst Polluter Displays the worst CPICH polluter at each bin.

CPICH - Sum of CPICH minus Best CPICH

Displays the total CPICH signal strength within the network minus the best CPICH signal strength. This indicates whether the best CPICH is the primary component of the composite signal. In areas where there are too many different signals of similar strength, the signal-to-interference ratio will be too high and calls may be dropped. It is more effective for W-CDMA networks to have a dominant CPICH signal throughout the desired coverage area.

Table 8.3 Downlink analysis layers

Layer Description

Downlink - Best Server Displays the service channel coverage area for each sector

Downlink - Composite Best Server

Identical to the Downlink - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Downlink - Coverage Probability

Displays the probability of downlink coverage at each bin.

Downlink - Eb/No Displays the downlink service Eb/No at each bin without limiting it to the downlink target Eb/No.The W-CDMA analysis layer generation process assumes that perfect power control will cause the power to set itself at a level that will achieve the target Eb/No. See “Controlling interference” on page 514.

Downlink - FER Displays the frame erasure rate (FER) at each bin based on the FER to Eb/No curve defined in the W-CDMA Bearer dialog box. See “Defining W-CDMA bearers” on page 57.

Downlink - Received Io Displays the total downlink noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the downlink received signal strength including thermal noise.

Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

160


Uplink interference analysis Uplink interference analysis layers (see Table 8.4) enable you to determine the interference generated on the uplink connections in your network.

Downlink- Outdoor Io Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain.

Downlink - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference

Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage.

Downlink - i-Factor Displays the other-to-own cell interference ratio based on all other sectors and the in-cell signal strength. This layer is the reciprocal of the Downlink - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference layer in linear form.

Downlink - Throughput Displays the mean downlink throughput for each bin.

Downlink - Bearer Coverage

Displays the coverage probability for each bearer specified in the analysis.

Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage

Displays the maximum achieved data rates over the analysis area.

Table 8.4 Uplink interference analysis layers

Layer Description

Uplink - Best Server Displays the uplink coverage for each sector

Uplink - Composite Best Server

Identical to the Uplink - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Uplink - Coverage Probability

Displays the probability of uplink highest bearer coverage. The highest bearer is determined from the bearers available in the subscriber equipment settings depending on the maximum uplink data rate defined in the Qualities settings..

Table 8.3 Downlink analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

161


Handover analysis Handover analysis layers (see Table 8.5) enable you to determine the handover status of each sector included in an analysis. For more information on how handover and soft handover occur, see “Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks” on page 511.

Uplink - Req Mobile EIRP

Displays the EIRP values for a mobile at each bin that are required to close the uplink. This is calculated as follows:Required EIRP = Required PA Power + Mobile Antenna Gain = Required Eb/No - Processing Gain + Penetration Loss + Masked Pathloss + Noise Rise + Composite Noise Figure + kTBThe composite noise figure is taken from the link budget for the sector (and, optionally, the carrier). See “Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors” on page 87. The required mobile EIRP will vary for different subscriber types.

Uplink - Mobile EIRP Margin

Displays the difference between the maximum possible mobile EIRP and the actual required EIRP for each bin

Uplink - Load Displays the best server cell load for each bin. The load at a bin is the cell loading of the uplink best server for that bin.

Uplink - Throughput Displays the mean uplink throughput for each bin.

Uplink - Bearer Coverage


Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage


Throughput will only exist in areas where CPICH coverage and path balance exists.

Table 8.4 Uplink interference analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

162


All handover calculations are based on the Handover Margin value defined on the Quality panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see “To define quality settings” on page 104.Table 8.5 Handover analysis layers

Layer Description

Handover - Status Displays the handover state of each sector within the analysis area. The handover states are:■ Not in handover (N)—there is only one available server■ Soft handover (S)—the subscriber is served by two

sectors from two different sites■ Softer handover (SS)—the subscriber is served by two

sectors from the same site■ Softer-Soft handover (SS-S)—the subscriber is served

by three sectors. The subscriber’s best server and either the second or third best server is situated at one site and the remaining server is at another site.

■ Soft-Softer handover (S-SS)—the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscriber’s best server is situated at one site and the next two best servers are situated at another site.

■ Soft-Soft handover (S-S)—all three servers are located at different sites

■ Softer-Softer (SSS)—the subscriber is served by three sectors, all from the same site

■ 4 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by four sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 5 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by five sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 6 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by six sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 7 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by seven sectors (irrespective of the sites)

Handover - Soft Handover Gain

Displays the uplink soft handover gain at each bin. The gain is produced by the ability of the subscribers and sites to operate at a lower power value when engaged in soft handover and still meet the system quality requirements for the FER.

Handover - Active Server Count

Displays the total number of serving sectors (i.e., the sectors in soft handover)

Handover - Active Site Count

Displays the total number of serving sites (i.e., the sites where sectors are in soft handover)

163


Other analysis The path balance analysis layer (see Table 8.6) enables you to determine whether coverage has been achieved on both the uplink and downlink paths.

Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMAStep 1 Ensure that you have defined a traffic map for the subscriber

types that covers the same area as your Monte Carlo analysis. See “Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA” on page 77 and Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 Optionally, generate a rapid planning analysis. See “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129.

Step 3 Define prediction view settings. See “Optimizing W-CDMA analyses” on page 165.

Step 4 Create a new W-CDMA analysis. See “Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA” on page 168.

Step 5 Define settings and generate a Monte Carlo analysis. See “Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA” on page 170.

Table 8.6 Path balance analysis layer

Layer Description

Other - Path Balance Displays the balance between the downlink and uplink. The downlink is considered covered at a bin if both CPICH coverage and service coverage are achieved.Path balance is achieved when the probability of both the uplink and downlink coverage is equal to or greater than the Cell Edge Coverage Probability value in the Circuit Switched Service or Packet Switched Service dialog box. See “Defining service types for W-CDMA” on page 70.

Other - Combined Probability

The combined coverage probability for the downlink and uplink (Downlink - Coverage Probability layer and Uplink - Coverage Probability layer). For each pixel, the combined probability layer represents the minimum probability of the two layers.

164


Step 6 View and interpret discrete subscriber information and operating points. See “Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA” on page 182 and “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

Step 7 If required, generate additional runs. See “Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis” on page 185.

Step 8 Define, generate, and view analysis layers. See

■ “Defining W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 186■ “Generating W-CDMA analysis layers” on

page 188■ “Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 189

Step 9 Generate statistical reports for analysis layers. See “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

Optimizing W-CDMA analysesYou can optimize analysis speed or disk space usage by choosing whether or not to use prediction view files. Using prediction view files is optional and your decision should be based on a consideration of the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case.By default, when you generate an analysis, prediction view files are created. Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin.Using prediction view files results in faster analyses because Mentum Planet only reads one file to access information about signal strength for all potential servers. If you do not use prediction view files, Mentum Planet opens individual prediction files to query signal strength. However, prediction view files occupy additional disk space and can take a significant amount of time to generate initially, especially if you are working with multi-resolution predictions over a large area. Prediction view files work at a single resolution. If you are analyzing a large area with mostly low resolution data and small amounts of higher resolution data, the disk space requirements can be significantly higher than the combined disk space requirements of the prediction data if the analysis is carried out at the higher resolution. This is because the prediction view files will be created at the higher resolution over the entire area. Also, separate

165


prediction views are created for each of the required analysis resolutions, which can further add to disk space requirements. For example, an area that is 100 km x 100 km with a 10-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 2 GB of disk space for prediction view files, whereas an area that is 200 km x 200 km with a 5-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 32 GB of disk space for prediction view files.

To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings1 Choose Edit ➤ Project Settings.2 In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab.

3 In the CDMA Analysis Optimization section, do the following to define the number of predictions considered at each location (especially in calculating total downlink interference) and specify the maximum pathloss:■ In the Maximum Number of Predictions box, type a value for

the number of overlapping predictions considered at each location when you generate analyses. Limiting the number of overlapping predictions is useful in situations such as a dense urban area where there are thousands of overlapping predictions,

166


but the total interference is dominated by a small number of the strongest signals. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.

■ In the Maximum Pathloss box, type a value for the maximum pathloss that will be considered (within the Maximum Number of Predictions restriction). This value enables you to exclude weak signals from your analyses. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.

4 Click OK.

Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settingsIf you want to use the same settings for a number of Monte Carlo analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.

To define default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings.2 Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK.


■ “To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA” on page 170

■ “To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis” on page 173

■ “To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA” on page 177

■ “To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175

Defining default analysis layers for W-CDMA After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, nodes are created in the Project Explorer under the W-CDMA analysis name for the carriers, subscriber types,

167


usage types, and environments that were included in the analysis. W-CDMA analysis layers are generated for each environment under the usage type.By default, all of the available W-CDMA analysis layers are generated. If you have a large project, to avoid lengthy generation times, you can omit layers that you do not need using the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter. The W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter enables you to define a default list of analysis layers that will be available for all of the W-CDMA analyses that you create for the current project.

To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Analysis Layer Filter.

2 In the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK.

For more information on each analysis layer, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the W-CDMA Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.Rapid planning is a quicker analysis method than Monte Carlo, but does not provide the detailed subscriber information that a Monte Carlo analysis does.

168


For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129.

To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose New Network Analysis.

The W-CDMA Analysis dialog box opens.

2 In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis.3 In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.

A W-CDMA analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the W-CDMA technology. If you want to perform

analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, “Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.



169


4 From the Analysis Mode list, choose Monte Carlo, and click OK.

A new W-CDMA analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.

Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA You define the settings for the Monte Carlo analysis using the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box. When you are satisfied with the settings, you can generate the analysis directly from this dialog box.

To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate.

The W-CDMA Simulation dialog box opens.


If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node, choose Select Sectors,

and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use and click Continue.If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see “To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA” on page 181.

170


3 If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effect of power control imperfections or errors, on the System panel, enable the Simulate Power Control Errors check box.

For more information on defining power control settings, see “To define power control settings for W-CDMA” on page 39. For general information on controlling interference using power controls, see “Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks” on page 511.

4 If you want to calculate soft handover within the Monte Carlo simulation to limit macro-diversity soft handover gain, enable the Use Soft Handover Gain check box.

If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handover will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handover gain is not taken into account for the uplink link analysis for the mobile.

171


5 If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effects of slow fading, enable the Model Slow Fading check box.

For more information on slow fading, see “How slow fading is modeled” on page 515.

6 From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer.

The CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the fourth best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the fourth best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.


172


To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis 1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree

view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the simulation.


To define Simulation Area settings for W-CDMA The simulation area controls traffic spreading for Monte Carlo analyses.

173


1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Simulation Area in the tree view.

2 On the Simulation Area panel, choose one of the following options:■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates

that the simulation area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis


■ Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes■ Click Update Bounds With Active View. The x and y

coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window.

3 In the Simulation Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the simulation.

174




To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA 1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters

in the tree view.

2 On the Runtime Parameters panel, in the Analysis Target section, do one of the following:■ To enable the simulation to run a specific number of times,

choose the Use Fixed Number of Runs option and type a value in the Number of Runs box.

■ To enable the simulation to run until a convergence target is reached, choose the Use Convergence Achieved option and type a value in the Convergence Required box.

175


■ To enable the simulation to run until both the specified number of runs have completed and the convergence target has been reached, choose the Use Number of Runs and Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.

■ To enable the simulation to run until either the specified number of runs have completed or the convergence target has been reached (whichever comes first), choose the Use Number of Runs or Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.

For more information on these settings, see “Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs” on page 150.

3 In the Options section, do any of the following:■ To collect information about discrete subscribers that you can

display once the analysis is complete, enable the Collect Discrete Information check box. For more information on displaying discrete subscriber information, see “Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA” on page 182.

■ To automatically generate W-CDMA analysis layers when the Monte Carlo runs are complete, enable the Automatically Generate Layers check box. By default, the analysis layers that are enabled in the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter dialog box are generated. If you do not enable this check box, you can still generate layers after the Monte Carlo runs are complete. For more information on generating analysis layers and the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, see “Generating W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 188.


176


To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA 1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the

tree view.

177


2 On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates

that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis




■ Use An Analysis Grid—enables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. This option is useful to ensure that the analysis area remains the same over repeated analyses. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, “Working with the Grid Manager”, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.




178


Defining discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA You can define different colors for each coverage state associated with a subscriber and for each subscriber type defined. Coverage states are:

■ Served, Not Negotiated—The subscriber was served at the maximum data rate on both the downlink and uplink.

■ Served, Downlink Negotiated—The subscriber was served but the downlink was not at the maximum data rate although the uplink was.

■ Served, Uplink Negotiated—The subscriber was served but the uplink was not at the maximum data rate although the downlink was.

■ Served, Negotiated—The subscriber was served but neither the uplink or downlinkwere at the maximum data rate.

■ Mobile PA Power—The subscriber was dropped because the mobile PA power was not sufficient to achieve the Eb/No target on the uplink.

■ Noise Rise—The subscriber was dropped because the mobile signal caused one or more sectors to exceed its noise rise limit.

■ Channel Elements—The subscriber was dropped because there were insufficient channel elements available on the serving sector.

■ User Limit—The subscriber was dropped because the maximum user limit was reached on the serving sector.

■ Sector PA Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient PA power at the serving sector.

■ Traffic Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient traffic power on the downlink to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target.

■ CPICH Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient CPICH power on the downlink, which means that the CPICH power was not sufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

■ Unknown Drop State—The subscriber was dropped for an unknown reason.

■ Code Limit—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient codes on the downlink.

179


■ Cell Radius Limit—The subscriber was dropped because he or she was outside of the maximum cell radius for the serving sector.

■ Speed Limit—The subscriber was dropped because he or she exceeded the speed limit for the sector.

■ Throughput Limit—The subscriber was dropped because the throughput limit for the serving site was exceeded.

To define discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Discrete Subscriber Preferences.

The Discrete Subscriber Preferences dialog box opens.

180


2 If you want to change the color used for a coverage state, do the following:■ Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the coverage

state.■ In the Color dialog box, choose or define the color, and click

OK.3 If you want to change the properties for the symbol that is displayed in the

Map window for a subscriber type, do the following:■ Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the

subscriber type.■ In the Symbol Style dialog box, modify the symbol properties

and click OK.

For more information on the Symbol Style dialog box, press the F1 key.

Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMAOnce you have finished defining settings for an analysis, you can generate it directly from the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box.

To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 1 Define the settings on each panel in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog

box as described in “Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA” on page 170.

2 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, click Analyze.3 If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select

Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue.

4 If you chose to generate layers automatically, in the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK.

A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the dialog box closes and the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include each subscriber type and carrier in the analysis.

If you chose to generate layers automatically, the layers are generated and displayed in the Project Explorer under the analysis. If you did not

181


generate layers automatically, you can generate them as a separate step. See “Generating W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 188.

Adding an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses nodeIf you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the W-CDMA Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.

To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node1 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the

W-CDMA_Analyses folder in the current project folder.2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses.


Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA If you chose to collect information about discrete subscribers during the Monte Carlo simulation (see “To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175), the status of each subscriber is automatically displayed in the Map window when the simulation completes. The coverage

If you cancel an analysis generation before it has completed, the number of runs completed and the convergence level achieved (if

applicable) are indicated at the bottom of the Runtime Parameters panel of the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box.

182


states are displayed using the colors that you chose in the Discrete Subscribers Preferences dialog box.

The discrete subscriber information from each run of the analysis is stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project using the naming convention <AnalysisName>_<Run Number>. You can also display discrete subscriber information in a tabular form using a new Browser window. For more information on the columns and format of the table, see “Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 521.

To display discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA in table format1 Choose File ➤ Open Table.2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of

your project and choose the MapInfo table (.tab file) that you want to display.

3 From the Preferred View list, choose Browser.4 Click Open.

The discrete subscriber table opens in a new Browser window.

Creating an unserved subscriber traffic mapWhen you view discrete subscribers, you may notice a high number of subscribers who are not being served by a particular sector. In order to better understand the reason behind this, you can create a traffic map of unserved subscribers. Using the Grid Info tool, you can determine how much unserved traffic there is at a particular bin. If your network consists of a 3G technology

If you generate multiple runs for a Monte Carlo simulation, the discrete subscriber information that is displayed automatically applies only to

the last run. If you want to view discrete subscriber information that applies to all runs in a Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Display Discrete Subscribers.The Display Discrete Subscribers command will not work if you have cleared the Visible check box for the analysis in the Windows category of the Project Explorer.

183


overlaid on a 2G technology, you can use the unserved subscriber traffic map in a network analysis of the 2G network layer.

To create an unserved subscriber traffic map1 Do one of the following in the Project Explorer:

■ In the Project Data category, right-click the Traffic Maps node and choose Create Unserved Traffic Map from Monte-Carlo Analysis.

■ In the Network Analyses category, right-click the Monte Carlo analysis from which you want to create the unserved subscriber traffic map and choose Unserved Subscriber Traffic Map.

2 In the Unserved Subscribers Traffic Map Generator dialog box, in the Traffic Map Output Name box, type a name for the traffic map.

3 In the Subscriber Types section, enable the check boxes next to the subscriber types for which you want to view the unserved subscribers.

4 Click Generate.

The traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category.

5 Right-click the generated map and do any of the following:■ To view the map, right-click the generated map and choose

View.■ To update the traffic information for the sectors with traffic

information from a traffic map, choose Capture.■ To combine multiple compatible traffic maps into one new

traffic map, choose Combine.■ To scale the traffic values in a traffic map, choose Scale.

Before creating an unserved subscriber traffic map, you must have generated a Monte Carlo analysis and collected discrete subscriber

information. For the traffic map to contain meaningful values, the Monte Carlo analysis should consist of several runs.

Use the Zoom-In tool to zoom in on individual areas of the map and better view unserved subscribers.

184


Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis

After viewing the operating points (see “Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225) and discrete subscriber information, you might determine that additional runs are required to achieve greater accuracy.You can modify the runtime parameters of an existing analysis and perform additional runs. The new results are added to the operating points of the final run of the existing analysis.

To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate.2 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters

in the tree view.3 On the Runtime Parameters panel as required, do one of the following:

■ If you originally used the Fixed Number of Runs option, increase the number of runs.

■ If you originally used the Convergence Achieved option, modify the convergence value.

For more information, see “To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175.

4 If you want to change the settings in the Options section, enable or clear the check boxes as required.

5 Click Append.

Updating W-CDMA rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results

Once you have generated a Monte Carlo simulation, you have the option of using the results of the simulation to update the target values for Uplink DPCH Noise Rise and Downlink Total Traffic Power on the Sector Settings -

If you make changes to your project outside of the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box (for example, if you modify the usages assigned to a

subscriber type in the Subscribers category in the Project Explorer) these changes will not be reflected in the additional runs.

185


Implementation panel. These values are used in rapid planning. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129.

To update W-CDMA target values1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click a

Monte Carlo analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Apply Cell Loads.

2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

The rapid planning settings are updated for all sectors in the group chosen for the analysis.

Defining W-CDMA analysis layers If you chose not to generate layers automatically as part of the analysis, you can generate them afterward. To manage the analysis layers for an individual analysis, you can use the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box to define the availability of analysis layers for each environment. This enables you to generate the same analysis layers for all of the environments, or different analysis layers for different environments.

If you apply cell loads and there is 0 required traffic for a carrier-sector, a value of -200 dBm is applied to the Downlink Total Traffic Power box

on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel.

You can also generate W-CDMA analysis layers at the same time as operating points and subscriber information. For more information, see

“To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA” on page 175.

186


To define the W-CDMA analysis layers to use in an analysis1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the W-CDMA Analysis node and choose Layers.

The W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box opens, showing nodes for each carrier, subscriber type, quality, and environment, and the layers that are available for each.

■ If the check box is enabled for a node, all of the layers that apply to the node will be generated.

■ If the check box is cleared, no layers that apply to the node will be generated.

■ If the check box contains a black square, only some of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. You can expand the nodes to view which layers are chosen.

187


2 In the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, expand the environment nodes, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK.

This dialog box includes only the default analysis layers you chose in the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box. To modify the default analysis layers, see “To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list” on page 168.

For more information on each analysis layer, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

Generating W-CDMA analysis layers Once you have defined the analysis layers, you can generate the analysis.

To generate W-CDMA analysis layers■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category,

right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate Layers.

A dialog box opens that displays the status of the operation. Any errors are displayed in a separate dialog box. If required, path loss and signal strength predictions are updated during the analysis.

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific informationYou can generate a network analysis for sectors identified with certain flags and conditions. For example, you could generate a network analysis for sites in Phase 1 that are installed and operational. To do this, you define the flags and conditions, and then generate a network analysis. In the Select Sectors dialog box, you choose the Flags Filter. For more information on flags and conditions, see “Working with flags”, in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

You can generate the W-CDMA analysis layers directly from the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box by clicking Generate.

188





generate and choose Generate.5 Define the analysis settings as described in as described in “Defining

Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA” on page 170, and then follow the procedure described in “To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA” on page 181.

Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers Once you have generated an analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.

To view W-CDMA analysis layers1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the

W-CDMA Analyses node, expand the carrier, subscriber type, usage type, and environment for which you want to view analysis layers.

2 Right-click an analysis and choose View.


If you rename an analysis in the Project Explorer, any layers currently open or displayed in the Map window will be closed.

To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the W-CDMA



“Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports” on page 225.

189


Recoloring best serving sector layers The Best Serving Sector Recolor tool enables you to change the color scheme used to display best serving sector analysis layers (classified grid files).You can use the colors defined in a sector display scheme or choose from the default color schemes used to display TDMA/FDMA and CDMA best serving sector analysis layers. Sector display schemes enable you to display analysis layers based on sector properties, such as the forward link load for CDMA technologies or carried traffic for TDMA/FDMA technologies. When you use a sector display scheme with the Best Serving Sector Recolor tool, only the colors that have been defined for the scheme are used; other sector display scheme settings, such as symbol and size, are ignored.For information about defining sector display schemes, see “Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites” in Chapter 2, “Working With Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To recolor best serving sector layers1 Choose Tools ➤ Best Serving Sector Recolor.

The Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box opens.

2 Click Browse, navigate to the WCDMA_Analysis project folder, choose the best serving sector layer (.grc) file that you want to recolor, and then click Open.

190


3 In the Select Sector Display Scheme section, choose a color scheme and click Apply.

The best serving sector layers are displayed in the Map window using the new color scheme.






Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for W-CDMA

You can obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis by selecting an area in the Map window and using the CDMA Pixel Info tool.

You can modify an existing sector display scheme from within in the Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box by right-clicking a local or

shared scheme and choosing Edit.

The CDMA Pixel Info tool is available only for Monte Carlo analyses.

191


For each subscriber type and carrier that you choose, the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box displays:

■ the pixel co-ordinates (location)■ the number of predictions available■ uplink details, including:

■ Best Server■ Required ERP■ ERP Margin■ Coverage Probability

■ downlink details, including:■ Service Best Server■ Service Eb/No and Service Margin ■ Coverage Probability■ Received Noise

■ CPICH details, including:■ received power■ Ec/Io■ masked path loss polluter indicator and server status at the

specified pixel location

To obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to obtain per-pixel information and choose Pixel Info.

The CDMA Pixel Info dialog box opens. The Type box displays the technology for which the analysis that you chose was generated. The Analysis box displays the analysis for which you chose to display pixel information.

192


2 From the SubCat list, choose the usage type for which you want to view analysis information.

Usage types are defined for a subscriber type, and consist of a service type, quality, and environments. Usage types are displayed in the SubCat list using the syntax of <short name> <first letter of the environment name>. In the example above, Voice is the short name and I indicates that the environment is Indoor. For more information on usage types, see “Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA” on page 77.

3 From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to view analysis information.

4 Click in the Map window to display analysis information for each pixel in the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box.

5 Click Close.

You can also access the CDMA Pixel Info tool by clicking the CDMA Pixel Info button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.

193


Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectorsCPICH pollution occurs when there is an excessive number of pilot signals with high power levels. CPICH pollution can create high levels of interference, resulting in dropped calls, poor voice quality, and poor data throughput.The CPICH Pollution Inspector enables you to identify polluting sectors at specific locations, modify the appropriate sector settings, and then view the effects of your changes. The level of CPICH pollution is analyzed by comparing the powers of the pilot channels with the power of the best serving pilot channel, taking into account the active set (the set of pilots currently participating in the call) and the CPICH pollution margin.Before you use the CPICH Pollution Inspector, you need to identify the areas that may be affected by CPICH pollution. For example, you can generate a Rapid Planning or Monte Carlo analysis and examine the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer. You can also use drive test data or network data to identify potential problem areas. When you click a location in a Map window, the CPICH Pollution Inspector analyzes the location for pilot pollution based on specific carrier, downlink loading, and subscriber settings. You can use settings from a network analysis or define these settings in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box.For a specified location, the CPICH Pollution Inspector displays the following information in a graph window:

■ Best serving sector■ soft handover sectors■ polluting sectors (if any)

Horizontal lines in the graph window indicate the threshold levels for the best serving, handover, and polluting sectors. You can define the number of polluting sectors that are displayed in the graph window, as well as the colors and pilot value (Ec/Io or Ec) used for the display. Additional location and sector information is displayed in the Analysis Info section (see Figure 8.1).

194


Figure 8.1 CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box

In the Mentum Planet Map window, lines are drawn from the specified analysis location to each of the corresponding sectors: Best Server, Handover, CPICH Polluter, and CPICH Detected (see Figure 8.2). The color of the lines corresponds to the colors used in the graph window of the CPICH Pollution Inspector.

Threshold levels

Location and

Graph display ofanalyzed sectors

analysis information

195


Figure 8.2 Map window displaying the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io analysis layer. For the specified location, the CPICH Pollution Inspector adds lines indicating the best serving sector (green), handover sectors (yellow), and polluting sectors (red).

After you have identified the polluting sectors, you can leave the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box open, use the Site Properties dialog box to change the antenna downtilt, azimuth, or height for the polluting sectors, and then update the display in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box to see the effects of your changes.

Workflow for analyzing CPICH pollutionMinimizing CPICH pollution is an iterative process; you may need to repeat the steps in the workflow to achieve the desired results. The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.Step 1 Generate a Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis or use drive

test data to identify potential polluters. See “Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA” on page 144 or “Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA” on page 181.

Step 2 Use the CPICH Pollution Inspector to identify polluters.

196


Step 3 Modify the configuration of polluter sectors. See “Editing sites and sectors” on page 106.

Step 4 Regenerate predictions for the modified sectors. See Chapter 8, “Generating Predictions”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 5 Use the CPICH Pollution Inspector to verify the improvements.

Step 6 Generate an additional Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis to evaluate the overall impact of the sector configuration changes.

To analyze CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors1 Do one of the following to open the CPICH Pollution Inspector:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis and choose CPICH Pollution Inspector.

■ On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the CPICH Pollution Inspector button, click an area in the Map window, then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis and click Continue.

The CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box opens. If you open the CPICH Pollution Inspector from an analysis node in the Project Explorer, the sector, subscriber, carrier, and loading information from the analysis is used. You can use the settings from the analysis or edit them as required, as outlined in this procedure.

2 On the System tab, from the Carrier list, choose the carrier that you want to analyze.

If you opened the CPICH Pollution Inspector from an analysis node, the first carrier included in the analysis is chosen by default.

3 In the Forward Loading section, choose one of the following options to define the forward loading that will be used for the analysis:■ Use the Loading Defined in the Sector Settings—uses the

DCH Total Traffic Power value specified on the Implementation panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Defining W-CDMA sector settings” on page 96.

■ Use Global Loading—type a value to define the percentage of the total PA power that will be used for the analysis. This value

197


will override the total traffic power defined for individual sectors.

■ Use Loading From Analysis—choose an analysis from the list. The forward loading values from the analysis will be used.

4 Click the Subscribers tab.5 Choose one of the following options to define the subscriber type that will

be used for the CPICH pollution analysis:■ Subscriber Type—choose a predefined subscriber type from the

list.■ Nominal Subscriber—type values for each of the following:

■ Antenna Gain—the antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber

■ Maximum Active Servers—the maximum number of handover servers supported by the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber

■ Noise Figure—the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber

6 From the Environment list, choose the type of environment that will be used for the analysis.

7 Click the Analysis Settings tab.8 In the Maximum Polluters box, type the number of polluting sectors that

you want displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector graph window and the Map window.

9 From the Pilot Value list, choose the value that you want to use for the display in the graph window.

10 If you want to change the colors used in the graph window, in the Legend Profile section, do any of the following:■ To edit the current color settings, click Edit, define the colors for

the sector categories, and then click OK.■ To load an existing legend color profile, click Load, choose a

Pilot Inspector color (.pic) file, and then click Open.■ To save the current legend color profile, click Save, type a name

in the File Name box, and then click Save.

198


11 Click on a location in the Map window that you have identified as being affected by CPICH pollution.

The CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box displays CPICH pollution information for the location.

12 If you want to save a report containing information for the location currently displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box, click Export Report, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save.

The location and pollution information is saved in a Microsoft Excel file.

After you have clicked an area in the Map window, you can modify any of the System, Subscriber, or Analysis Settings and then click Update

to refresh the information displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box based on the new settings.

199


200

Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers

9.
Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding HSDPA in

Mentum Planet■ Workflow for generating

HSDPA analysis layers■ Understanding HSUPA in

Mentum Planet■ Workflow for generating

HSPA analysis layers

This chapter describes High Speed Downlink Packet

Access (HSDPA) analysis layers as well as High

Speed Uplink Packet Access analysis layers, and

explains how to generate them.

You must have a license for HSDPA and HSUPA in

order to generate analysis layers.

201


Understanding HSDPA in Mentum PlanetHigh Speed Downlink Packet Data Access (HSDPA) is a high-speed, downlink-only shared channel used for packet data in primarily urban or indoor environments. In real-world networks, the dynamic power allocation ability available using HSDPA results in more subscribers being served and cell power being used more efficiently. Unlike Release 99, where unused power is lost, with HSDPA the unused power is used to optimize network capacity as shown in Figure 9.1 and Figure 9.2.

Figure 9.1 In Release 99, unused power is lost

Unused power

Common channels

Dedicated channels (power controlled)

Tota

l cel

l pow

er

t

Power

202

Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis LayersCDMA User Guide

Figure 9.2 HSDPA, through the use of the HS-DSCH channel, utilizes unused power to maximize network efficiency

To generate HSDPA analysis layers, you need to assign either the Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA carrier type on the Carriers panel in the Network Settings dialog box (see “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40) and assign the carriers to sectors in your project (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99).HSDPA analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers, and consist of standard Rel 99 analysis layers as well as layers that are specific to HSDPA. For more information, see “HSDPA analysis layers” on page 206 and “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129 and “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

HSDPA Monte Carlo analysisIn HSDPA, the following channels are defined and accounted for in a Monte Carlo analysis:

■ HS-DSCH (High-Speed Downlink Shared Channel)—carries downlink data. Power is allocated dynamically. Defined on the Implementation panel in the Sector Settings dialog box. Within a Monte Carlo analysis, the maximum data rate for a served

HS-DSCH (rate controlled)

Common channels

Dedicated channels (power controlled)Tota

l cel

l pow

er

t

Power

203


subscriber is determined by the received HS-DSCH Ec/Nt and the corresponding data rate for the terminal category.

■ HS-SCCH (High-Speed Shared Control Channel)—controls scheduling. Power is user defined and relative to the CPICH power. Defined on the Powers panel in the Sector Settings dialog box.

■ A-DCH (Associated Dedicated Channel)—carries uplink packet data associated with the HS-DSCH channel. There is one A-DCH channel associated with every served subscriber. Uplink A-DCH bearers support 64,128 and 384 Kbps.

Modeling HSDPA discrete subscribersHSDPA discrete subscribers are modeled within a Monte Carlo analysis on both the uplink and the downlink. The number of subscribers spread during an analysis is based on the selected traffic map and the defined input load. The maximum number of HSDPA users allowed per sector is limited by the quality parameters you specify.HSDPA terminal categories are also modeled during an analysis when an A-DCH (Associated Dedicated Channel) uplink bearer is assigned to the sector. The icon next to the Technology Band in the Subscriber Manager of the Project Explorer identifies HSDPA capable terminals. Terminal categories add support for more codes and modulation types thus enabling additional achievable maximum data rates.

Downlink analysisWhen you generate a network analysis using Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA carriers, Mentum Planet first evaluates the amount of power used by overhead and dedicated Rel 99 channels. This power is then subtracted from the total PA power minus the PA threshold for the carrier, defined on the Carriers tab in the Network Settings dialog box.The PA threshold acts as a hard limit for the calculated power of the HSDPA part of a carrier, which represents the unused PA power up to the PA threshold. This is unlike Rel 99 power, where the PA threshold is only a soft limit; which will be breached if subscribers need to be served up to the total PA power.

In this release of Mentum Planet, only HSDPA terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are modeled.

204


Ec/Nt, which represents the ratio of the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) energy per symbol to the total spectral noise density, is then calculated for 1 code throughout the simulation area. The coverage probability for each one of the transport format and resource combinations (TFRC) selected is calculated for the desired number of HSDPA codes. Additionally, the TFRC selection algorithm will select the maximum achievable data rate provided by a TFRC/Number of Codes combination based on quality indicators that reflect the channel conditions, represented by Ec/Nt.Table 9.1 shows the available HSDPA data rates based on the TFRC and number of codes.

Uplink analysisTo model the uplink noise associated with HS-DSCH channels, a Monte Carlo analysis of Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers requires the use of the Average PRACH Interference Power value from the Powers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The A-DCH channel is also modeled using 64, 128 or 384 kbps bearers. The use of the A-DCH channel add flexibility and gives you more codes and modulations to choose from.For a Rapid Planning analysis of Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers, the Uplink DPCH Noise Rise on the Implementation panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box includes the uplink noise rise associated with HS-DSCH channels; that is in addition to uplink Rel 99 DCH channels in the case of Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers.The uplink layers generated for a DCH service are equally applicable to an HS-DSCH service with the same uplink noise (load) parameters.

Table 9.1 Downlink data rates for HSDPA

TFRC Modulation Code rate Data Rate (mbps)

1 code 5 codes 10 codes 15 codes

1 QPSK 1/4 .119 .595 1.190 1.785

2 QPSK 1/2 .237 1.185 2.370 3.555

3 QPSK 3/4 .356 1.780 3.560 5.340

4 16QAM 1/2 .477 2.385 4.770 7.155

5 16QAM 3/4 .712 3.560 7.120 10.680

205


HSDPA analysis layersWhen you generate an HSDPA analysis, you can create most of the standard W-CDMA analysis layers. You can also generate HSDPA analysis layers for any combination of TFRC and HS-DSCH codes.For example, to model an HSDPA terminal capable only of QPSK modulation and up to 5 codes, you would enable TFRC 1, 2, and 3 and then enable 1 and 5 codes on the HSDPA panel in the Network Settings dialog box. Using these settings, the following HSDPA coverage probability layers can be generated:

■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 1 for 1 Code■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 1 for 5 Codes■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 2 for 1 Code■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 2 for 5 Codes

■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 3 for 1 Code■ HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 3 for 5 Codes

For information about standard W-CDMA analysis layers, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

If you are using only HSDPA carriers, not all of the standard W-CDMA downlink analysis layers will be generated. You can only generate a full

set of downlink layers if you are using Rel 99 or Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers.

206


Table 9.2 HSDPA analysis layers

Layer Description

HS-DSCH - Max Achievable Data Rate

Displays the predicted highest achievable forward link data rate per bin (see Table 9.1). This rate is automatically selected from those provided by the chosen combinations of TRFC and HS-DSCH codes in the Network Settings dialog box. The data rate prediction is based on the predicted Ec/Nt and the slow fade margin that is required to ensure a certain level of coverage probability.The slow fade margin required depends on the coverage probability requirement and the slow fading standard deviation assumptions. When predicting the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate, the required fade margin is computed at each bin, and then a coverage probability is calculated for each data rate according the required Ec/Nt threshold, predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin. For each bin, the data rates with coverage probabilities lower than the required threshold are considered as having no coverage in the bin. There may be more than one data rate for which the coverage probabilities are above the coverage probability requirement. In this case, the highest data rate is considered as the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate for the bin.

HS-DSCH Ec/Nt

Displays the ratio of HS-DSCH symbol energy to total spectral noise density for each bin. Ec/Nt is derived from the predicted Ec/Nt. The mobile constantly measures this parameter in order to predict the highest achievable data rate over next the packet.During an HSDPA analysis, the forward SINR represented by Ec/Nt for 1 code is computed for each bin according to the signal predictions of the serving sector, its HS-DSCH power, and the total output power and signal predictions of all other interfering sectors. The values in this layer represent the best SINR in an ideal situation.

HS-DSCH - Coverage for TFRC <number> for <number> Codes

Displays a coverage map for each HSDPA data rate provided by the chosen combinations of TRFC and HS-DSCH codes in the Network Settings dialog box (see Table 9.1).

HS-DSCH - Cell Throughput

Displays the average HS-DSCH throughput on a per-sector basis. This layer is only generated for Monte-Carlo analyses.

HS-SCCH - Best Server

Displays the coverage area of each sector supporting HSDPA when CPICH coverage and HS-SCCH coverage are achieved.

207


HS-SCCH - EIRP Margin

Displays the difference between the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt and the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt target.

HS - SCCH Ec/Nt

Displays the ratio of the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) energy per chip to the total spectral noise density.

HS - SCCH Coverage

Displays the downlink coverage of the High Speed Shared Control Channel based on the HS-SCCH target Ec/Nt threshold.

Table 9.2 HSDPA analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

208


Workflow for generating HSDPA analysis layersStep 1 Assign the Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA technology to at least one

W-CDMA carrier and define HSDPA technology settings for the network. See “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40 and “To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMA” on page 42.

Step 2 Assign Rel 99 & HSDPA and/or HSDPA carriers to at least one sector in your project, and define HSDPA settings for the sector. See “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99 and “Editing sites and sectors” on page 106.

Step 3 Generate an analysis, ensuring that you choose the HSDPA carrier, and view the results. See “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129 and “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

Understanding HSUPA in Mentum PlanetHigh Speed Uplink Packet Data Access (HSUPA) is based on high-speed, uplink-only dedicated channels used for packet data in primarily urban or indoor environments. It is always used in tandem with HSDPA (on the downlink) and provides high uplink data rates resulting in more subscribers being served and cell power being used more efficiently. Figure 9.3 on page 210 illustrates how resources are shared within an HSUPA channel. HSUPA offers similar enhancements on the uplink as those provided by HSDPA on the downlink. The carrier name, HSPA, reflects that both technologies are used and both technologies are added to the tree view when HSPA is chosen in the Network Settings dialog box.

209


The main differences between the implementation of HSDPA and HSUPA are:

■ In HSUPA, the shared resource is the interference headroom whereas in HSDPA the shared resource is the transmission power and the code space.

■ In HSUPA, traffic is carried on a dedicated channel with time multiplexing whereas in HSDPA traffic is carried on dedicated channels with no time multiplexing.

■ In HSUPA, a constant transmission power rate adaptation is implemented to deal with the non orthogonality of signals (i.e., fast power control is required).

■ In HSUPA, soft handover is supported on the uplink to limit the amount of interference generated by neighboring cells; thus power control from multiple cells is allowed.

Figure 9.3 In HSUPA, the maximum allowable interference level is exploited in order to allow the highest data rate transfer possible.

To generate HSPA analysis layers, you need to assign either the Rel 99 & HSPA or HSPA carrier type on the Carriers panel in the Network Settings dialog box (see “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40) and assign the carriers to sectors in your project (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99).

HSUPA Interference Headroom

Inter Cell Interference

Rel99 In-Cell Interference

t

Inte

rfere

nce

Leve

l

Maximum Allowable Interference

Thermal Noise

210


HSPA analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned Rel 99 & HSPA and HSPA carriers, and consist of standard Rel 99 analysis layers as well as layers that are specific to HSUPA. For more information, see “HSDPA analysis layers” on page 206 and “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129 and “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

HSPA Rapid Planning analysisIn Mentum Planet 4.4, only Rapid Planning analyses for HSPA are available. As a result, you cannot model site capacity; however, you can model site coverage.In HSPA, the HSDPA channels are used on the downlink (see “HSDPA Monte Carlo analysis” on page 203) as well as the following additional downlink channels:

■ E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel)—carries absolute grants for uplink E-DCH scheduling.

■ E-HICH (E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Channel)—carries hybrid ARQ ACK/NACK indicator.

■ E-RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel)—carries relative grants for uplink E-DCH scheduling.

You define a combined control power for these channels in the HSUPA Control Channels Power box on the Powers panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box.On the uplink, the following channels are used:

■ E-DPDCH (E-DCH Dedicated physical Data Channel)—carries uplink user data

■ E-DPCCH (E-DCH Dedicated physical Control Channel)—carries control information.

HSPA analysisOn the downlink, HSDPA elements are used. See “Downlink analysis” on page 204 for information on the channels included in the analysis. In addition, the HSUPA Control Channel Power value defined on the Powers panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box is also included.

211


On the uplink, the total uplink load defined on the Implementation panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box or in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box is used.

Analysis layersWhen you generate an HSPA analysis, you can create most of the standard W-CDMA analysis layers. You can also generate HSPA analysis layers for any combination of FRCs. Each FRC corresponds to a TTI length (2 or 10ms) and the number of codes used for each spreading factor. For example, to model an HSUPA terminal capable of transmitting 2 codes with a spreading factor of 4 (terminal category 2), you need to enable the check box next to FRC 1 and FRC 5 on the HSUPA panel in the Network Settings dialog box. Using these settings, the following HSUPA coverage probability layers are generated:

■ E-DCH - Coverage for FRC 1■ E-DCH - Coverage for FRC 5

For information about standard W-CDMA analysis layers, see “Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157. Table 9.3 details HSUPA analysis layers.Table 9.3 HSUPA-specific layers

During an HSPA Monte Carlo analysis, HSPA carriers will spread HSDPA subscribers and HSPA & Rel 99 carriers will spread HSDPA

and Rel 99 subscribers.

Layer Description

E-DCH - Coverage for FRC

Displays the coverage for the selected FRC based on the slow fading standard deviation and required Ec/No for the FRC.

E-DCH - Max Achievable Data Rate

Displays the data rate for the FRC that achieves the cell edge coverage probability defined in the Packet Switched Service dialog box.

E-DCH - Average Data Rate

Displays the average data rate calculated from the coverage probability for each FRC.

212


Workflow for generating HSPA analysis layersStep 1 Assign the Rel 99 & HSPA or HSPA technology to at least one W-

CDMA carrier and define HSPA technology settings for the network. See “To define carrier settings for W-CDMA” on page 40 and “To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMA” on page 46.

Step 2 Assign Rel 99 & HSPA and/or HSPA carriers to at least one sector in your project, and define HSPA settings for the sector. See “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 99 and “Editing sites and sectors” on page 106.

Step 3 Generate a rapid planning analysis, ensuring that you choose the HSPA carrier, and view the results. See “Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 129.

In this release of Mentum Planet, only the rapid planning analysis is available for HSPA.

213


214

Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans

10.
Creating Scrambling Code Plans
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding scrambling

code planning■ Workflow for scrambling code

planning■ Creating a scrambling code

plan■ Defining general scrambling

code plan settings■ Defining scrambling code plan

exceptions■ Working with scrambling code

planning results

This chapter describes how to use the Scrambling

Code Planning tool to allocate scrambling codes to

sectors in your network.

215


Understanding scrambling code planningDownlink scrambling codes are used to separate sectors within a W-CDMA network. The Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to allocate scrambling codes automatically based on distance or interference. When you create a scrambling code plan, each sector is assigned a scrambling code. The scrambling code is made up of a group code, which is the primary scrambling code, and a secondary code. There are 512 primary scrambling codes available for each carrier. For each primary code, there are 15 secondary codes.

Workflow for scrambling code planningStep 1 Create a group of sites that you will use for your neighbor list and

scrambling code planning. See Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 Create a neighbor list using the group of sites. See Chapter 12, “Working with Neighbor Lists”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 3 If you are planning by interference, create an interference matrix using the group of sites. See Chapter 11, “Working with Interference Matrices”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 4 Define scrambling code planning settings and generate a plan. See “Creating a scrambling code plan” on page 216.

Creating a scrambling code planThe Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to allocate scrambling codes while minimizing interference using either of the following methods:

■ By Distance—reuses scrambling codes with the aim of maximizing the distance between reused scrambling codes. This method assumes that the greater the distance is between reused codes, the less interference will occur. This is a quick and useful method for planning macrocells and areas with a low site density.

■ By Interference—reuses scrambling codes with the aim of minimizing interference between sectors that share the same scrambling code. This method provides a more exact plan in that it also considers information from an interference matrix. This

216

Creating Scrambling Code PlansCDMA User Guide

method is useful for planning microcells and areas with a high site density.

To create a scrambling code plan1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

W-CDMA Analyses and choose Scrambling Code Planning Tool.2 In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which

you want to generate the plan and click Continue.

If you have sectors in your project that are not W-CDMA sectors, a dialog box is displayed identifying the sectors. These sectors will not be included in the plan.

The Scrambling Code Planning dialog box opens.

3 Define the general settings.

See “Defining general scrambling code plan settings” on page 218.

4 Optionally, define exceptions for the plan, including illegal carriers and sectors that cannot share scrambling codes.

See “Defining scrambling code plan exceptions” on page 220.

217


5 Click Generate.

The Scrambling Code Planning tool creates and displays a plan in table format that lists the sectors in the plan and provides information about the assigned scrambling codes.

6 To apply the scrambling code plan to your project, choose File ➤ Commit Plan.

The scrambling codes are assigned to each sector, and are displayed on the Implementation panel of the Sector Settings dialog box.

Defining general scrambling code plan settingsTo create a scrambling code plan, you must choose the planning algorithm that you want to use, and specify the carriers to plan. You must also choose a neighbor list. If you are using the By Interference method of planning, you must specify an interference matrix and define advanced settings.

To define general settings1 On the Settings tab of the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, from

the Planning Algorithm list, choose one of the following methods for planning scrambling codes:■ By Distance—plans codes by maximizing the distance between

reused codes■ By Interference—plans codes by using an interference matrix

to minimize the interference between sectors that use the same code

2 In the Plan Name box, type a name for the scrambling code plan.3 From the W-CDMA Carriers list, choose a carrier for which to plan.

If you choose All Carriers, the same scrambling code is applied to all carriers in a sector.

218


4 If you want to use a neighbor list as input to the scrambling code plan, from the Neighbor List list, choose which one to use.

The neighbor list should include the group of sites for which you are creating the plan. The algorithm will not assign the same code to two neighbors.

If neighbor information is missing for any sites that you are planning, a scrambling code plan is still created, but a warning message is displayed, identifying the sectors with missing neighbor information.

5 If you chose the By Interference planning method, from the Interference Matrix list, choose the interference matrix to use for the plan.

This option is not available if you are planning by distance.

6 If you have already generated a plan or have loaded a previously saved plan and want to keep the scrambling codes that have already been assigned, enable the Keep Existing Codes check box.

If you do not enable this check box, any codes already assigned are replaced.

You can review or modify the plan before deciding whether to keep the existing codes. For more information, see “Working with scrambling code planning results” on page 222.

7 If you are planning by interference, in the Advanced Interference Settings section, do any of the following:■ Use the Quality/Speed slider to choose a value between Fast

and Best to define the balance between quality and speed that you want to use when producing the scrambling code plan. Choosing a value closer to Fast means that the plan is created using fewer iterations. This is useful if you want to fine-tune a plan, for example, to check the effects of changing a threshold value. Choosing a value closer to Best means that the plan is created using more iterations, which produces a higher quality plan and takes more time.

■ In the Random Seed box, type a number for random seed. This number enables you to start the plan from a different point, which can result in slightly different results when the plan is run. You can run the same plan repeatedly using different random

219


seed numbers and then choose the version that gives you the best result.

■ In the Ignore Interference Less Than (%) box, type a percentage value below which interference will be ignored in planning. Use this option to filter out very low interference values that are not significant and that would slow down the planning process.

8 To define exceptions, click the Exceptions tab.

For more information on defining exceptions, see “To define scrambling code planning exceptions” on page 221.

9 To generate the plan, click Generate.

The Scrambling Code Planning tool creates and displays a report in table format that lists the sectors in the plan and provides information about the scrambling codes assigned to each sector.

Defining scrambling code plan exceptionsYou can define exceptions for the entire network, one or more groups of sites, one or more sites, or one or more sectors in a site.Scrambling code exceptions are:

■ illegal scrambling codes (codes that cannot be used for a chosen sector, site, group of sites, or network)

■ sectors that cannot share the same scrambling code

Once you generate a scrambling code plan, you can view details about illegal codes and relationships between sectors by clicking the Statistics

tab and choosing Exceptions from the Statistics Selection list.

220


To define scrambling code planning exceptions1 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, click the Exceptions tab.

2 If you have an existing exceptions file that you want to use as a starting point, choose File ➤ Load Exceptions, navigate to the folder that contains the file and click Open.

3 In the Site Selection section, from Selection Type list, choose one of the following options:■ Network—applies illegal codes to all sites in your project.■ Site Groups—applies illegal codes to one or more groups of

sites.■ Sites—applies illegal codes to one or more sites. The sites that

appear in the Sites list are the sites in the group that you chose in Step 2 in “To create a scrambling code plan” on page 217. If you choose this option, you must choose one or more sites from the Sites list.

■ Sector—applies illegal codes to one or more sectors. The sites that appear in the Sites list are the sites in the group that you chose in Step 2 in “To create a scrambling code plan” on

221


page 217. If you choose this option, you must choose a site from the Sites list and one or more sectors from the Sectors list.

4 In the Illegal Scrambling Codes section, do one of the following:■ If you want to make a scrambling code illegal for the groups,

sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the code in the Available Codes list and click >>.

■ If you want to make an illegal code available for the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the code in the Illegal Codes list and click <<.

5 In the Illegal Sectors for Code Sharing section:■ If you want to define sectors that cannot share the same

scrambling code as the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the sector in the Available Sectors list and click >>.

■ If you want to make a sector available to share codes with the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the sector in the Illegal Sectors list and click <<.

6 If you want to save exceptions, choose File ➤ Save Exceptions, and then in the Save SCP Exceptions dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file and click Save.

Working with scrambling code planning resultsOnce you generate a scrambling code plan, you can modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector and view statistics about the plan. The scrambling code index is related directly to the scrambling code, and is typically used for manual planning to simplify the planning process.

To modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector■ In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, on the Plan tab, click

in the Scrambling Code Index box for the sector that you want to modify and type the new value.

The scrambling code value updates automatically.

222


To view statistics for a planThe statistics available for a plan include information about the distance between reused codes, the amount of interference between reused codes, and the number of times a code index was assigned.

1 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, click the Statistics tab.2 From the Statistics Selection list, choose the type of statistics to view.

For more information on each type of statistics, press the F1 key.

To open a plan in Excel■ In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File ➤ Export

to Excel.

The plan opens in an Excel spreadsheet.

To save a planBy default, scrambling code plans are saved to the <project>/SCP folder.

1 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File ➤ Save Plan To File.

2 In the Save Scrambling Code Plan dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the plan, type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.

To load a planIf you want to view or continue working with a plan that you have saved, you can load the plan.

1 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File ➤ Load Plan From File.

2 In the Load Scrambling Code Plan dialog box, navigate to the scrambling code plan that you want to load and click Open.

223


224

Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports

11.
Generating W-CDMA Reports

reports■ Predefined report designs■ Workflow for generating

W-CDMA reports■ Generating a W-CDMA report

using a predefined report design

■ Designing a W-CDMA report■ Generating a W-CDMA report■ Calculating statistics for

W-CDMA analysis layers

This chapter describes how to design and generate

reports about data in your W-CDMA network.

225


Understanding W-CDMA reportsA report is a table of data in HTML or Excel format that provides information about your network. You can design, preview, save, and generate reports. You can include the following types of data in a report:

■ general data—applies to all technologies enabled in your network. You can include the following types of general data in your report:

■ cell equipment data—data about the sectors in the project (you can choose W-CDMA, cdma2000, or TDMA/FDMA)

■ antenna data■ subscriber data■ data generated using the layer statistics tool

■ W-CDMA-specific data—applies only to W-CDMA. You can include the following types of W-CDMA-specific data in your report:

■ Monte Carlo simulation data■ W-CDMA analysis layer statistic data

■ cdma2000-specific data—applies only to cdma2000. You can include the following types of cdma2000-specific data in your report:

■ Monte Carlo simulation data■ cdma2000 analysis layer statistic data

You can design and generate a report or you can generate a report using one of the predefined report designs provided with Mentum Planet. For details on predefined report designs, see “Predefined report designs” on page 228.When you design a report, you define the types of data to include, and then choose the specific items within each type to include. The following sections provide details about the types of W-CDMA-specific data available for reports.

W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data The Monte Carlo simulation data available for reports is divided into four categories:

■ Carrier-sector—the types of power received by the carriers and sectors listed in the report, for example, total power, in-cell

226

Generating W-CDMA ReportsCDMA User Guide

power, CPICH power, traffic channel powers, and other channel powers

■ Carrier-sector-mobile—data on a carrier-sector basis about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handover state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits

■ System-mobile—system-level data about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handover state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits

■ Throughput—primary and secondary downlink and primary uplink throughput data for sectors, carriers, and subscriber types

The data for each category is based on the average of the operating points generated during the Monte Carlo simulation. For overview information on operating points, see “Generating operating points and subscriber information” on page 149. For details on each operating point, see “Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format” on page 523.

Using more than one type of data in a reportYou can create a report using one or more types of data. If you choose to use more than one type, you may need to specify how you want the information to be related by choosing a key column for both the parent and the child table. In general, this is handled automatically for reports with similar data, but for some combinations, you will need to specify the relationship. For a row in the child table to reference a row in the parent table, the chosen key columns for both tables must contain matching data values. If they do not, the rows are omitted from the resulting report. For example, if you add carrier-sector-mobile data to carrier-sector data, and you choose Site Id as the key column for both tables, then the resulting table contains a row for each Site Id that exists in both tables.

W-CDMA analysis layer dataAfter you generate W-CDMA analysis layers, you can calculate statistics for an analysis layer using information from a clutter grid file, a traffic map, or a user-defined filter.

227


The statistics generated include the analysis area and a percentage value, and any additional columns created by the applied traffic map, clutter, or filter. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 248.

Using report data to help in W-CDMA network analysisYou can use the data in a report to help you interpret and adjust the factors influencing coverage and performance in your W-CDMA network. In a typical W-CDMA analysis, you would generate a report using data from an initial Monte Carlo simulation for additional information about the analysis. If you determine that the simulation requires more runs, you can append more runs to the simulation and generate another report to view the results.

Predefined report designs A set of predefined report designs is provided for you to use to generate reports quickly and easily. Each predefined report design comprises two files:

■ a .wrp file, which identifies the columns included in the report. These files are stored in the Reports\WCDMA folder in your project.

■ an Excel template file, which formats the information. These files are stored in the Reports\exceltemplates folder in your project.

The Excel files contain macros that create appropriate column names and provide other functions, for example, the carrier-sector report contains a macro that converts values from mW to dBm for easier interpretation and comparison. You can view the raw data for any report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the Excel report.The following sections describe the predefined report designs.

System-mobile-simple reportThis report provides a row for users served for each subscriber type and environment combination. Columns are color coded. Dark blue indicates general information, such as site and sector ID. Purple indicates served users. Light blue indicates users that are not served. Figure 11.1 shows a portion of an example system-mobile-simple report.

228


Figure 11.1 Example system-mobile-simple report

Carrier-sector-mobile reportThis report shows users served on a per-sector basis. This report uses the same color scheme as the system-mobile-simple report.

Carrier-sectorThis report provides a summary of the powers per sector for each site/sector/subscriber type/environment combination.

System-mobileThis report provides a pivot table in Excel that enables you to click and drag items to create the set of columns that you want to view. It also provides pie charts for the available statistics.

ThroughputThis report provides a row for throughput for each site/sector/subscriber type/environment combination.

Columns in predefined reportsTable 11.1 describes the columns available for predefined reports and identifies the reports in which the column appears.

229


Table 11.1 Columns in predefined reports

Column name Description

Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

Site Id Name of the site.

Sector Id Name of the sector.

Site Sector Id Combined site and sector name.

Carrier Name Automatically assigned carrier name.

Channel Name User-defined carrier name.

Subscriber Type Name of the subscriber type.

Service Name of the service.

Quality Name of the quality.

Environment Name of the environment.

Primary Downlink Throughput

Downlink throughput as primary.

Secondary Downlink Throughput

Downlink throughput as secondary (handover).

Primary Uplink Throughput

Uplink throughput as primary.

Secondary Uplink Throughput

Uplink throughput as secondary (handover).

Percentage of Maximum Downlink Pooled Throughput

Downlink throughput as a percentage of the maximum downlink pooled throughput.

Average Achieved Rate for Downlink Primary Subscribers

Average achieved rate for Downlink Primary Subscribers.

230


Average Achieved Rate for Downlink Secondary Subscribers

Average achieved rate for Downlink Secondary Subscribers.

Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Primary Subscribers

Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Primary Subscribers.

Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Secondary Subscribers

Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Secondary Subscribers.

Throughput on HSDPA Throughput achieved on HSDPA.

Average Achieved Forward Rate for HSDPA Subscribers

Average Achieved Forward Rate for HSDPA subscribers.

Primary HS-DSCH Downlink Throughput

HS-DSCH Downlink throughput as primary.

Primary Rel 99 Downlink Throughput

Rel 99 Downlink throughput as primary.

Secondary Rel 99 Downlink Throughput

Rel 99 Downlink throughput as secondary.

Primary A-DCH Uplink Throughput

Uplink throughput on A-DCH channels as primary.

Secondary A-DCH Uplink throughput

Uplink throughput on A-DCH channels as secondary.

Primary Rel 99 Uplink Throughput

Rel 99 Uplink throughput as primary.

Secondary Rel 99 Uplink Throughput

Rel 99 Uplink throughput as secondary.

HSDPA Scheduler Gain Scheduler Gain.

Table 11.1 Columns in predefined reports (continued)


Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

231


Downlink Captured Subscriber Throughput

The downlink captured subscriber throughput is calculated by multiplying the number of served subscribers by the service data rate and by the packet call activity factor.

Not Served Number of subscribers not served for any reason.

Dropped Number of subscribers not served for any reason.

Not in Handover Number of subscribers not in handover.

Softer Handover Number of subscribers in softer handover.

Soft Handover Number of subscribers in soft handover.

Softer Soft Handover Number of subscribers in softer-soft handover.

Soft Softer Handover Number of subscribers in soft-softer handover.

Soft Soft Handover Number of subscribers in soft-soft handover.

Softer Softer Handover Number of subscribers in softer-softer handover.

4 Way Handover Number of subscribers in four-server handover.

5 Way Handover Number of subscribers in five-server handover.

6 Way Handover Number of subscribers in six-server handover.

7 Way Handover Number of subscribers in seven-server handover.

Served Total number of subscribers who have been served.

Served on HSDPA Number of subscribers served on a HSDPA carrier.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

232


Non-negotiated The number of users served where the Uplink is served at the highest available bearer rate, and Downlink is negotiated to a lower rate from the highest available.

Downlink Negotiated The number of users served where the Downlink path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Uplink is at the highest available bearer rate.

Uplink Negotiated The number of users served where the Uplink path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Downlink is at the highest available bearer rate.

Negotiated The number of users served where both the Uplink and Downlink paths have been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate.

Served by Repeater Total number of subscribers who have been served by repeaters on the sector as primary.

Handover with Repeater

Number of subscribers in handover where a repeater on this sector is the handover server.

Mobile PA Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the downlink.

Uplink Noise Rise Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors.A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

233


DownlinkChannel Element Limit

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the downlink.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

Uplink Channel Element Limit

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the Uplink.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

Rel 99 User Limit Number of Rel 99 subscribers not served due to the maximum Rel 99 subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink.

HSDPA User Limit Number of HSDPA subscribers not served due to the maximum HSDPA subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink.

Cell Radius Limit Number of subscribers on the downlink not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius.

Speed Limit Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell.

Throughput Limit Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.

Primary Dropped Due to Rel 99 Code

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes being available for Rel 99 traffic on the downlink.

Primary Dropped Due to PA

Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient PA power at the best server.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

234


Primary Dropped Due to CPICH

Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient CPICH Ec/Io from the best server.

Primary Dropped Due to DPCH

Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient voice power.

Primary Dropped Due To HS-SCCH

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power being available for the HS-SCCH channel in primary.

Handover Dropped Due to Downlink CE

Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements.

Handover Dropped Due to Uplink CE

Number of handover connections refused during Uplink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements.

Handover Dropped Due to Code

Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient channel codes.

Handover Dropped Due to PA

Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient PA power.

Handover Dropped Due to DPCH

Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient voice power.

Used Uplink Channel Elements

Number of Uplink channel elements used.

Required Uplink Channel Elements

Number of Uplinkchannel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.

Used Downlink Channel Elements

Number of Downlink channel elements used.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

235


Required Downlink Channel Elements

Number of Downlink channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.

Total Downlink PA Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or CPICH to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscriber’s target.

Downlink Rel 99 Code Limit

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes being available for Rel 99 on the downlink.

CPICH Power Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient CPICH power on the downlink. The CPICH power is caused by the maximum CPICH power/fixed CPICH power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

DPCH Power Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power on the downlink to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target.

HS-SCCH Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power being available for the HS-SCCH channel.

Prev Total Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW

Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

236


Current Total Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW

Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.

Total Rel99 InCell Power_mW

Total power received from subscribers on the final iteration.

CPICH Power_mW Output power of the CPICH channel.

Sync Power_mW Output power of the sync channel.

Paging Power_mW Output power of the paging channel.

HS-DSCH Activity Factor (%)

The activity factor for the HS-DSCH channel.

HS-DSCH Power_mW For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel.

HS-SCCH Power_mW For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the power of the High Speed Shared Control Channel.

HSUPA Control Power_mW

For HSPA and Rel99 & HSPA sectors, the combined power required for the E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel), E-RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel), and the E-HICH (E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel).

Current Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW


Rel 99 In Cell Power_mW

Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation.

Attenuated Power_mW In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

237


Total DPCH Power per Run_mW

Total power of all best server voice channels.This value includes the voice activity factor.

Average DPCH Power per Subscriber_mW

Average power of a single voice channel.This value does not include the voice activity factor.

Max DPCH Power per Channel_mW

Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor.

Min DPCH Power per Channel_mW

Minimum power of the best server voice channel.This value does not include the voice activity factor.

DPCH Noise Rise Noise rise on the uplink.

Total Noise Rise Total noise rise on the uplink.

Rx Eb_No Eb/No on the uplink.

DPCH Load Sector load on the downlink.

DPCH Load_Percentage

Sector load on the downlink as a percentage.

Load_Percentage Uplink load given as a percentage.

Total Load Total sector load.

Total Load_Percentage Total sector load as a percentage.

Frequency Re-use Efficiency

Frequency re-use efficiency given as a percentage, equal to:(in cell interference) / (total interference)*100



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

238


Workflow for generating W-CDMA reportsStep 1 Generate a Monte Carlo simulation. See “Chapter 8: Generating

Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

Step 2 If you want to include W-CDMA analysis layer statistics in a report, do the following:■ Generate W-CDMA analysis layers. See

“Understanding W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 157.

■ Generate statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers and add them to the Report Designer. See “Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 248.

Step 3 Optionally, design a report. See “Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design” on page 240 or “Designing a W-CDMA report” on page 241.

Other Cell Interference Factor

Other-cell interference factor (OCIF) given in a linear form, equal to:(other cell interference) / (own cell interference)

F-Factor F-factor given as a linear term, equal to:(own cell interference) / (total interference)

Mean Rel 99 Required Receive Power

Mean value of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the uplink.

Standard Dev Rel 99 Required Receive Power

Standard deviation of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the uplink.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

239


Step 4 Generate a report using a predefined report design or using the report design that you created. See “Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design” on page 240 or “Generating a W-CDMA report” on page 247.

Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report designUsing predefined reports removes the need for you to design a report before generating it. The predefined report designs use templates that are in Excel format. When you create a new project, the predefined report designs are automatically copied into the Reports folder for the project. If you are using an existing project and want to use the predefined report designs, you will need to copy all of the folders in the Mentum Planet 4\global\Reports folder to the Reports folder in your project.Each report contains macros that format the data. You can view the raw data used to create any predefined report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the report.

Modifying a predefined report designIf you want to modify a predefined report design, you can modify the Excel template without making changes to the report design (the .wrp file), but if you modify the report design, you need to modify the Excel template (i.e., if you remove a column by clearing the check box on the Design tab of the Report Designer, you need to delete it from the Excel template as well). You should only modify the Excel template if you are familiar with Excel. To modify the report design, you need to load it into the Report Designer and modify it. See “To modify an existing W-CDMA report design” on page 247.

To generate a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports.

2 In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report design that you want to generate and click OK.

For details on the predefined reports that are available, see “Predefined report designs” on page 228.

240


3 From the Select Output Format list, choose Excel and click OK.

The report is generated and opens in Excel.

Designing a W-CDMA report The Report Designer enables you to create an overall design for a report before you generate it. You can customize the data that in the report and define the output format of the report.After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the operating points are automatically available in the Report Designer. If you want to use layer statistics in a report, you must manually add the data to the Report Designer. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 248.The Report Designer enables you to preview the report before you save it or generate it. Previewing a report enables you to customize the data or output settings until you are satisfied with the result. Once you are satisfied with the design, you can save it until you want to generate the report. Report designs are stored in the Reports folder of your project. You can also load and modify report designs in the Report Designer even after you have generated reports. This option is useful, for example, if you want to add layer statistics data to an existing report that only contains Monte Carlo operating points.

To design a W-CDMA report1 Choose Data ➤ Design Report.

The Report Designer opens.

You can also generate reports for a group of sectors or for a flag condition by doing the following:

• To generate reports for a group of sectors, right-click a group in the Sites category in the Project Explorer and choose Generate Reports.

• To generate reports for sectors that have been assigned a flag condition, enable the flag condition in the Project Explorer, right-click the Flags node, and choose Generate Reports.

In either case, you must choose the analysis to use in the Select Data dialog box.

241


2 On the Data tab, in the Available Data section, expand one of the following nodes and choose the type of W-CDMA data to add to the report:■ Cell Equipment—contains data about sector settings. For more

information, see Chapter 5, “Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites” in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide, “Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites” on page 83, and “Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites” on page 327. Additional information can be found in “Appendix E: Import and Export Tables” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Antenna—contains data about the antenna patterns in the project. For more information, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Subscribers—contains data about the subscriber information in the Subscriber Manager. For information on the columns available in this report, see the Subscriber_Equipment_Types worksheet and the Subscriber worksheet in “Appendix E: Import and Export Tables” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ <analysis name>—contains the following categories of data:■ Carrier-sector—contains mean values from per-sector

operating points. For more information, see “W-CDMA

242


Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 226 and “Per-sector operating points” on page 526.

■ Carrier-sector-mobile—contains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see “W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 226 and “Per-subscriber type operating points” on page 527.

■ System-mobile—contains mean values from sub-category operating points. For more information, see “W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 226 and “Sub-category operating points” on page 524.

■ Throughput—contains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see “W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 226 and “Per-subscriber type operating points” on page 527.

■ Layer Statistics—contains statistics from a W-CDMA analysis layer. Layer statistics will only appear in the Available Data section if you have calculated them and added them to the report design. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers” on page 248.

3 Type a description for the data in the Edit Description for the Data section, and click the right arrow.

The data is added to the Selected Data section.

4 To add more data to the report, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.5 If the Relation Selector dialog box is displayed, do the following:

■ To define the data from a parent table, do the following:■ From the Select Parent Table list, choose the table that

contains the rows to be referenced by the child table.■ From the Select Key Column From Parent Table list,

choose the column in the parent table that contains the

243


data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables.

■ To define the data from a child table, do both of the following:■ From the Select Child Table list, choose the table that

contains the rows that you want to be referenced by the parent table.

■ From the Select Key Column From Child Table list, choose the column in the child table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables.

■ Click OK to close the Relation Selector dialog box.6 To display a preview of the report, click Preview.

The report design is displayed in a Web browser.

To define the data columns for a W-CDMA report1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Design tab.

2 To change the name of a column, click in the Column Label box and type a name.

244


3 To include or exclude columns from the report, do any of the following:■ To exclude a single column, clear the check box in the Show

column.■ To exclude all columns, click Clear All.■ To include all columns, click Show All.

4 To change the order of the columns, choose one or more columns and click the up arrow or down arrow.

To choose a column, click the column number.

5 To display a preview of the report, click Preview.


To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Output tab.

245


2 In the Select Export Destination section, choose one of the following formats from the Format list:■ Excel—the report is opened in Microsoft Excel. Using Microsoft

Excel, you can save the report in .xls format. To use this option, you must have Microsoft Excel installed.

■ HTML—the report is saved in HTML (.htm) format. If you choose this option, you can choose, from the Output list, whether to save the report to a file or open it in a Web browser.

■ MapInfo—the report is saved in a MapInfo (.tab) file3 In the Export Settings section, define the settings that are specific to the

type of format that you chose.■ If you chose Excel in Step 2, you can define the sheet name (the

name of the first tab in the Excel file), template file name, and macros to use. Typically, you would use these fields if you have designed a custom Excel template and want to use it for your report data. If you are modifying a predefined report design, you can choose the predefined Excel template that corresponds to the data that you are including in the report (i.e., if you are including carrier-sector data in your report, you should choose the carrier-sector Excel template).

■ If you chose HTML in Step 2, you can define HTML-specific export settings, including the file to be used for the report header and footer. If you want to use the header and footer provided with Mentum Planet, do the following:

■ Click Browse next to the Header Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Header.htm file in your project folder and click Open.

■ Click Browse next to the Footer Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Footer.htm file in your project folder and click Open.

■ If you chose MapInfo in Step 2, you can define MapInfo-specific settings. No template files are provided with Mentum Planet for this option.

For more information on the settings in this section, press the F1 key. If you do not define custom settings, the default settings will be used.

4 To define output settings for another format, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.

246




To save the W-CDMA report design 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Save As.2 In the Save Report dialog box, type a name for the report in the Report

Name box.3 From the Report Category list, choose W-CDMA, and click OK.

The report design will be saved in the Reports\WCDMA folder of your project. Report designs are saved with the file extension of .wrp.

To modify an existing W-CDMA report design1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Load.2 In the Open Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to open,

and click OK.3 In the Report Designer, modify the settings of the report design.

For more information on these settings, see “To design a W-CDMA report” on page 241.

To delete a W-CDMA report design 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Remove.2 In the Remove Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to

delete, and click Remove.

Generating a W-CDMA report After you have designed and saved a report design in the W-CDMA category, you can use the Generate Report dialog box to generate multiple reports simultaneously.

247


To generate a W-CDMA report1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports.

2 In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to generate.

3 From the Select Output Format list, choose the format for the report output.

The output settings for each format are defined on the Output tab of the Report Designer and saved in the report design that you are generating (see “To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report” on page 245). You can output the report in any of the three formats.

4 Click OK.

The report is generated and displayed or saved in the output format that you chose.

Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers

You can calculate statistics on the individual W-CDMA analysis layers that you have generated. You can calculate statistics based on the entire numeric grid (.grd) file, an area grid, or a selection in the Map window. You can further customize the statistics based on a clutter grid file, traffic map, or a user-defined filter.





248


After you calculate statistics, you can add them to a new or existing report design.

To calculate W-CDMA layer statistics1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, choose the

analysis layers that you want to add to the report, right-click one of the analysis layers and choose Statistics.

The Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box opens.

2 To manually add additional analysis layers to the list, click Add Layer, navigate to the file that you want to add, and click Open.

3 In the tree view, choose Analysis Settings.


When you calculate layer statistics, they are automatically displayed in Microsoft Excel. In order to use the Layer Statistics Analysis tool, you

must have Microsoft Excel installed.

249


4 On the Analysis Settings panel, choose one of the following from the Analysis Area list:■ Current Window—statistics are generated based on the area

displayed in the Map window■ Entire Layer—statistics are generated based on the area defined

in the W-CDMA analysis layer(s) used■ Selected Rectangle—statistics are generated for the area that is

enclosed by the selected rectangle in the Map window. You can use the MapInfo rectangle tool to create a rectangle. For more information, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide.

■ Area—statistics are generated based on an area grid. For more information, see “Creating area grids” in Chapter 14, “Working With Grids”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 To remove bins with null values from the analysis layer calculations, enable the Exclude Null Values check box.

6 To generate additional statistics, broken down by a classification, enable the Use Classified Grid check box, click Browse to navigate to the file, choose the file and click OK.

The default classified grid file is the clutter grid file defined for the project.

Any classified grid can be used to perform different kinds of statistical analysis. For example, to produce a statistical breakdown for each sector, use a best server layer as the classification grid. This breaks the statistics down by best server area.

7 To generate traffic statistics, enable the Use Traffic Map check box and choose a traffic map from the Traffic Map list.

8 To filter the analysis area based on a grid file, enable the Apply Area Filter check box.

The area filter is applied globally to all layers.

9 If you want to define individual area filters for each layer, enable the Set Area Filter By Layer check box.

250


10 If you are applying area filters globally to all layers, do the following:■ To define the area raster, click Browse, navigate to the grid file,

and click OK.■ To define the condition for the filter, type an expression in the

Condition box. For example, choosing the SignalStrength.grd file and defining the expression would only consider pixels within the analysis area that have a signal strength greater than 100.

For more information on creating expressions, press the F1 key.

11 To discard statistical results that only contain zero values, enable the Discard Result That Only Contains Zero Statistics check box.

With this check box enabled, records where all columns contain zero values will be removed from the statistical report.

12 From the Export Format list, choose one of the following formats:■ Excel—statistics will be displayed in Microsoft Excel when they

are generated.■ Html—statistics are generated in an HTML (.htm) file and

stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\Html folder in the project. There will be one .htm file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically.

■ MapInfo Table—statistics are generated in MapInfo (.tab) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder. There will be one .tab file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. To display the files, see “To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table format” on page 253.

13 If the Layers node in the tree view does not contain layers, click Add Layer, choose the numeric grid (.grd) file that you want to add, and click Open.

14 In the tree view, expand Layers and choose the analysis layer for which you want to obtain statistics.

The Layers panel opens to display layer information about the data type, resolution, and the area.

v 100>

251


15 If you want to define classification settings for the analysis layer, define any of the available settings in the Classifications Settings section.

The settings that are available in this section are dependent on the data type of the analysis layer (classified or numeric). Do any of the following:

■ In the Classifications box, choose the classification for the analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified.

■ To split the classification by site and sector names, enable the Split Classification to Get Site and Sector Names check box. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified.

■ To define the data ranges for which to calculate statistics, type the threshold values in the Threshold Definition box, separated by semi-colons. The default thresholds are set by equally dividing the range of Zmin and Zmax values contained in the chosen analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is numeric.

■ In the Classification Name box, type a name for the classification in this box. This option is available for both the classified and numeric data types.

252


16 If you want to define area filters for individual layers and enabled the Set Area Filter By Layer check box on the Analysis Settings panel, click the Area Filters button.

Area filter settings are saved in LayerStatistics.set file located in the Settings/Layer Statistics folder within the project folder.

17 In the Area Filters dialog box, do the following:■ Click the Add Row button.■ Click the Browse (...) button next to the Area Raster box,

navigate to where the raster file is saved, and click Open.■ Click in the Condition box and define a filter condition for the

layer. Press the F1 key for more information on creating conditions.

18 Repeat the previous step until you have defined all the required filters and click OK.

19 Click Calculate Statistics.

The settings in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box are saved automatically for use the next time you calculate layer statistics.

To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table formatIf you saved your statistics in MapInfo (.tab) format, you can view them in a Map window.

1 Choose File ➤ Open Table.2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo

folder of your project and choose the MapInfo (.tab) file that you want to display.


The layer statistics table opens in a new Browser window.

You can also access the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box by choosing Analysis ➤ Layer Statistics.

253


To add W-CDMA layer statistics to a report design

1 After the statistics have been calculated, in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box, click Design Report.

The Report Designer opens, with the layers in the Available Data section.

2 Design the report using the instructions provided in “Designing a W-CDMA report” on page 241.

3 Generate the report using the instructions provided in “Generating a W-CDMA report” on page 247.

254

Section 2: cdma2000

Section 2cdma2000This section explains how to use the cdma2000 technology provided with

Mentum Planet.

For information about W-CDMA, see “Section 1: W-CDMA” on page 11.

Chapter 12: Overview of cdma2000

12.
Overview of cdma2000
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding cdma2000

technology■ cdma2000 features■ Workflow for cdma2000

network planning■ Suggested reading

This chapter provides an overview of cdma2000 and

presents a typical workflow for cdma2000 planning.

257


Understanding cdma2000 technologyDue to the complex nature of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks, you should be familiar with CDMA technology and basic network design principles before you start working with Mentum Planet and the cdma2000 technology.cdma2000 networks support a range of different services (e.g., speech, web browsing, email, and video) and service levels. As a result, planning a cdma2000 network is more complex than designing other second-generation voice-centric communication systems. All signals within a CDMA network share the same bandwidth because each signal is spread across the entire 1.25 MHz channel. Signals are distinguished from each other by a unique channelization code (a Walsh code) that can be detected only by the equipment to which a specific signal is directed.Although a coded signal is broadcast to all users on the forward link, the users to whom the signal is not directed receive the undesired signals (or a portion thereof) as interference. This interference includes energy from non-orthogonal signals broadcast from the same serving site and signals directed at users served by another site.Interference levels within CDMA networks fluctuate according to the number and location of users. The amount of internal and external interference across the network determines network capacity (i.e., the number of calls or sessions that the network can support is inversely proportional to the amount of interference).On the reverse link, users communicating with a site cause in-cell interference. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the downlink power. Other users who are in second, or greater levels of handoff, will likely have their equipment power controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest pilot signal. Interference is also caused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites (i.e., out-of-cell interference). In addition to in- and out-of-cell interference on the reverse link, front end noise and foreign noise are present. Mentum Planet enables you to simulate, assess, and balance the power and interference levels associated with cdma2000 networks in your effort to provide superior coverage, capacity, and quality of service.

258

Overview of cdma2000CDMA User Guide

cdma2000 featuresMentum Planet enables you to plan and assess the coverage and performance of your multi-layer (2G and 3G) and multi-technology networks using features described in the following sections.

Multi-technology planning featuresMentum Planet enables you to define a cdma2000 configuration simultaneously with TDMA/FDMA configurations.The Subscriber Manager enables you to effectively plan your network with a diverse mix of subscribers and usage types. You can group the service, bearer, quality, and session requirements of each subscriber into subscriber types, which are used when you analyze the network.

cdma2000 analyses

You can generate analyses using one of two methods:■ Monte Carlo■ rapid planning

Monte CarloThe Monte Carlo option enables you to perform a detailed analysis of the network using Monte Carlo simulation techniques to analyze a set of randomly generated points (i.e., subscribers) distributed according to traffic maps. For more information, see “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

Rapid planningThe rapid planning option provides a faster alternative for generating analysis layers based on user-defined levels of network loading on the forward and reverse links. The simulation runs only once, and does not generate the detailed operating points that the Monte Carlo simulation generates. This option is useful when you want a quick overview of your network. You can then use the Monte Carlo option for a more detailed view. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377.

cdma2000 analysis layers

Analysis layers are generated for both the Monte Carlo and rapid planning options. Analysis layers enable you to compare and query layers of

259


information for details on interference, coverage, and handoff. For example, the generated analysis layers can help you to determine:

■ pilot coverage ■ reverse link interference■ forward link interference■ throughput■ handoff states and constraints■ path balance between the forward link and the reverse link

You can generate analysis layers for the entire network or for a particular geographic region within the network. For more information, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

cdma2000 reports

The Report Designer enables you to view data from antenna patterns, sector settings, Monte Carlo simulations, and cdma2000 analysis layers in a report. You can output reports to a Microsoft® Excel (.xls) file, MapInfo (.tab) file, or HTML (.htm) file. You can also calculate statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers and obtain per-pixel information about cdma2000 analyses. For more information, see “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

PN offset planningThe PN Offset Planning tool enables you to efficiently allocate PN offset codes to sectors in your network. It also enables you to manage PN offset plans and to apply a plan to a group of sites.For more information, see “Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans” on page 463.

Workflow for cdma2000 network planningThe workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.Before you begin this workflow, you should review the list of Mentum Planet activities listed in Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. You should also read the “Understanding...” sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.

260

Overview of cdma2000CDMA User Guide

Step 1 Create a project. See “Chapter 13: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000” on page 263.

Step 2 Define your cdma2000 network configuration as follows:

■ Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you plan to analyze. For general procedures for working with traffic maps, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Define subscribers using the Subscriber Manager. See “Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers” on page 289.

Step 3 Optionally, edit the propagation models supplied with Mentum Planet. See Chapter 4, “Working with Propagation Models”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 4 Configure and place sites. See “Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites” on page 327.

Step 5 Optionally, analyze survey data or tune propagation models. See Chapter 4, “Working with Propagation Models”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 6 Optionally, if you have purchased Capesso, optimize your sites using the workflow described in the Capesso online Help.

Step 7 Generate a rapid planning or Monte Carlo analysis and view results. See:■ “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning

Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377■ “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses

for cdma2000” on page 397■ “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on

page 481

Step 8 Optionally, plan PN offsets. See “Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans” on page 463.

Step 9 Optionally, create coverage maps and FCC Service Area Boundary reports, see Chapter 15, “Generating Reports”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

261


Suggested readingHolma H., A. Toskala. HSDPA/HSUPA for UMTS: High Speed Radio Access for Mobile Communications, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Laiho, J. , A.Wacker, T. Novosad. Radio Network Planning and Optimization for UMTS, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Nawrocki, Maciej J., Mischa Dohler, A. Hamid Aghvami, Understanding UMTS Radio Network Modelling, Planning and Automated Optimization, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006.Kim, Kyoung Il. Handbook of CDMA System Design, Engineering, and Optimization, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1999.Lee, Jhong Sam & Leonard E. Miller. CDMA Systems Engineering Handbook. Artech House Publishers, 1998.Yang, Samuel C. CDMA RF System Engineering. Artech House Publishers, 1998.

262

Chapter 13: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000

13.
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding Mobile

Technology projects■ Workflow for creating a Mobile

Technology project■ Gathering project information■ Creating a project for

cdma2000■ Opening a project■ Converting cdma2000

projects from previous versions

■ Creating a default settings file for cdma2000

This chapter explains how to create a Mobile

Technology project.

Once you have created a project, you can define

network settings and carrier settings, as described in

the following chapters.

263


Understanding Mobile Technology projects In Mentum Planet, a project defines which elevation, clutter, and site file to use for analyses. You need to create a Mobile Technology project before you can define network and carrier settings, place sites, or generate analysis layers. For detailed information on projects, see the Mentum Planet User Guide.When you create a mobile technology project, you can design a network that supports a variety of technologies, including W-CDMA, cdma2000, and TDMA/FDMA.Once you have created a Mobile Technology project, you must specify that you want to use cdma2000 technology and define cdma2000 network, subscriber, and sector settings.

Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology projectStep 1 Gather technical information to support the project. See

“Gathering project information”.

Step 2 Create the Mobile Technology project. See “Creating a project for cdma2000” on page 264.

Gathering project informationTo create a Mobile Technology project, you must have a digital elevation model (DEM) file and, optionally, a clutter file. The results of network analyses will be more accurate and complete if you start with as much information as possible. It is recommended that you also have the following:

■ technical information about sites and sectors, such as location, power, azimuth, tilt, and twist

■ manufacturer’s electronic antenna patterns

Creating a project for cdma2000The Project Wizard leads you through the process of creating a project and, by default, is automatically displayed upon startup of Mentum Planet.If you want Mentum Planet to automatically open the last project, instead of the Project Wizard, in the Startup Options section of the User Preferences dialog box, choose the Open Most Recent Project option. See “Defining User Preferences” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

264

Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000CDMA User Guide

You can use remote project folders to store and access Mentum Planet project data. For example, you can use shared project folders for the following types of project files to conserve disk space on your local computer:

■ bin files■ signal (field) strength files■ prediction view files (CDMA technologies only)

By default, these files are saved in the local project folder. If you use shared project folders, the project files are stored in the shared folders, instead of the local project folder. The shared folders must have read/write access permissions for all Mentum Planet users accessing the shared folders.

You can choose to use a workspace to save your Map window settings, although this is not required. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To create a project for cdma2000 1 Start Mentum Planet.

By default, the Project Wizard opens when you start Mentum Planet. To use the wizard at any other time, choose File ➤ New Project.

2 Click Next on the first page of the Project Wizard.3 In the Mobile Technology dialog box, choose a cdma2000 default

settings file and click OK.

When you choose a default settings file, default network settings, including appropriate spectrum, are automatically applied to the settings in the Network Settings dialog box and cdma2000 is enabled on the Network Technologies panel. You can modify these settings after you create the project. The default settings are based on defined standards for the technology. These standards are available from various organizations. For CDMA technologies, this list includes 3GPP2 (http://

If you are using shared folders and do not enable the corresponding check box in the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab in the

Project Settings dialog box, the shared path is not stored in Data Manager when you check in the project. For any Data Manager users who perform a Get on the project, all data will be stored within their local project folder.

265



www.3gpp2.org), TIA/EIA (http://www.tiaonline.org) and ANSI (http:// www.ansi.org).

4 Follow the pages of the Project Wizard and supply the appropriate information to create your project.

5 Click Finish.

The Project Settings dialog box opens.

6 On the Data tab, type a project description in the Description box.7 In the Project File box, type a name for the project file or accept the

default.

By default, the folder name specified in the Wizard is used as the .dBp file name.

8 If you want to use a workspace, enable the Use a Workspace check box.

For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

9 If you want to update the workspace file automatically each time you close a project, enable the Workspace Autosave check box.

With both the “Use a Workspace” and “Workspace Autosave” check boxes enabled, the specified workspace will be automatically saved when you close a project. When you re-open the project, the project will be displayed exactly as it appeared when you last closed the project.

10 Click the Folders tab.11 If you want to change the default paths for bin, signal strength, prediction

view, or settings files, for any of the following boxes, click Browse, navigate to the shared folder, and click OK.■ Bin—<project>\bin folder, used for prediction files■ Signal Strength—<project>\SignalStrength folder, used for

field strength files■ Prediction View—<project>\PredictionView folder, used when

you generate a CDMA Monte Carlo simulation■ Global—Program Files\Mentum Planet 4\Global folder, used

for default settings files12 If you intend to use the Data Manager with shared project files, in the

Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab, and in the

266


http://www.tiaonline.org

http://www.ansi.org

http://www.ansi.org


Sharing section, enable the check boxes for each of the file types that reference shared project data.

For information about the other options on the Advanced Options tab, press the F1 key. For more detailed information, see “Defining output settings” in Chapter 8, “Generating Predictions”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

For information about the CDMA Analysis Optimization settings, see “Optimizing cdma2000 analyses” on page 416.

13 Click OK to save your Mentum Planet project.

The Project Explorer opens, docked at the left edge of the application window.

Opening a project You must close an open project before opening a new one. Only projects you have recently worked with appear in the Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box.

To open a project1 Choose File ➤ Open Project.

The Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box opens.

When you create a project, a set of default propagation model files is copied to the Model folder located within the project folder. Each

propagation model references a default Clutter Property Assignment (.cpa) file containing settings appropriate for the model. Ensure that the clutter properties defined for the propagation model are set for the clutter grid file you specify in the Project Settings dialog box.

For information on creating a default settings file, see “Creating a default settings file for cdma2000” on page 268.

To open the Project Settings dialog box once a project is open, choose Edit ➤ Project Settings, or click the Project Settings button on the

Analysis toolbar.

267


2 If you want to see the paths in the Most Recently Used Projects list, enable the Show Path check box.

3 Do one of the following:■ Choose a project in the Most Recently Used Projects list and

click Open.■ Click Browse, locate the project you want to open and then click

Open.

If you are opening a project that contains predictions from an earlier version of Mentum Planet, see “Opening and closing projects” in Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet,” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Converting cdma2000 projects from previous versionsIf you need to convert a project created using a previous version of Mentum Planet cdma2000 (AIIM) or Planet 2.8 or Planet DMS, contact customer service. See “Contacting Mentum” on page 3.

Creating a default settings file for cdma2000 When you create a project, you are prompted to choose a default settings (.gsm) file. Mentum Planet includes default settings files for common technologies. You can, however, create a custom default settings file that will automatically appear in the Mobile Technologies list.A default settings file for cdma2000 contains the settings that are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, such as information about which technologies are enabled in your network and how the spectrum is allocated. When you open a project, the values contained in the cdma2000 default settings file are loaded in the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box.

To create a default settings file for cdma20001 Define the network settings.

For more information, see “Chapter 14: Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration” on page 271.

268


2 Export the network settings to a network settings (.gns) file to the Mentum Planet 4\global\GSM\DefaultSets folder.

For more information on how to export a network settings file, see “Exporting and importing Mobile Technology network settings files” in Chapter 3, “Defining Network Technologies and Services”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

3 In the Mentum Mentum Planet 4\Global\GSM\DefaultSets folder, copy any one of the existing default project settings (.gsm) files and rename it.

You must retain the .gsm extension. This will become the new default settings file.

4 Open Notepad or any other ASCII text editor.5 Open the default settings file you created in Step 3 and edit the network

settings parameter to refer to the network settings file you created in Step 2.

For example:[Network Settings]

Default Settings File=myNetworkSettings.gns

Do not modify any other parameters in the file.

6 Save the default settings file.

The default settings file will be listed in the Mobile Technology dialog box when you create a project.

269


270

Chapter 14: Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration

14.
Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration

network configuration settings■ Workflow for defining a

cdma2000 network configuration

■ Defining network operators for cdma2000

■ Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000

■ Defining cdma2000 network settings

This chapter describes how to define a cdma2000

network configuration.

271


Understanding cdma2000 network configuration settingscdma2000 network configuration settings enable you to define spectrum and operators for your cdma2000 network. In addition, you can configure carriers and define other system-level settings. For each carrier, you can define priorities (preference weightings) and soft thresholds, which are used in conjunction with sector settings to allocate subscribers to carriers during network analyses. You can also define EV-DO settings, which are used for EV-DO analyses, if you have purchased an EV-DO license.If you want to model other technologies, you can enable them and define spectrum and other settings.If you chose a default cdma2000 settings file when you created the project, cdma2000 is automatically added to the Network Technologies panel in the Network Settings dialog box, and spectrum and carriers are allocated. In addition to cdma2000, you can add other technologies as required. For more information on adding other technologies, see Chapter 3, “Defining Network Technologies and Services”, and Chapter 4, “Defining Network Configuration”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.When you enable technologies, you can assign colors that apply to each technology. You can also assign colors to other network operators in the same or neighboring geographic areas. These colors enable you to graphically display how the spectrum is divided when you allocate portions of the spectrum to each technology. For more information, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.

Workflow for defining a cdma2000 network configurationStep 1 Define network operators in your network. See “Defining network

operators for cdma2000” on page 273.

Step 2 If required, allocate spectrum and assign carriers to cdma2000. See “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.

Step 3 Define general, correlation model, power control, and carrier settings for cdma2000. See “Defining cdma2000 network settings” on page 277.

272

Defining a cdma2000 Network ConfigurationCDMA User Guide

Defining network operators for cdma2000 Network operators are the companies that share the same or neighboring geographic area. One operator, the Home operator, is included by default. This operator represents the network of the company for which you work. On the Spectrum Allocation panel of the Network Settings dialog box, different colors are used to identify the technology type and the network operators. The home operator is not assigned a color, but uses the color that has been assigned for the technology. Additional operators are assigned a unique color to visually indicate the division of the available spectrum.For more information, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.

To define network operators for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Network Settings.

The Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box opens, with the Network Technologies panel selected by default. One or more technologies will be enabled, depending on the default settings file you chose when you created the project.

2 If you want to change the color for a technology, in the Technologies table, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.

273


3 To add a network operator, click Add below the Network Operators table.

4 If you want to rename the operator, click in the Name column for the operator and type a new name.

5 If you want to change the color for an operator that you have added, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.

You cannot assign a color to the Home operator. The color assigned for the technology is used for the Home operator.


dialog box.

■ Choose another item in the tree view.

Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 Spectrum allocation involves assigning bands to technologies and network operators, and defining the spectrum range and carriers for each band. This section describes how to allocate the spectrum and define carriers for cdma2000.If you chose a default cdma2000 settings file when you created the project, spectrum is automatically allocated and carriers are assigned, but you can modify the spectrum and add new bands as required.For more information on allocating spectrum and defining carriers for other technologies, see “Chapter 4: Defining Network Configuration” in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

Spectrum allocation for cdma2000

cdma2000 technology can occupy more than one band. This type of configuration is necessary when the technology occupies spectrum in separate

You can also access the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box by clicking the Network Settings button on the Mobile Technology

toolbar.

274


bands or blocks of spectrum within one band, but not contiguous carrier numbers. You can define as many as 15 bands.

If the band is assigned to the Home operator, you must define■ the technology for the band■ the start and end downlink frequencies, which must be within the

range allowed for cdma2000 within your area■ the starting carrier number, which corresponds to the first carrier

at the start of the allocated bandIf a band is assigned to another network operator (i.e., a competitor), you can only assign the start and end downlink frequencies, not the technology or the carriers.

cdma2000 carriers Carriers are the frequencies that carry signals for each band. When you add a technology band, a new set of carriers is added automatically and spaced along the band.You assign carriers when you define cdma2000 sectors for your project. For more information, see “Defining cdma2000 sector settings” on page 341.

If you have more than one band defined for cdma2000, and you want to generate predictions that include carriers from two different bands, you

need to ensure that your sectors are configured correctly. For more information, see “Considerations for multi-band networks” on page 328.

When you assign carriers to technologies across multiple bands, you must ensure that the carrier numbers are unique to each technology;

you cannot allocate the same number for a technology twice. For example, you can have carrier number 1 in cdma2000 and carrier number 1 in GSM, but you can only have carrier number 1 in cdma2000 once.

275


To create a new cdma2000 technology band 1 In the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, choose

Spectrum Allocation in the tree view.

2 On the Spectrum Allocation panel, click Add.

A new band is added to the list.

3 If you want to allocate spectrum to another network operator, choose the operator from the list in the Operator column.

The operators in the list are the ones that you defined on the Network Technologies panel (see “Defining network operators for cdma2000” on page 273). The default operator is the Home operator. If you allocate spectrum to an operator other than the Home operator, you can view the spectrum assigned to the operator, but not the carriers or technologies. This enables you to visually model the ranges of spectrum that belong to your competitors or other adjacent operators.

4 In the Band Name column, type a name for the band, or accept the default.

5 In the Downlink Center Frequency column, type a value in the Start and End boxes to indicate the lower and upper frequencies for the band.

6 In the Carrier Start column, type the starting carrier number for the band, or accept the default.

The Carrier End column updates automatically based on the carrier spacing defined for cdma2000.

276


7 In the Technology Type column, choose cdma2000 from the list.8 To add another band, click Add, and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.9 Click Refresh Carriers.

The carriers required for each technology band are automatically added to the Carriers list on the Carrier tab of the cdma2000 panel of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.



Defining cdma2000 network settingsAfter you have allocated spectrum and defined carriers for your network, you can define the cdma2000 network settings. These settings are described in the following sections.

General settings for cdma2000The general settings enable you to view the spreading chip rate of the system, and to define

■ the pilot pollution margin, which is used to determine pilot polluters when generating analyses. Servers outside of this range are not considered polluters.

■ interference settings for other systems. These values are used to account for interference that is not specifically modeled in Mentum Planet.

You can also choose curves for pilot factor mapping and usage factor mapping. The pilot factor mapping and usage factor mapping are combined in

The frequency values entered in the Start and End boxes in the Downlink Center Frequency column are the center frequencies of the

first and last carriers in the list you are allocating. The Spectrum graph showsthe actual spectrum occupied by all these carriers. Therefore, the start frequency displayed in the graph is half the carrier bandwidth lower than the center frequency defined for the first carrier, and the end frequency is half the carrier bandwidth higher than the center frequency defined for the last carrier in the table.

277


the Pilot - Pollution Index layer. The Pilot - Pollution Index layer shows the proportion of traffic likely to be affected by pilot pollution, providing a lesser weighting to areas where pilot pollution may exist but the affected traffic is low. The curves are used as follows:

■ Pilot Factor Mapping—This curve maps pilot factors to pilot ratios. The pilot factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1. Typically, if the pilot ratio exceeds 7 dB, establishing a pilot is unlikely. If it is less than 7 dB, establishing a pilot is more likely. The pilot factor is high (close to one) if establishing a pilot in a bin is unlikely, and low (close to zero) if establishing a pilot is likely.

■ Usage Factor Mapping—This curve maps usage factors to user densities. The usage factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1 that is determined for each bin in the analysis area. The usage factor is high (close to one) in bins where the need to establish a pilot is high, and low (close to zero) in bins where the need to establish a pilot is low.

You can edit the usage and pilot curves to modify the relationship between the X- and Y-axes. This relationship affects the final calculated Pilot Pollution Index values. Adjusting the usage and pilot curves enables you to model possible changes to your network or isolate any factors causing pilot pollution. For example, if you move the usage curve to the right, higher user density/average user density ratio values must be met before the bins are considered to be areas where the need for pilot coverage is high.

Correlation model settings for cdma2000 The correlation model settings enable you to define settings for modeling fading. You can define settings for the following two types of correlation models for slow fading of signals:

■ Angular—uses a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. The correlation factor is based on the angular separation of the two sectors at the mobile. The correlation factors are used in the calculation of

The X-axis of the usage factor curve is in milli-Erlangs per km2. If you have assigned a traffic map with values in subscribers per km2 to any

subscriber types, the values will be converted to Erlangs per km2 before the usage factor curve is applied.

278


handover gain and in the generation of fading signal values. For more information on the calculations used to determine the angular correlation factor, see “Using a correlation model to model slow fading” on page 538.

■ Non-angular—uses correlation factors for co-site sectors and non co-site sectors

For more information on slow fading, see “Slow fading” on page 537.

Power control settings for cdma2000 The power control settings enable you to define power control errors that you can simulate during an analysis (see “To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000” on page 422). Power control errors are caused by delays of power control commands and power control step, and can affect network performance. For more information on how effective power controls can control interference, see “Controlling interference” on page 536.

Carrier settings for cdma2000 The carrier settings enable you to define the power amplifier (PA) threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings for the carriers that you created on the Spectrum Allocation panel. The PA threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings are soft thresholds. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA threshold or noise rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached.If there are no more carriers, the traffic will exceed the soft limits rather than be blocked. For more information on how to define carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.You can define the standard that is assigned to each carrier:

■ IS-95—the carrier supports Interim Standard 95 (IS-95) traffic only. Traffic on this carrier will be limited to bearers with radio configurations RC1 and RC2.

■ 1xRTT—the carrier supports single carrier (1x) radio transmission technology (1xRTT). Traffic on this carrier is permitted in all radio configurations.

■ EV-DO—the carrier supports Evolution - Data Only (EV-DO) traffic (IS-856).

■

279


PA ThresholdThe PA Threshold value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached. The PA Threshold does not apply to EV-DO carriers.

To define general settings for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Network Settings.2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000.

The cdma2000 panel opens with the General tab selected by default.

3 In the Pilot Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the power-to-interference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a Pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default.

4 Type a value in the Reverse Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the reverse link.

5 Type a value in the Forward Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the forward link.

280


6 In the Best Ec Threshold box, type a value to define the threshold for the Pilot - Best Ec Server analysis layer.

This value is used only for the Pilot - Best Ec Server analysis layer. The analysis layer shows the best server at each location where the Ec is above this value. For more information on analysis layers, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

7 In the Pilot Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:■ Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use,

and then click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Pilot Factor


The Pilot Factor Mapping curve is used to determine the likelihood of establishing a pilot for each bin in the analysis area.

8 In the Usage Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve: ■ Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use,

and then click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Usage Factor


The Usage Factor Mapping curve is used with the Pilot Factor Mapping curve to determine the Pilot Pollution Index analysis layer.



To define correlation model settings for cdma2000 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000.2 On the cdma2000 panel, click the Correlation Model tab.

281


3 On the Correlation Model tab, do one of the following:■ To use an angular correlation model, choose Angular from the

list, and type values in the boxes in the Parameters table. For more information on these parameters and the associated equation, see “Slow fading” on page 537.

■ To use a non-angular correlation model, choose Non-Angular from the list, and type values in either of the following boxes in the Parameters table:

■ Inter-site Correlation Factor—the correlation factor for signals arriving from co-site sectors or carriers, which can be other sectors within a site or other carriers within a sector

■ Intra-site Correlation Factor—the correlation factor for signals arriving from sectors at different sites



282


To define power control settings for cdma2000 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000.2 On the cdma2000 panel, click the Power Control tab.

3 Type a value in either of the following boxes to define the power control deviation:■ Reverse Power Control Deviation—the standard deviation of

the reverse signal due to power control errors■ Forward Power Control Deviation—the standard deviation of

the forward signal due to power control errors4 Type values in either of the following boxes to define the power control

error:■ Mean Reverse Power Control Error—the mean reverse signal

error due to power control errors.■ Mean Forward Power Control Error—the mean forward

signal error due to power control errors.5 Do one of the following:



283


To define carrier settings for cdma2000 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog

box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000.2 On the cdma2000 panel, click the Carrier tab.

3 For each carrier listed in the Carrier column, type values in any of the following columns:■ Channel Name—an optional user-defined channel name. By

default, the Channel Name is the same as the Carrier. If you type user-defined channel names in the Channel Name column, they will be used throughout Mentum Planet instead of the Carrier.

■ PA Threshold—the target percentage of the power at the power amplifier for all sectors assigned to the carrier. For more information, see “PA Threshold” on page 280. For information on assigning carriers to sectors, see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 345.

■ Noise Rise—the noise rise target for all sectors assigned to the carrier. This value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all

284


available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.

■ Preference Weightings—a relative weighting value for the carrier that represents the distribution of preferred use for the carriers listed in the Carrier column. When you assign weightings for carriers, the Preference column will automatically update to display the percentage of use for each carrier. If you assign a preference weight of 0, it does not mean that the carrier will not carry any traffic, but that it is the least preferred carrier. EV-DO carriers are considered separately from IS-95 and 1xRTT carriers.

For more information on the Carriers table, press the F1 key.

4 From the Standard column, choose the type of 3GPP cdma2000 carrier:■ IS-95

■ 1xRTT■ EV-DO

For more information, see “Carrier settings for cdma2000” on page 279. If you choose EV-DO, an EV-DO node is created under the cdma2000 node in the Network Settings tree view.



To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000The EV-DO panel is only available if you assigned EV-DO to one or more carriers on the cdma2000 Carriers tab. For more information, see “To define carrier settings for cdma2000” on page 284.You must have a license to generate EV-DO analyses. For more information on EV-DO analyses, see “Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers” on page 453.

1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand cdma2000 and choose EV-DO.

The EV-DO panel is displayed with the EV-DO General tab selected.

285


2 From the EV-DO Revision list, choose one of the following:■ Rev. 0—supports the EV-DO IS-856 Rev. 0 standard.■ Rev. A—supports the EV-DO IS-856 Rev. A standard

If there is no suitable EV-DO bearer for the chosen revision, a compatible EV-DO bearer from the other revision will be used.

3 In the EV-DO Pilot Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the power-to-interference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server, within which a pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default.

4 In the EV-DO Traffic Classes section, enable any of the following options:■ Conversational—circuit-switched traffic such as voice or video

conferencing■ Interactive—interactive applications, such as Web browsing■ Streaming—streaming video■ Background—email, telemetry

These options identify the QoS traffic classes to be carried by EV-DO carriers.

286


5 In the DRC Gain To Handoff State Map table, modify the DRC Gain value for any of the handoff states or accept the defaults.

The DRC Gain value is relative to the power of the reverse pilot channel. The DRC Gain value is used to calculate the power of the reverse DRC channel. Handoff state for EV-DO is defined on the reverse link only.

6 Click the Forward Data Rates tab.

7 In the Available column, enable any of the forward data rates that you want to have available for use.

8 If you want to change the Ec/Nt value for a data rate, type a new value in the Ec/Nt column.

The Ec/Nt value is the ratio of pilot channel chip energy to total spectral noise density, which comprises sector-to-sector interference, thermal noise, and noise power from other networks. The mobile constantly measures Ec/Nt in order to predict the highest achievable data rate for the packet. In an EV-DO forward link simulation, this value is calculated for each bin. The default values are the required Ec/Nt to achieve 1% packet error rate (PER).



287


288

Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers

15.
Defining cdma2000 Subscribers

subscribers■ Importing and exporting

subscriber information■ Workflow for creating

cdma2000 subscriber types■ Defining clutter types for

cdma2000■ Defining cdma2000 bearers■ Defining subscriber

equipment types for cdma2000

■ Defining session types for cdma2000

■ Defining quality types for cdma2000

■ Defining service types for cdma2000

■ Defining subscriber types for cdma2000

This chapter describes how to use the Subscriber

Manager to define the subscribers in your network.

Subscribers are categorized into types, which are

used when you generate an analysis of your

cdma2000 network. Creating subscriber types that

account for the possible variations of subscribers

enables you to generate reliable and comprehensive

analyses of your cdma2000 network.

289


Understanding cdma2000 subscribers The characteristics of subscribers are defined using the categories in the Subscriber Manager. You can create a diverse mix of subscribers by defining different services, quality types, and user equipment types and assigning them to subscriber types.Subscriber types are used with Monte Carlo and rapid planning analyses. Rapid planning analyses can also use a nominal subscriber, which contains a subset of the subscriber information. The nodes within the Subscriber Manager represent building blocks for subscriber types:

■ Subscriber Types—consolidate the information from the other nodes in the Subscriber Manager into various combinations to represent the mix of subscribers in your network.

■ Services—are the applications that a subscriber uses. You can define circuit-switched services and packet-switched services. EV-DO can only be used with packet-switched services.

■ Qualities—define the guaranteed and maximum data rates of a service.

■ Session Types—model the stream of packets which is used to calculate the effective amount of time that a subscriber uses a packet-switched service. You can assign session types to packet-switched service types.

■ Subscriber Equipment Types—represent the types of mobile equipment that are available in your network.

■ Bearers—represent traffic channels representing the various cdma2000 1xRTT and EV-DO Radio Configurations, and are assigned to subscriber equipment types. For EV-DO, only reverse bearers need to be defined.

■ Clutter Types—enable you to define the characteristics of the environments in which services are used. Typically, a Clutter Type includes one or more clutter classes.

For each subscriber type, you must choose a subscriber equipment type and traffic map. You can define multiple usage types, each of which comprises weightings to spread subscribers within the four different environments, a quality, and a service type. Figure 15.1 shows how the information related to subscriber types is organized hierarchically. This hierarchy is reflected in the workflow for

290

Defining cdma2000 SubscribersCDMA User Guide

defining subscriber types. For example, you need to define bearers (or use the defaults) before you define subscriber equipment bands, because you need to assign bearers to subscriber equipment bands. For details on the workflow, see “Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types” on page 293.

Figure 15.1 Subscriber Manager information hierarchy

For a detailed example of how to define a subscriber type, see “Defining subscriber types for cdma2000” on page 321. This example shows you how to define usages, explains the effect of weighting, and describes how the settings that you specify for the subscriber type translate into a real-world scenario.Mentum Planet provides a set of default items for the Subscriber Manager, including bearers, clutter types, services, and subscriber types. To use the defaults, you must import subscriber settings using the Import Wizard. See “Importing and exporting subscriber information” on page 292.

cdma2000 subscriber types and rapid planning If you are generating a rapid planning analysis, you can use the subscriber types defined using the Subscriber Manager or you can use a nominal subscriber. Rapid planning uses only a small subset of the information in the Subscriber Manager. Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics quickly, rather than investing the time required to define detailed subscriber types using the Subscriber Manager. For more

Environments Services Qualities

Session TypesClutter Types

Usages

Technology Bands

Subscriber Equipment Types

Subscriber Types

Bearers

(defined as part of Subscriber Types)

(defined for each ClutterType and weighted per Usage)

291


information on defining a nominal subscriber, see “Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning” on page 386.

Importing and exporting subscriber informationYou can import or export subscriber data using Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. In order to simplify the process of subscriber creation, you can use pre-defined subscriber worksheets to set common subscriber values. Pre-defined templates are located in the Subscriber Data folder within a project folder.

To import pre-defined subscriber information1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import.

The Import Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard, see Chapter 13, “Working with Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

2 On the File Location page, do the following:■ Choose Microsoft Excel.■ Click the Browse button, navigate to the Subscriber Data folder

located within the project folder, choose the pre-defined templates you want to use and click Open.

3 Click Next.4 On the Data Selection page, enable the check boxes next to the data you

want to import and click Finish.

As illustrated in Figure 15.1 on page 291, subscriber types consist of many inter-related elements. In order for the import of pre-defined

subscriber types to be successful, all elements must be defined.

Before using the pre-defined templates, review the details in the Readme.txt file located in the Subscriber Data folder.

292


To import or export subscriber informationWhen you export data, an Excel Spreadsheet is created that contains subscriber settings divided into different worksheets.

1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import or Export.

The Import Wizard or Export Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard or Export Wizard, see Chapter 13, “Working with Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

2 Follow the prompts in the Wizard.

Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber typesStep 1 Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you want to

analyze. For information on creating traffic maps, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 If required, define clutter types. See “Defining clutter types for cdma2000” on page 294.

Step 3 If required, define bearers and then define subscriber equipment types, assigning bearers to the technology bands for each type. See■ “Defining cdma2000 bearers” on page 299■ “Defining subscriber equipment types for

cdma2000” on page 307

Step 4 If required, define session types, and then define service types, assigning session types to packet-switched services. See■ “Defining session types for cdma2000” on

page 309■ “Defining service types for cdma2000” on

page 314

Step 5 If required, define quality types. See “Defining quality types for cdma2000” on page 312.

293


Step 6 If required, create subscriber types. See “Defining subscriber types for cdma2000” on page 321.

Defining clutter types for cdma2000 Clutter types are groupings of clutter classes contained in the clutter grid. For more information, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.Grouping clutter classes simplifies your workflow by enabling you to define characteristics only once for the type (rather then once for each clutter class in the clutter grid). For example, you could create a type called Populated Areas - Low Density, and assign the clutter classes Suburban, Town, Village, and Semi-Rural to it.For each clutter type, you can define the characteristics of the environments within that clutter type. The available environments are:

■ Outdoor—open air environments■ Indoor—buildings or structures (normally representing areas

where single wall penetration is required)■ Deep Indoor—in-building areas where two-wall penetration is

required, or dense buildings where higher than normal penetration losses are experienced

■ Vehicular—moving vehiclesYou can enable one or more of the environments for a clutter type. Environments are used when you define usage types for a subscriber type (see “Defining subscriber types for cdma2000” on page 321 for details). For each usage type, you can define a weighting indicating the amount of time that usage type occurs in each environment (for example, you could define a business subscriber who uses voice service in an outdoor environment 10% of the time). For all of the environments, you can define the penetration loss and the required fast fading margin. For the Vehicular environment, you can also define the speed at which the vehicle is traveling. Figure 15.2 shows a sample clutter file, and shows how example clutter types could be applied to the clutter classes in the file. In the figure, the Village and Suburban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - Low Density

To simplify the creation of subscriber types, you can import default subscriber settings and then modify the settings as required. See

“Importing and exporting subscriber information” on page 292.

294


clutter type, and the Urban and Dense Urban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. Figure 15.2 also provides example settings for each clutter type. These settings are typical of urban and suburban environments.

Figure 15.2 Examples of clutter types

When you run a Monte Carlo simulation, if an environment does not apply to a particular type of clutter (for example, in Figure 15.2, the deep indoor environment does not apply to the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type), the simulation will not place any subscribers in that type of clutter in that environment. In the example in Figure 15.2, no subscribers would be

Clutter type:Populated Areas - High Density



Deep Indoorfast fading: 0 dBpenetration loss: 22 dB


Dense urban

Village

Suburban

Clutter type:Populated Areas - Low Density



Deep Indoornot enabled


Urban

295


using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type, but you could have subscribers using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type.When you assign clutter classes to a clutter type, each clutter class inherits the settings that you defined for the clutter type. The cdma2000 Simulation tool will use default settings, shown in Table 15.1, for clutter classes that are not assigned to a clutter type.

For Downlink Orthogonality, the default value is 100%, and for Slow Fading Standard Deviation, the default value is 7 dB.

To define clutter types for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Clutter Types and choose New.

The Create New - Clutter Type dialog box opens.

Table 15.1 Default environment settings

Setting Outdoor Vehicular Indoor Deep Indoor

Fast fading margin 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

Penetration loss 0 dB 7 dB 10 dB 20 dB

Speed N/A 50 km/h N/A N/A

296


2 In the Name box, type a name for the clutter type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the clutter type.4 To define the orthogonality factor for the clutter type, type a value in the

Downlink Orthogonality box.

A value of 100% represents perfect orthogonality.

5 To define the standard deviation for slow fading of the clutter type, type a value in the Slow Fading Standard Deviation box.

This value is used to model the shadowing from obstacles that cannot be handled by a propagation model. Slightly higher values (approximately 8 dB) may be appropriate for high density urban areas, lower values (approximately 6.5 dB) for open areas.

297


6 Enable any of the following check boxes to choose environments for the clutter type and define the fast fading margin and penetration loss specific to the environment:■ Enable Outdoor—enables the outdoor environment for the

clutter type■ Enable Vehicular—enables the vehicular environment for the

clutter type■ Enable Indoor—enables the indoor environment for the clutter

type■ Enable Deep Indoor—enables the deep indoor environment for

the clutter type

For more information on the settings associated with these environments, press the F1 key.

7 If you enabled the Vehicular environment, type a value in the Vehicular Speed box or accept the default.

The speed is used in conjunction with the sector settings to determine whether a subscriber will be served by a sector. Subscribers that exceed the maximum speed for a sector will not be served by the sector. For more information, see “Quality settings for cdma2000” on page 344.

8 Click OK.

To assign clutter classes to clutter types for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Clutter Types and choose Assign Clutter Classes.

The Assign Clutter Classes dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing clutter type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the clutter type and choosing Edit.

298


2 Choose a clutter type from the Clutter Types list, and then choose one or more clutter classes from the Unassigned Clutter Classes list, and click Assign.

The clutter classes in the Unassigned Clutter Classes list are defined in the clutter grid file for the project. For more information, see Chapter 1, “Getting Started with Mentum Planet”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

The cdma2000 Simulation tool will use default settings for any unassigned clutter classes.

3 Click Save and then click Close.

Defining cdma2000 bearers Bearers represent the traffic channels in terms of their service data rate and dedicated bearers in terms of their channel data rate. Bearers are displayed under the Bearers node in the Subscriber Manager and are assigned to

To unassign clutter classes from a clutter type, choose a clutter class under a clutter type node in the Clutter Types section, and click

Unassign.

You can create a new clutter type by clicking New in the Assign Clutter Classes dialog box. To modify the properties of the new clutter type,

click Edit. The Edit - Clutter Type dialog box opens.

299


subscriber equipment types. A default set of bearers is supplied with Mentum Planet, but you can define additional bearers or modify any of the default bearers.The following sections provide information about cdma2000 bearers. For information about W-CDMA bearers, see “Defining W-CDMA bearers” on page 57. If you intend to generate an analysis using EV-DO carriers, you must define at least one EV-DO reverse link bearer. See “To define EV-DO bearers” on page 305.

cdma2000 bearersStandard cdma2000 bearers are configured with

■ direction (reverse or forward)■ radio configuration■ service data rate■ signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) to frame erasure rate (FER)

mapping table for both fundamental and supplemental channels■ forward link channel elements required for the fundamental

channel and supplemental channels■ forward link traffic channel power offsets

Bearer Eb/No to FERThe Eb/No to FER mapping is defined using a curve that can be created or edited using the Curve Editor. When you generate analysis layers, this mapping is used to calculate the Forward Service FER value from the Forward - Eb/No analysis layer. For information on the Forward - Eb/No layer and the Forward Service FER value, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.To ensure that borderline Eb/No values are accounted for, the points you define for the curve should exceed the Eb/No values that you are interested in analyzing. If values generated by the analysis exceed your defined range, they will be represented by the last defined point. The Curve Editor interpolates values linearly, based on Eb/No and FER pairs. The FER values are calculated as follows:

■ For Eb/No values greater than the highest point in the curve, the FER at that highest point is assigned. In the example in

300


Figure 15.3, for Eb/No values over 8.7 dB, a FER value of 0% is assigned.

■ For Eb/No values defined in the range of the curve, the Curve Editor linearly assigns a FER value based on the two nearest values, above and below. In the example in Figure 15.3, an Eb/No value of 4.3 dB is assigned a FER value of 12%.

■ For Eb/No values less than the lowest point in the curve, the FER at the lowest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 15.3, for Eb/No values less than -2.3 dB, a FER value of 90% is assigned.

Figure 15.3 Curve Editor displaying the linear relationship between Eb/No and FER

Supplemental channelscdma2000 supports the modeling of supplemental channels. As many as seven supplemental channels are supported per fundamental channel for RC1 and RC2 (IS-95B only) and as many as two for radio configurations RC3 to RC5. Supplemental channels are allocated to a call as needed to send a burst of data. They are not handed off. When you define cdma2000 bearers, you can choose the radio configuration and define the data rate for the bearer such that supplemental channels are automatically allocated as required. For example, if you choose RC1 with a data rate of 9.6 kbps, only one fundamental channel

301


is allocated. If you choose a data rate of 19.2 kbps, one fundamental channel and one supplemental channel are allocated.When you generate analysis layers, supplemental channels are taken into consideration. For example, if a mobile is transmitting using a fundamental and a supplemental channel, the power used is greater than if only a fundamental channel were in use.

To define cdma2000 bearers

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-click Bearers and choose New.

2 In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer Required list, choose cdma2000 Bearer, and click OK.

The Create New - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box opens.

For information on defining EV-DO bearers, see “To define EV-DO bearers” on page 305.

302


3 In the Name box, type a name for the bearer.4 In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer.5 In the Direction section, choose one of the following options to define the

direction of the bearer:■ Reverse■ Forward

Typically, you would create a set of two bearers: one for the reverse link and one for the forward link.

6 In the Radio Configuration section, choose the traffic channel transmission format that applies to the bearer.

The configurations that are available depend on whether you choose Reverse or Forward in the Direction section (see Step 5). For the reverse link, you can choose from RC1 to RC4, and for the forward link, you can choose from RC1 to RC5. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate of 1. Radio configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported.

7 From the Service Data Rate list, choose the service data rate for the traffic channels.

The Number of Supplemental Channels box updates automatically to show the number of supplemental channels that will be assigned to support the data rate that you specified.

The Channel Data Rate box updates automatically to take into account the applicable Forward Error Correction (FEC) Convolutional Coding rate dictated by the standard that is applied to the service data rate.


The only technology available for the bearer is cdma2000.

9 In the Fundamental Eb/No to FER Mapping section, do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to



303


10 If you are defining a forward link bearer, in the Fundamental Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer.

This number represents the number of channel elements required by the fundamental channel for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network).


11 In the Supplemental Eb/No to FER Mapping section, do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to

FER curve and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER


You must choose an Eb/No to FER curve for supplemental channels, even for bearers that do not need a supplemental channel.

12 If you are defining a forward link bearer, type values for the following:■ Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset—the maximum

power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates.

■ Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset—the minimum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates.

■ Supplemental Channel Elements—the number of supplemental channel elements used by the bearer. This number represents the number of channel elements required by the Supplemental channel(s) for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network).

304


13 Click OK.

To define EV-DO bearers1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-


Required list, choose cdma2000 1xEV-DO Bearer, and click OK.

The Create New - cdma2000 1xEV-DO Bearer dialog box opens.

3 In the EV-DO Revision section, choose one of the following:■ Rev. 0—enables the data rates supported by IS-856 Revision 0■ Rev. A—enables the data rates supported by IS-856 Revision A

Voice over IP (a Conversational Traffic QoS Class used with a packet-switched service) is allowed only with EV-DO Rev. A.

You can modify the properties of an existing bearer from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the bearer and choosing Edit.

305


4 From the Service Data Rate list, choose the rate for user data carried by the data channel or accept the default.

The Service Data Rate must be within the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate and the Maximum Uplink Data Rate of the associated Quality types. For more information, see “Defining quality types for cdma2000” on page 312.

5 In the Data Channel Gain box, type a value to define the gain for the data channel or accept the default.

The default value will change, depending on the Service Data Rate you chose in Step 4.


The only technology available for the bearer is cdma2000.

7 In the Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER section, do one of the following:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Pilot Ec/Nt to

Data PER curve and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Pilot Ec/Nt to

Data PER curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.

The Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER curve relates to both the data channel and the pilot channel. This curve, along with the Required Uplink FER/PER of the data channel (specified for the service in the Subscriber Manager), determine the Required Pilot Channel Ec/Nt at the base station receiver for each user’s reverse link signal in order to guarantee the desired PER on the data channel.

8 In the Site Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer for the reverse link.

This number represents the number of channel elements required by the site for the chosen Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box.

9 Click OK.

306


Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 The Subscriber Manager enables you to group the mobile equipment types in your network into subscriber equipment types. When you create a subscriber equipment type, you can define subscriber equipment technology band types that contain information about the performance of subscriber equipment for a particular technology and band.For example, you could create a subscriber equipment type that contains five subscriber equipment technology bands that represent the capabilities of the mobile on each of the bands. For more information on creating technology bands, see “To create a new cdma2000 technology band” on page 276.

To define subscriber equipment types for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Subscriber Equipment Types and choose New.

The Create New - Mobile Equipment dialog box opens.

2 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber equipment type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the subscriber equipment

type.4 Click OK.

To define subscriber equipment bands for cdma2000When you define subscriber equipment bands, you define the characteristics of the band, and then assign bearers to it.If you assign multiple bearers to the equipment band, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, the most efficient bearer that meets the quality requirement of the service for the subscriber type will be used for each individual subscriber in the analysis. The most efficient bearer is determined by the radio configuration with the most efficient coding scheme (for example, RC4 will be chosen over RC3). If multiple bearers are available with the chosen radio configuration, then the bearer with the highest data rate is used.

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, expand Subscriber Equipment Types, expand an equipment type, right-click Technology Bands and choose New.

The Create New - Mobile Equipment Technology Band dialog box opens.

307


2 To define the transmit power, type a value in the following boxes:■ Maximum Transmit Power—the maximum transmit power at

the power amplifier output■ Minimum Transmit Power—the minimum transmit power at

the power amplifier output3 In the Maximum Active Servers box, type a value to define the

maximum number of handover servers in the active set (i.e., the number of rake fingers) supported by the equipment type.

4 In the Antenna Gain box, type a value to define the antenna gain.5 In the Receiver Noise Figure box, type a value to define the noise figure

of the receiver.6 In the Body Loss (Voice) box, type a value to define the body loss for

voice traffic.7 In the Body Loss (Data) box, type a value to define type a value to define

the body loss for data traffic.

308


8 From the Technology Band list, choose the band for this equipment type.

Technology bands are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Defining cdma2000 network settings” on page 277.

9 If the mobile equipment type supports HSDPA, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the HSDPA Terminal Category list.

10 In the Bearers section, do either of the following:■ To assign a bearer to the equipment type, choose a bearer from

the Available list and click Add. The bearer is added to the Assigned list.

■ To unassign a bearer from the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Selected list and click Remove. The bearer is added to the Available list.

11 Click OK.

Defining session types for cdma2000 Session types are used to characterize the size and distribution of sessions in your network. A session defines the characteristics of a subscriber’s use of a packet-switched service (for example, e-mail or Web browsing), and consists of one or more packet arrivals. Once you create session types, they can be assigned to packet-switched services. For more information on packet-switched services, see “Defining service types for cdma2000” on page 314.For packet-switched traffic, the distribution of packets during simulation impacts how queued traffic is modeled. Packet-switched sessions use the traffic model recommended by the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) to model packet traffic. This model is described in UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0, “Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS): Selection procedure for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS”, which is available at http://www.etsi.org.Figure 15.4 shows how a packet call is modeled using this traffic model. The horizontal axis represents the time elapsed, and the vertical lines represent

You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber equipment technology band from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the

subscriber equipment technology band and choosing Edit.

309

http://www.etsi.org

http://www.etsi.org


individual packets. The arrival of several packets in a burst is called a packet call, and the arrival of these packet calls is called a packet service (or packet-switched) session. The reading time is the amount of time that a user spends studying data before making another packet call.

Figure 15.4 Packet service session

When you define session types using the Session Type dialog box, the following values in the dialog box refer to the ETSI model:

■ Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)■ Mean Reading Time (Dpc)■ Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)■ Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)■ Packet Timeout

Values used in the ETSI model are displayed in brackets following the label. For example, Mean No. of Packet Calls refers to the Npc value in the ETSI model.

To define session types for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Session Types and choose New.

The Create New - Session Type dialog box opens.

Individual packet

First packetarrives at base

station buffer Packet calls

Interarrivaltime between

packetsLast packet arrives at basestation buffer

Packet service session

Packet timeout

Reading time

Time

310


2 In the Name box, type a name for the session type.3 In the Comments box, type a description for the session type.4 To define the packet settings, type a value in any of the following boxes

(see Figure 15.4 for details about how these values are modeled):■ Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)—the mean number of packet

calls in a packet service session■ Mean Reading Time (Dpc)—the mean reading time between

packet calls in seconds. ■ Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)—the mean

number of packets in a packet call■ Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)—the mean

interarrival time between packets■ Packet Timeout—the time between the last packet in a packet

call and the designated end of the packet call (i.e., before the reading time starts)

5 In the Packet Size Distribution section, choose an option to model the distribution of packet sizes:■ Pareto—uses a Pareto distribution model■ Poisson—uses a Poisson distribution model

311


6 To define the packet size based on distribution type, do one of the following:■ If you chose Pareto as the distribution type, type a value in all of

the following boxes to define the packet size:■ Packet Size Alpha—the Alpha packet distribution

parameter for Pareto distributions■ Minimum Packet Size—the minimum size of a packet■ Maximum Packet Size—the maximum size of a packet

■ If you chose Poisson as the distribution type, type a value in the Mean Packet Size box to define the mean packet size.

7 Click OK.

Defining quality types for cdma2000When you define the usages for subscriber types, you can specify the quality for each usage. The quality type defines two levels of throughput in each direction for the service assigned to the usage. Each quality type contains settings for the guaranteed and maximum data rates of the service. When you generate an analysis, if the guaranteed data rate is not available at a location, then the service is not available at that location.

To define quality types for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Qualities and choose New.

The Create New - Quality dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing session type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the session type and choosing

Edit.

312


2 In the Name box, type a name for the quality type.3 In the Comment box, type a description for the quality type.4 To define the reverse link data rate, type values in any of the following

boxes: ■ Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate—the guaranteed reverse link

data rate required by the quality type■ Maximum Uplink Data Rate—the maximum reverse link data

rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate.

The guaranteed uplink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the uplink. If a bearer with a rate that falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served. In an EV-DO analysis, however, Mentum Planet always attempts to serve subscribers at the highest possible data rate on the downlink.

5 To define the forward link data rate, type values in any of the following boxes: ■ Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate—the guaranteed forward

link data rate required by the quality type■ Maximum Downlink Data Rate—the maximum forward link

data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate.

The guaranteed downlink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the downlink. If a bearer with a rate that

313


falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served.

6 In the Traffic QoS Class section, choose the traffic class that applies to the quality and its associated data rates.

7 Click OK.

Defining service types for cdma2000 Service types are the applications that your subscribers are using. You can define the following types of services:

■ Circuit-switched (such as voice)—these types of services are delay intolerant, and require dedicated bearers

■ Packet-switched (such as Web browsing)—these types of services have various levels of delay tolerance, from delay intolerant to delay tolerant. The delay-intolerant services require dedicated bearers, while the delay-tolerant services will use shared bearers if available in the technology.

To define circuit-switched service types for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Services and choose New.2 In the New Service dialog box, choose Circuit Switched Service from


The Create New - Circuit Switched Service dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing quality type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the quality type and choosing

Edit.

314


3 In the Name box, type a name for the circuit-switched service type.4 In the Comments box, type a description for the circuit-switched service

type.5 In the Erlangs per Subscriber box, type a value to define the number of

Erlangs generated by each subscriber type associated with this service.

During a Monte Carlo analysis, when subscribers are distributed using the traffic map associated with the subscriber type, this value determines the number of subscribers that are distributed per service. For example, a value of 1 in this box results in one subscriber distributed for each subscriber in the traffic map. A value of 0.5 results in half the number of subscribers that are in the traffic map being distributed.

6 To define the percentage of time that traffic is transmitted in a direction, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Uplink Activity Factor—the percentage of time reverse link

traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.

■ Downlink Activity Factor—the percentage of time forward link traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.

315


7 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit

control overhead for reverse link traffic■ Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit

control overhead for forward link traffic

The Uplink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically based on the Uplink Activity Factor and Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead. The Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead is calculated as a percentage of the Uplink Activity Factor and then added to the Uplink Activity Factor. For example, if the Uplink Activity Factor is 50% and the Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead value is 2%, then the Uplink Channel Activity Factor is 51 = (50+50*0.02).

The Downlink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically in the same way, based on the Downlink Activity Factor and Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead.

8 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited.

You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority overrides the service priority.


The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Forward - Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less forward link service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector forward link service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including Pilot - Best Ec/Io.

316


10 To define the maximum FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Required Uplink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

reverse link■ Required Downlink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

forward link11 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the

subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box.

For cdma2000, this value is typically 1.

12 Click OK.

To define packet-switched service types for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Services and choose New.2 In the New Service dialog box, choose Packet Switched Service from


The Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box opens.

You can modify the properties of an existing circuit-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the circuit-switched


317


3 In the Name box, type a name for the packet-switched service type.4 In the Comments box, type a description for the packet-switched service

type.5 In the Input Load section, do one of the following to define the mean

input load:■ To define the mean input load in kilobits per hour, choose the

Kilobits/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

■ To define the mean input load in sessions per hour, choose the Sessions/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

■ To define the mean input load in Erlangs per subscriber, choose the Erlangs/Subscriber option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.

These values represent the average input load over a sustained period, not a peak or instantaneous load.

318


6 From the Session Type list, choose a session type for this service type.

For more information on session types, see “Defining session types for cdma2000” on page 309.

7 In the Symmetry section, do one of the following to define the primary and non-primary traffic on the channel:■ Choose the Uplink option as the primary direction of traffic, and

then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and non-primary directions.

■ Choose the Downlink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and non-primary directions.

The asymmetry factor defines the relationship between primary traffic and non-primary traffic. For example, choosing Downlink as the primary direction and defining an asymmetry factor of 0.1 would set the reverse link traffic to be 0.1 times that of the primary forward link direction.

8 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes: ■ Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit and

control overhead for reverse link traffic■ Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead—retransmit and

control overhead for forward link traffic9 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, and enable the Use Priority check box for the subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority will override the service priority for that subscriber type.



319


the Forward - Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less forward link service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector forward link service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including Pilot - BestEc/Io.

11 To define the FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:■ Required Uplink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

reverse link■ Required Downlink FER/PER—the required FER/PER at the

forward link


For cdma2000, this value is typically 1.

13 If you want to view information about the reverse link and forward link channel activity factors, click Illustration.

The Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box opens. This dialog box enables you to choose bearers that could potentially be assigned to this service. When you choose a bearer, the fields update to show the values that would be used in an analysis for this service type if the bearers were to be used for this service.

320


14 From the Uplink Bearer and Downlink Bearer lists, choose the bearers for which you want to view statistics.

The other fields in the dialog box automatically display values depending on reverse link bearer and forward link bearer that you choose.

The bearers that you choose in the entries in the Illustration window are for illustration purposes only. They do not affect the analysis.

15 Click Close to close the Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box.

16 Click OK to close the Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box.

Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 Subscriber types are defined by:

■ the subscriber equipment used■ the traffic map on which the subscriber type is based■ the different kinds of services that a subscriber uses and the

quality that applies to each service■ the environments where the usage takes place

The information contained in a subscriber type is used when you generate Monte Carlo simulations or analysis layers.

ExampleYou might create a subscriber type called Advanced Business that represents subscribers who use mobiles as their primary business tools. The subscribers represented by this type use their mobiles for everything from downloading email to placing cellular calls. After you create the usage types, you can assign a ratio to determine the proportion of the traffic that is in each of the

You can modify the properties of an existing packet-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the packet-switched


The total number of subscribers is defined by the traffic map and scaling, not by the number of usage types or environments. The total

number of subscribers for each subscriber type is spread across the usage types and environments defined for the subscriber type.

321


available environments. In addition, you can set the service type and quality type for each usage type. For example, if you set up four usage types for the Advanced Business subscriber type, you could assign the weightings, service types, and quality types shown in Table 15.2.

In this example, the total weighting value calculated across all usage types is 40. Therefore, the Advanced Business subscriber type uses Usage 1 50% of the time, Usage 2 10% of the time, Usage 3 20% of the time, and Usage 4 20% of the time.

To create a subscriber type for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, right-

click Subscriber Types and choose New.

The Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box opens.

Table 15.2 Example usage type settings

Usage type Indoor Deep

Indoor Outdoor Vehicular Service type Quality type

1 5 5 5 5 Voice 12.2kbps_Conver-sational

2 1 2 1 0 Video 64kbps_Streaming

3 2 2 4 0 WWW 144kbps_Interactive

4 2 2 4 0 Email 12.2kbps_Back-ground

322


2 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber type.3 In the Comment box, type a description for the subscriber type.4 In the Traffic Scaling box, type a value to define how much traffic should

be scaled up or down from the traffic map associated with the subscriber type.

Values greater than 1.0 indicate a greater number of subscribers of this type than the value indicated in the associated traffic map.

5 If you want to define the priority in which the subscriber is served or provided with the best level of service when network capacity is limited, enable the Use Priority check box and type a priority value in the Priority box.

Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority.

If you enable this check box, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, this subscriber is served according to the priority that you define. If you do not enable this check box, the traffic is allocated according to the priority set

323


for the services, which is defined in the Priority box for both circuit-switched and packet-switched services.

6 In the Variance section, choose one of the following options to define the variability of the number of subscribers generated by different Monte Carlo runs:■ Mean—the same mean number of subscribers will be used on

every run.■ Poisson—a Poisson distribution of subscribers will be used.■ User Defined—choose this option to define a custom Poisson

distribution with modified variability. A value of 1 is a standard Poisson distribution.

7 From the Subscriber Equipment Types list, choose the equipment type of the subscriber type.

For more information on creating a subscriber equipment type, see “Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000” on page 307.

8 From the Traffic list, choose the traffic map that you want to associate with the subscriber.

You can only choose traffic maps in subscribers/km2 or Erlangs/km2. Traffic maps in Kbps/km2 are not valid. The type of traffic map that you choose affects the service types that are available in the usage types section. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For information on generating and adding a traffic map to the project, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

9 Define usage types as described in “To define usage types for cdma2000” on page 325.

10 Click OK.

You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber type and choosing

Edit.

324


To define usage types for cdma2000 1 In the Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box, click New.

A new row is created in the table.

2 Click in the Short Name box and type a description for the usage type.

The description can be up to eight characters in length.

3 To define the weighting ratio for each clutter type, click in each of the following boxes and type values or accept the defaults:■ Indoor Weighting—the weighting for indoor usage as a ratio

between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type■ Deep Indoor Weighting—the weighting for deep indoor usage

as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

■ Outdoor Weighting—the weighting for outdoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

■ Vehicular Weighting—the weighting for vehicular usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type

Values must be positive integers. For more information, press the F1 key or see “Example” on page 321 for information about how the weighting numbers are used.

4 Click in the Service box and choose a service type for the usage type from the list.

Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For more information about circuit-switched and packet-switched service types, see “Defining service types for cdma2000” on page 314.

You can create traffic maps using the information defined in the Subscriber Manager. The traffic maps combine the voice and packet

usages for all defined subscriber types. For more information, see Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

325


5 Click in the Quality box and choose a quality type for the usage type from the list.

For more information about quality types, see “Defining quality types for cdma2000” on page 312.

6 To add another usage type, repeat Step 1 to Step 5.7 Click OK.

326

Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites

16.
Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites

sites and sectors■ Considerations for multi-band

networks■ Workflow for configuring and

placing cdma2000 sites■ Creating cdma2000 sites■ Calculating base station link

budgets for cdma2000 sectors

■ Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors

■ Defining cdma2000 sector settings

■ Editing sites and sectors■ Deleting sites■ Viewing cdma2000 carrier

assignment and interference information

This chapter describes how to configure and place a

cdma2000 site, define sector settings specific to

cdma2000, and globally edit cdma2000 sector

properties.

Once you have defined the cdma2000 network

configuration, you can configure and place the sites

in your network.

327


Understanding cdma2000 sites and sectors When you define the sectors in a site, you need to define the following settings specific to cdma2000 technologies:

■ Carrier assignments (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 345)

■ Hardware settings (see “Hardware settings for cdma2000” on page 341)

■ Resource settings (see “Resource settings for cdma2000” on page 342)

■ Implementation settings (see “Implementation settings for cdma2000” on page 342)

■ Quality settings (see “Quality settings for cdma2000” on page 344)

■ Power settings (see “Power settings for cdma2000” on page 345)For more information about general site and sector properties, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about TDMA/FDMA site and sector properties, see Chapter 5, “Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

Considerations for multi-band networksIf your network is configured with multiple bands (see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274), and you want to generate different predictions for carriers on two different bands, you need to do the following:

■ configure two different sectors, with same location and azimuth, but different antenna patterns and propagation models (see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide)

■ assign a carrier from one band to one sector and the second band to the second sector (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 345)

■ when you generate the analysis, include both sectorsIn the area where both sectors can serve subscribers, the subscribers that are served by each sector will depend on the carrier preference weightings, and

328

Configuring and Placing cdma2000 SitesCDMA User Guide

the PA power and noise limits. For more information, see “To define carrier settings for cdma2000” on page 284.This gives you the flexibility of simulating different scenarios, for example:

■ If all carriers have the same preference weightings, subscribers will be allocated equally between the two sectors, except for an area at the fringe where only the stronger sector can work, until the PA power and noise limits are reached. At this point, subscribers will be allocated to the remaining carrier or carriers.

■ Carriers on the weaker sector could be given a zero preference weighting, so that only the stronger sector will be allocated subscribers until the PA power and noise limits are reached. Any additional subscribers would then be allocated to the weaker sector. In this case, more users in the fringe area could be blocked.

Workflow for configuring and placing cdma2000 sitesStep 1 Define the network configuration. See “Chapter 14: Defining a

cdma2000 Network Configuration” on page 271.

Step 2 Configure and place cdma2000 sites. See “Creating cdma2000 sites” on page 329.

Creating cdma2000 sitesThis section describes how to configure and place cdma2000 sites using a new site configuration.You can also create and place sites based on an existing site configuration. For more information, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To create a cdma2000 site 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and

choose New.2 In the Site Configuration dialog box, choose the Create a New

Configuration option, and click Continue.


3 Click the Site tab, and type a prefix for the site in the Site ID box.

329


4 If you want to add additional site information, type additional identifiers or descriptions in the Site UID, Site Name, or Site Name 2 boxes.

5 Define the remaining site settings.

General site settings are described in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

6 Click the Sectors tab, and then click in the Technology field and choose cdma2000 from the list.

7 Define the remaining general sector settings.

General sector settings are described in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

If you want to calculate the radiated power for a sector, you must place the site first. Complete this procedure and then see “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331.

8 On the Sectors tab, click Add Sector to add as many sectors to the site as required.

If you define cdma2000 sector settings before adding other sectors, the settings that you used for the last sector will be automatically applied to the new sectors that you add.

9 Click the Site tab and do either of the following to place the site:■ Click in the Map window to add a site at that location.■ Enable the Manual Entry check box, choose the coordinate

units from the Units list, type the coordinates in the X/Long and Y/Lat boxes, and click Place Site.

The created site is displayed in the Map window and a site with the name <Site>_1 is added to the Sites category in the Project Explorer.

10 If you want to use the configuration again, choose File ➤ Save Configuration As, type a name for the site configuration (.dsc) file in the File Name box, and click Save.

Site configuration files are stored in the Config\GSM subfolder of the project folder. For more information on using an existing site configuration, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you save the .dsc file, the settings for individual sectors (defined in the Sector Settings dialog box) are not saved.

330


11 When you have finished placing sites, click Close.

Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to calculate the radiated power for a sector based on the power output of the sector’s power amplifier (PA) plus or minus system gains and losses. You can also use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box to define settings for specific sites, sector groups, or flags. For more information, see “Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors” on page 337.The value for ERP or EIRP on the Sectors tab of the Site Properties dialog box is the same as the value for Pilot EIRP in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box. The ERP or EIRP values on the Sectors tab are read-only and are calculated as shown in Equation 16.1.

Equation 16.1 Pilot EIRP calculation

If a sector has EV-DO and 1xRTT or IS-95 carriers, the first carrier refers to the first 1xRTT or IS-95 carrier. If a sector has only EV-DO carriers, the Pilot EIRP equation is modified as shown in Equation 16.2.

Equation 16.2 Pilot EIRP equation for sectors with EV-DO carriers only

When you generate predictions, the power value used is the value in the ERP or EIRP box for the sector.

Losses and gainsThe Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to define specific losses and gains for the sector and updates the total power for the sector using these values.

You can edit the properties of a single site after you place it. In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose

Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, edit the properties, click Apply, and then click Close.

Pilot EIRP First carrier pilot power Antenna boresight gainForward link losses and gains

+ +=

Pilot EIRP First carrier PA power Antenna boresight gainForward link losses and gains

+ +=

331


For both the forward link and reverse link, a default antenna gain value is added based on the antenna type assigned to the sector. You cannot modify this value.All new sites are also given a default Feeder value on both the forward link and the reverse link to account for cable and connector losses. A default BTS Noise Figure is assigned to the reverse link to account for base station receiver noise gain. You should modify the BTS Noise Figure according to the hardware manufacturer's specifications.You can add additional losses and gains as required. Because the Friis noise formula (see Equation 16.3) is used to calculate the Reverse Noise Figure, the order of the items on the Base Station Losses & Gains tab in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box must match the hierarchy of the sector hardware (see Figure 16.1 and Figure 16.2). By default, the BTS Noise Figure is always the last item in the list.

Figure 16.1 Example sector hardware configuration

The hardware configuration shown in Figure 16.1 would be represented in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box in Mentum Planet as shown in Figure 16.2.

Antenna

Antenna Feeder TailTower Mounted Amplifier (TMA)

FeederFeeder Tail

BTS Amplifier

332


Figure 16.2 Example Reverse Losses & Gains settings

The Reverse Composite Noise Figure (Composite System Noise Figure (NFs)) is calculated as follows, using the Friis noise formula:

Equation 16.3 Reverse Composite Noise Figure calculation

Where:All terms are in their linear form.

is the Composite System Noise Factor (linear ratio).

is the Composite System Noise Figure.

is the Noise Factor of individual elements (linear ratio).

is the numerical gain of individual elements (linear ratio).

Note that a loss (in dB) is taken as negative gain:

fs f1f2 1–

G1-------------

f3 1–G1G2--------------

f4 1–G1G2G3--------------------- …

fn 1–G1G2G3…G n 1–( )---------------------------------------------+ + + + +=

fs

NFs 10log10fs=

f1…fn

G1…Gn

G 10G db( )

10----------------

=

333


So, for passive elements:

To calculate base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site for

which you want to modify the base station link budget settings, and choose Edit.

2 In the Site Properties dialog box, click the Sectors tab.3 Click in the ERP or EIRP box of the sector you want to modify, and then

click the Base Station Link Budget (...) button.

The Base Station Link Budget dialog box opens with the Reverse tab selected.

Some subscriber-related settings must be configured in the Subscriber Manager. For more information see “Defining subscriber equipment

types for cdma2000” on page 307.

If you are using an Excel spreadsheet to import base station link budget settings, you must use the Index column to specify the order of the

items in the Losses and Gains list. For more information, see “Importing and exporting project data” in Chapter 13, “Working With Network and Project Data”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

f 10NF db( )

10-------------------

=

f 1G----=

334


4 Do one of the following to choose the carrier(s) to which you want to apply the settings:■ If you want to apply the settings to a single carrier, choose a

carrier from the Carrier list.■ If you want to apply the settings to all carriers on the sector,

enable the Apply the Same Settings to All Carriers check box.5 On the Base Station Losses & Gains tab, do the following to modify the

Feeder settings or accept the defaults:■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal

noise associated with the gain.6 To modify the BTS Noise Figure value, type a value in the Noise Figure

box.

335


7 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the reverse link:■ Click Add.■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal

noise associated with the gain.■ If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change

the order of items in the list of losses and gains.8 To remove an item from the Reverse tab, choose the item and click

Remove.

The Reverse Composite Noise Figure box at the bottom of the Base Station Link Budget dialog box updates to reflect the loss, gain, and noise figure values.

9 Click the Forward tab at the bottom of the Base Station Losses & Gains tab and do the following to modify the Feeder value for the forward link, or accept the default:■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.

10 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the forward link:■ Click Add.■ From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain.■ In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain.■ In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.■ If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change

the order of items in the list of losses and gains.11 To remove an item from the Forward tab, choose the item and click

Remove.

The Total EIRP and Pilot EIRP boxes update to reflect the loss or gain values.

336


12 To modify power information for the sector, type values in any of the following boxes:■ PA Power—the power at the power amplifier. When you change

this value, the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power. The Total EIRP box updates automatically to reflect the new Total EIRP for the power amplifier. You can also modify the PA power on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. See “To define hardware settings” on page 346. The two boxes are interdependent. Changes in one location are reflected in the other location.

■ Pilot Power—the power of the pilot channel. When you change this value, the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power and the Pilot EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 16.1 on page 331.

■ Pilot % of PA Power—the pilot power as a percentage of PA power. When you change this value, the Pilot Power updates automatically to reflect the new ratio and the Pilot EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 16.1 on page 331.

■ Total EIRP—the total PA power for the sector (calculated as PA Power + Forward link losses and gains). When you change this value, the PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the change and the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power.

13 Click OK.

The ERP or EIRP value is updated for the sector.

Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool enables you to define base station link budget settings and apply them to specific sites, sector groups, or flags. You can add, remove, update, and reorder base station link budget settings.For example, you could use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool with a newly created project to define a common set of losses and gains according to the hardware used most often in your network. Using these

337


common settings as a base, you could then define individual or unique sector settings as required.Before using the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool, you should be familiar with the Base Station Link Budget tool. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331.

To globally edit base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:

■ To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

■ To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags, and choose Global Edit ➤ Base Station Link Budget.

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box opens, displaying the Uplink/Reverse settings for the first sector in the group, the first sector with the specified flag condition, or the first sector chosen in the Project Explorer.

The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box is not technology-dependent and will update all of the sectors you choose

with the same settings. Depending on the options you choose, existing settings may be lost.

338


2 From the Action list, choose the type of action that you want to perform:■ Insert—adds additional losses/gains in the order specified, but

leaves existing settings intact.■ Remove—removes any losses/gains that match the specified

name/order. You can choose to exclude individual losses/gains.■ Replace—replaces the values for the specified losses/gains.■ Update—updates values for losses/gains that match the

specified name/order. You can choose to update the name, the associated value, or both.

You can only choose one action each time you apply changes to the base station link budget settings. If you want to perform multiple actions, use the Apply button each time you define settings for a specific action. If you choose another action before applying the new settings, the changes for the current action will be lost.

339


3 If you chose either Remove or Update in Step 2, choose one of the following filters from the Action Options list:■ By Name & Order—removes/updates only existing losses/

gains that match both the name and specified order.■ By Name Only—removes/updates only existing losses/gains

with the same name.■ By Order Only—removes/updates only existing losses/gains

that match the specified order.4 On the Uplink/Reverse tab, do any of the following.

■ If you chose Insert, Remove, or Replace in Step 2, and you want to add an item, click Add, then from the Type list choose Loss or Gain, type a name in the Name box and a value in the Value box. If you are adding a gain, a type a value in the Noise Figure box. You can add additional losses/gains as required.

■ If you chose Remove in Step 2, enable the check box beside each item that you want to remove.

■ If you chose Replace in Step 2, modify the values for the losses/gains that you want to replace as required

■ If you chose Update in Step 2, enable the check box and modify the values for each field that you want to update.

The options that are available will depend on the action that you chose in Step 2.

5 If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.

6 If required, click the Downlink/Reverse tab and repeat Step 2 to Step 5.7 Do one of the following:

■ To apply your changes and exit from the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box, click OK.

■ To apply your changes and choose a new action from the Action list, click Apply and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.

340


Defining cdma2000 sector settings For each site in your project, you need to define cdma2000 sector settings. The first step in defining sector settings is assigning the carriers to the sector. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.After you assign carriers to sectors, you can define sector settings for each carrier as described in the following sections. The sector settings that are available will be slightly different, depending on the type of carrier.

Figure 16.3 cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box showing the Hardware panel

Hardware settings for cdma2000Hardware settings enable you to define the equipment for the sector, including channel elements, noise figure, throughput, and link loss. A channel element

341


is a logical controller on a channel element card or server that controls and routes data for services in the cdma2000 network. The number of channel elements required per service depends upon the amount of throughput the service needs and the vendor’s equipment. Services that require higher throughput may need more channel elements. As part of the hardware settings, you can also activate a specific technology for a sector and, in this way, conserve network resources by offering only those services needed. For example, if a sector is serving a sparsely populated area you can activate only R99 even though the carrier is both R99 and HSDPA. For more information, see “To define hardware settings” on page 346.

Resource settings for cdma2000Resource settings enable you to define how best to allocate sector resources so that the maximum number of subscribers are served. Mentum Planet considers the traffic channel limitations as well as the uplink and downlink elements defined per carrier in the network analysis.For more information, see “To define sector resources” on page 347.

Implementation settings for cdma2000Implementation settings enable you to define PN offset planning settings and noise rise and traffic power settings for rapid planning.

PN offset planning settingsWhen you define PN offset planning settings, you can manually enter a value for PN offset and you can specify search window sizes for the active neighboring sets of sectors. Allocating PN offsets manually (i.e., without the assistance of PN offset plans and the PN offset planning tool, described in “Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans” on page 463) involves assigning a PN offset value to one or more sectors that are to be included in the PN offset plan and if required, changing the associated search window settings. The PN offset for a sector (a value from 0 to 511) corresponds to a starting point in a PN offset index. If you plan to assign PN offset values to sectors manually, you must specify enough separation between time shifts to avoid interference between sectors.Search window sizes are set using an index value, which corresponds to a window size in chips. For more information on PN offset planning, see “Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans” on page 463.

342


The valid index values and corresponding window sizes (in chips) are shown in Table 16.1.

Rapid planning settingsRapid planning provides a quick method of generating analysis layers, as an alternative to the Monte Carlo simulation. It also provides the ability to create layers for a given network or sector loads. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377. The rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel are used when layers are generated using the rapid planning option. Unlike the Monte Carlo method, which obtains many values required to compute analysis layers from the operating points file, the Rapid Planning method does not generate an operating points file. Instead, the Rapid Planning method derives most of the values required to compute analysis layers from the Powers panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. The Current

Table 16.1 Search window settings

Index Value Window Size (Chips)

0 4

1 6

2 8

3 10

4 14

5 20

6 28

7 40

8 60

9 80

10 100

11 130

12 160

13 226

14 320

15 452

343


Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power values are the two exceptions; to determine these values, the Reverse Noise Rise and Forward Total Traffic Power values should be manually defined for the sector.

The Reverse Noise Rise value is used to calculate equivalent Current Total Receive Power, which is required to compute all reverse link analysis layers. The Forward Total Traffic Power is used to calculate Total Traffic Transmit Power, which is used to compute most pilot and reverse link analysis layers. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power are also used to compute the Other - Path Balance layer.For more information, see “To define implementation settings” on page 349.

Quality settings for cdma2000Quality settings enable you to define settings related to the quality of service for the sector, including, among others, the maximum number of subscribers, maximum speed of vehicular subscribers, and the handover margin.The maximum speed assigned to the sector is used to determine whether subscribers in a vehicular environment will be served by the sector. Vehicular subscribers have an expected speed associated with them depending on the clutter class in which the service is being provided. This speed is defined when you create clutter types (see “Defining clutter types for cdma2000” on page 294). Subscribers in all environments other than vehicular are assigned a fixed speed of 3 km/h. If the vehicular subscriber speed exceeds the maximum, then the subscriber is not served by the sector. This enables you to ensure that fast-moving subscribers are not served by certain sectors (for example, microcells). The maximum speed is used when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, During the random pattern generation phase, if a randomly generated subscriber has an associated speed that exceeds the sector limit, the subscriber will not be served by the sector.For more information, see “To define quality settings” on page 350.

If you do not define these values manually, you can enable the Override All Cell Loads option on the System panel of the Analysis

Settings dialog box, and define values for Forward Available Traffic Power and Reverse Load. For more information, see “To define rapid planning system settings for cdma2000” on page 384.

344


Power settings for cdma2000Power settings enable you to define the power requirements for the sector, including the limits for pilot power, control channels, and traffic power.For more information, see “To define cdma2000 power settings” on page 351.

To assign carriers to sectors 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, double-click a site.


2 In the Site Properties dialog box, on the Sectors tab, click cdma2000 Settings.

The Carriers panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box opens by default.

3 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check boxes next to the carrier IDs that you want to assign to the sector.

Only the technology bands that are assigned the cdma2000 technology are displayed in this section. When you enable a carrier, the carrier is added to the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box tree view. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see “Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000” on page 274.


345


To define hardware settings 1 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Hardware. 2 On the Hardware panel, in the Throughput Per Carrier section, type

values in any of the following boxes:■ Maximum Pooled Forward Throughput—the maximum

throughput for all traffic on the same carrier of the site■ Maximum Packet Throughput—the proportion of the

maximum throughput that is allowed for packet sessions (not applicable to EV-DO carriers)

■ Maximum Circuit Throughput—the proportion of the maximum throughput that is allowed for circuit sessions (not applicable to EV-DO carriers)

The sum of the maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput can exceed 100%, but within the analysis, the total of maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput cannot total more than 100%.

Throughput for an analysis is calculated using the number of subscribers carried multiplied by the rate used for each subscriber modified by the activity factor (which is dependent on the bearer used for the service).

3 In the Base Station Link Budget section, if you want to modify any of the values, click Base Station Link Budget.

The values shown in this section are read-only, and are calculated using the Base Station Link Budget tool. For information on using the Base Station Link Budget tool, see “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331.


If you open the Base Station Link Budget tool from the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, the carrier displayed is the carrier from

which the tool was launched. If the carrier is an EV-DO carrier, the Pilot Power column and the Percentage column are read only columns.

346


To define sector resources 1 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Resources. 2 On the Resources panel, in the Walsh Codes section, type a value in the

Maximum Number of Codes box to define the maximum number of codes that can be allocated to traffic channels.

Walsh Codes are not applicable to EV-DO carriers.

3 In the Reverse Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:■ Total Available For The Site—displays the number of channel





■ Additional For Handoff—the number of channel elements allocated for handoff for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handoff, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handoff, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handoff are available.

For EV-DO carriers, channel elements are accounted for on the reverse link and for 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers, channel elements are accounted for on the forward link. For details on how these values are used to calculate

347


the Total Available For the Site and Total Dedicated For the Sector values, press the F1 key.

4 In the Forward Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:■ Total Available For The Site—displays the number of channel





■ Additional For Handoff—the number of channel elements allocated for handoff for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handoff, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handoff, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handoff are available.


348


To define implementation settings 1 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Implementation.2 If you want to assign PN offset information to the sector to generate a PN

offset plan, do the following:■ If you want to assign a specific PN offset value to this sector, in

the PN Offset box, type a PN offset value. For more information on PN offsets, see “Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans” on page 463.

■ Edit the PN offset search window sizes or accept the defaults:■ SRCH_WIN_A—an index value corresponding to the

size of the search window associated with the set of active and candidate pilots

■ SRCH_WIN_N—an index value corresponding to the size of the search window associated with the set of neighbor pilots

The valid index values and corresponding window sizes (in chips) are shown in Table 16.1 on page 343.

3 Beside the Scheduler Gain Curve box, do one of the following to define the BTS scheduler gain:■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the scheduler

gain curve, and click Open.■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a scheduler gain


If you do not assign a Scheduler Gain curve, Mentum Planet assumes that there is no gain.

349


4 In the Rapid Planning section, define the settings for rapid planning:■ Reverse Noise Rise—the noise rise in the receiver, above the

thermal noise floor, generated by traffic links.■ Forward Total Traffic Power—the total traffic transmit power

for the sector.■ Forward Activity Factor—for EV-DO sectors, the average

ratio of non-idle traffic slots to the total number of traffic slots.

For information on how these values are used, see “Rapid planning settings” on page 343.


To define quality settings 1 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Quality. 2 On the Quality panel, in the Quality Parameters section, type values in

any of the following boxes:■ Pilot Detection Threshold—the minimum pilot signal-to-noise

ratio (Ec/Io) value required for adding a pilot to the active set. If no pilot signal has an Ec/Io above the pilot detection threshold, when a subscriber attempts a connection, the call will be refused.

■

■ Maximum Noise Rise—the maximum noise rise permitted for the sector. This value is used to limit the number of users in a system based on noise rise.

■ Mac Index/Maximum Users (Per Sector)—the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector, or, for EV-DO sectors, the maximum number of active users permitted.

■ T Drop—the threshold value for removing a pilot from the active set. If a pilot has an Ec/Io that falls below the T Drop value, it is removed from the active set. If the pilot signal is above the T Drop threshold, then it is a candidate for the active set. The number of servers in the active set is limited to the value defined in the Maximum Active Servers box in the relevant Mobile Equipment Technology Band. For example, if the number of active servers is set to three and the fourth server is within the T Drop threshold, then the fourth server is a polluter.

350


This value is used when generating pilot pollution analysis layers. For more information on pilot pollution analysis layers, see “Pilot analysis” on page 407.

■ Maximum Intra-Site Servers—the maximum number servers from the same site that are permitted for this sector

■ Maximum Cell Radius—the maximum cell radius permitted for this sector

■ Maximum Speed—the maximum speed permitted for this sector


To define cdma2000 power settings 1 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the

carrier that you want to define and choose Powers. 2 On the Powers panel, from the Transmit Power Parameters In list,

choose the unit in which the transmit power settings are defined.3 In the Absolute Power Values section, type a value in the Total PA

Power box to define the maximum power output by the sector's power amplifier (PA).

The Total PA Power value and the PA Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331.

EV-DO carriers use all of the PA power for the pilot whereas 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers use only a portion of it.

4 To define pilot power, do one of the following (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):■ To define a fixed value for the pilot power, type a value in the

Fixed Pilot Power box. The Fixed Pilot Power value and the Pilot Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget

351


calculations. For more information, see “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331.

■ To automatically optimize pilot power, enable the Optimize Pilot check box and define the range of Pilot values in the Maximum Pilot Power and Minimum Pilot Power boxes.

If you choose to optimize pilot power, the analysis calculates the required pilot power to ensure that all the users achieve the required Ec/Io (Monte Carlo analyses only).

5 In the Control Powers (Relative to Pilot Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):■ Relative Sync Power—the synchronization channel power

relative to the pilot power■ Relative Paging Power—the power for the paging channel and

other overhead channels relative to the pilot power. Other overhead channels include the broadcast control, quick paging, common power control, and common assignment channels.

6 In the Traffic Power Limits (Relative to Max Pilot Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):■ Maximum Traffic Channel Power—the maximum service

power for a single traffic channel relative to the maximum pilot power. Note that it is also possible to define the Maximum Traffic Channel Power for individual bearers (excluding EV-DO bearers) using the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset value in the Edit - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.

■ Minimum Traffic Channel Power—the minimum service power for a single traffic channel relative to the maximum pilot power. Note that it is also possible to define the Minimum Traffic Channel Power for individual bearers (excluding EV-DO bearers) using the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset value in the Edit - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.

7 In the Other User Interference section, type a value in the Average Reverse ACK Interference Power box to define the interference for the acknowledgement (ACK) channel.

352


8 For EV-DO carriers, in the Idle Transmission Attenuation box, type a value to define the idle transmission power from the PA during traffic time slots to be used when the sector has no served subscribers.


Editing sites and sectorsYou can edit individual sites or you can use the Global Editor to edit one or more sites.

To edit a site 1 Do one of the following:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click on the site that you want to edit and choose Edit.

■ Click the Edit Site button on the Site toolbar and then click in the Map window on the site that you want to edit.


2 If there is more than one site at the chosen location, choose the site you want to edit from the Editing Site list.

3 Do one of the following:■ Modify any of the site properties and save them as a new

configuration if required. For information, see “Creating cdma2000 sites” on page 329.

■ Load an existing configuration by choosing File ➤ Open Configuration.

4 Click Apply to update your project.5 Click Close.

To globally edit cdma2000 sectors

You can easily edit cdma2000-specific sector properties for individual carriers assigned to sites in your project or for a particular group of sites using the cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box. You can also add or remove carriers from sites.The cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box is different from the standard Global Edit dialog box that you can use with other technologies because it only contains settings that are specific to cdma2000. For more information on the

353


standard Global Edit dialog box, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:■ To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and

choose Global Edit ➤ cdma2000.■ To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites,

right-click and choose Global Edit ➤ cdma2000.■ To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the

group and choose Global Edit ➤ cdma2000.■ To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category,

enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags and choose Global Edit ➤ cdma2000.

The cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box opens.

If you are modifying the cdma2000 power values, you have the option of viewing data in dBm or Watts. However, if you want to modify the

Average PRACH Interference Power, you will only be able to use the full range of values available for the field if you are using the dBm option.If you prefer to use Watts, you can use the Watts option when you are modifying other power values, and then change the units to dBm before modifying the value for PRACH.

354


2 In the Sector Selection section, choose one of the following options:■ All—apply changes to all sectors■ Current Selection—apply changes to the sectors that are

selected in the Map window. For more information, see the “Choosing sites” section in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Group—apply changes only to sectors in group chosen from the list

355


3 In the Carrier Selection section, choose one of the following options from the Action list for each carrier ID that the changes affect:■ Modify Existing—modify the sector settings for existing

carriers■ Modify/Create—add a new carrier to the sector and modify the

sector settings for existing carriers■ Delete—delete this carrier from the sector■ Do Not Modify—do not modify the sector settings for this

carrier4 In the Cell Equipment Parameters section, enable the check box beside

each setting that you want to update in the chosen table, click in the Value column and type a new value for each setting.

5 Click Apply to update the settings and then click Close.

Deleting sitesYou can delete sites using the Project Explorer or the Map window.

To delete a site ■ Do one of the following:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site, choose Delete, and click Yes to confirm the deletion.

■ In the Map window, choose the site, right-click and choose Delete, and then click Delete to confirm the deletion.

Viewing cdma2000 carrier assignment and interference information

Once you have created a project and assigned carriers to sectors, you can use the Carrier In-Map Display tool to view co-channel and adjacent channel interference in the Map window. You can also view carrier allocation information.

356


To view cdma2000 frequency assignment and interference information1 On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Carrier In-Map Display

button, and then click in the Map window near the sector for which you want to view interference information.

If you want to view only carrier allocation information, you can click anywhere in the Map window.

The Carrier In-Map Display window opens with the Interactive tab open by default. The Sector ID box shows the name of the sector closest to where you clicked in the Map window and the Technology box displays the sector assigned to the sector.

The display in the Map window updates to identify sectors in the Map window that are co-channel interferers with the selected sector. For each sector that is a co-channel interferer, the numbers of the carriers that cause co-channel interference are displayed in the Map window. For the selected sector, carrier information is displayed in red.

357


2 Do any of the following:■ To view other types of interference in the Map window, from the

View list, choose the type of interference that you want to view. The display in the Map window updates to show the interferers.

■ To choose another sector for which to view interference information, click in the Map window near the sector.

■ To display the results again for a sector that you selected previously, choose the sector from the Sector ID list.

3 If you want to view information in the Map window about frequency allocation, click the Sector Selection tab.

4 From the View in Map Window list, choose Carriers.5 From the Technology list, choose cdma2000.

The list section of the dialog box updates to show all of the carriers assigned to the technology.

6 Choose one or more of the listed items to display in the Map window and click Display.

7 In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which you want to display the information.

358


8 If you want to choose a different group of sectors for which to display the selected information, click Update Selection, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose another group of sectors and click OK.

9 If you want to clear the display, click Clear.

Visibility of the Carrier In-Map Display is affected by the same settings that control the visibility of site labels. If you cannot see the sector

information in the Map window, see “Displaying and formatting site labels” in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide for information about changing the appearance of labels.

359


360

Chapter 17: Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors

17.
Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors

repeaters■ Workflow for adding repeaters

to cdma2000 sectors■ Adding repeaters to

cdma2000 sectors■ Repeaters and cdma2000

predictions■ Locating repeaters in a Map

window

This chapter describes how to add repeaters to

cdma2000 sectors in your project.

361


Understanding cdma2000 repeaters Repeaters are used to retransmit signals received from donor sectors to locations that have insufficient coverage. For example, repeaters can be used to extend coverage or fill in shadow areas caused by hills, large buildings, and other structures that obstruct signals.A repeater receives a signal from the donor antenna of a donor sector, and then amplifies and retransmits the signal through its service antenna. Repeaters are primarily used to reduce path loss without providing an increase in network capacity. Generally, repeaters add noise and amplify noise in the reverse, which can limit their effectiveness; however, a well placed repeater can reduce noise levels within a cdma2000 network and enhance the overall capacity.Implementing repeaters can be an efficient and cost-effective method of increasing the received signal strength for mobiles in an area without having to place additional sites.A repeater’s power is defined by its Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP). EIRP measures the maximum radiated power in the direction of the maximum gain relative to an isotropic antenna (typically in the direction the antenna is pointing).The EIRP of cdma2000 repeaters is based on the pilot power of the first active carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 17.1.

Equation 17.1 Repeater EIRP

If a sector has EV-DO and 1xRTT or IS-95 carriers, the first carrier refers to the first 1xRTT or IS-95 carrier. If a sector has only EV-DO carriers, the repeater EIRP is based on the sector PA power of the first EV-DO carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 17.1.

Equation 17.1 Repeater EIRP for EV-DO carriers

Where:Pilot Power is the pilot power of the first carrier from the cdma2000 Sector Settings of the donor sector.

Lm is the masked path loss between the base station transmitter and the repeater.

Repeater EIRP = Pilot Power – Lm + GD+ LD+ GR – LR – LS + GS

Repeater EIRP = Sector PA Power – Lm + GD+ LD+ GR – LR – LS + GS

362

Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 SectorsCDMA User Guide

GD is the repeater donor antenna gain.

LD is the repeater donor antenna system loss (typically feeder loss).

GR is the repeater gain.

LR is the repeater loss.

LS is the repeater service antenna system loss (typically feeder loss).

GS is the repeater service antenna gain.

Repeaters and cdma2000 predictionsWhen you generate predictions for a sector that has one or more repeaters assigned to it, signal strength grid (.grd) files are generated for the sector and for each repeater. cdma2000 analyses use the separate predictions for the donor sectors and repeaters.A combined signal strength file is also generated, which merges the separate sector and repeater signal strength files. Combined signal strength predictions are used when the full coverage area of a sector is required, such as when you generate a traffic map or interference matrix, or analyze the interference between two sectors.After you have generated predictions for a sector, you can choose to view a prediction for the donor sector or individual repeaters. You can also view a combined prediction that displays the combined signal strengths of the donor sector and all of its repeaters. For information on generating and viewing predictions, see “Chapter 8: Generating Predictions” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Workflow for adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectorsStep 1 Configure and place cdma2000 sites. See “Chapter 16:

Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites” on page 327.

Step 2 Add repeaters to sectors with insufficient coverage. See “Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors” on page 363.

Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectorsTo add a repeater to a sector, you must define general settings, such as the donor sector for which the repeater will retransmit a signal, and the location of

363


the repeater. You must also define settings for service and donor antennas, predictions, repeater links, and carriers.You can add repeaters manually or you can import them from an existing file.

To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the sector to

which you want to add a repeater, and choose Add Repeater.2 Click in the Map window in the location where you want to add the

repeater.

The Repeater Settings dialog box opens with the general settings panel selected by default.

3 In the Repeater-Site ID box, type a unique name for the repeater.4 If you want to add additional information, such as the associated Site ID,

in the Repeater-Site UID box, type an identifier or description.5 If you want to change the donor sector, choose a sector from the list.

364


6 Do one of the following to define the status of the repeater:■ To set the repeater as active, enable the Active check box.■ To set the repeater as inactive, clear the Active check box.

Inactive repeaters are not used for predictions or analyses.

7 If you want to change the symbol and color settings used to represent active or inactive repeaters in the Map window, in the Color/Symbol for All Repeaters section, click the Active or Inactive swatch, choose the font, font size, symbol, color, rotation angle, background, and effects, and then click OK.

You can only change the symbol and color settings for the status (Active or Inactive) that you applied to the repeater in Step 6. The symbol and color settings will be applied to all Active or Inactive repeaters.

8 In the Repeater Connection Type section, choose one of the following options:■ RF—an antenna is used for communication between the donor

sector and the repeater.■ Fiber—a fiber-optic link is used for communication between the

donor sector and the repeater.

If you choose the Fiber option, the donor antenna settings do not apply (see “To define donor antenna settings for repeaters” on page 369).

9 If you want to place the service antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Service Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes.

The values displayed by default correspond to the location that you clicked in the Map window in Step 2.

10 If you want to place the donor antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Donor Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes.

By default, the donor antenna and service antenna are placed at the same location.

11 Define the service antenna settings.

See “To define service antenna settings for repeaters” on page 367.

12 If you chose the RF option in Step 8, define the donor antenna settings.

See “To define donor antenna settings for repeaters” on page 369.

365


13 Define the repeater prediction settings.

See “To define repeater prediction settings” on page 371.

14 Define the repeater equipment settings.

See “To define repeater equipment settings” on page 373.

15 Define the repeater carrier settings.

See “To define repeater carrier settings” on page 375.

16 Click Create to add the repeater to the sector, and then click Close to close the Repeater Settings dialog box.

The repeater is displayed in the Sites category of the Project Explorer under both the Repeaters node and the chosen donor sector.

You can also change the status of a repeater by right-clicking a repeater node in the Project Explorer and choosing Activate Repeater

or Deactivate Repeater.

366


To define service antenna settings for repeaters1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Service

Antenna.

2 On the Service Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list.

This is the pattern that the service antenna will use to retransmit the signal received from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.



367



For information on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 Type values in the following boxes:■ Azimuth—the horizontal direction the service antenna looks

towards. An azimuth value of 0 degrees is true north, 90 degrees is east, 180 degrees is south, and 270 degrees is west. As you rotate clockwise, the azimuth increases.

■ Tilt—the number of degrees that a service antenna is tilted upward or downward. A positive (+) tilt value points the antenna upwards, while a negative (-) tilt value points the antenna downwards.

■ Twist—the number of degrees that a service antenna is twisted counter-clockwise or clockwise. A positive (+) twist value rotates the antenna counter-clockwise, while a negative (-) twist value rotates the antenna clockwise.

■ Height—the height of the service antenna from ground level.6 In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:

■ Use DEM Elevation—sets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file.


7 In the System Losses box, type a value for the service antenna system feeder loss or any additional antenna system-related losses.


368


To define donor antenna settings for repeaters

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Donor Antenna.

2 On the Donor Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list.

This is the pattern that the donor antenna will use to receive the signal from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.



Donor antenna settings only apply if the repeater type is RF. If a fiber-optic connection is used between the donor and service antenna, the

donor antenna settings do not apply. For more information, see “To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors” on page 364.

369



For details on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 In the Height box, type the height of the donor antenna from ground level.

6 In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:■ Use DEM Elevation—sets the elevation height based on the

repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. This is the default option.


7 In the System Losses box, type a value for donor antenna system feeder loss or any other antenna system-related losses.

The Isolation box indicates the calculated value of isolation between antennas (masked path loss). For an accurate isolation value, the antenna patterns assigned to the repeater must have a full definition of the vertical pattern (all angles).


370


To define repeater prediction settings1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Predictions.

2 On the Predictions panel, choose a propagation model from the Propagation Model list.

3 In the Number of Radials box, type the number of radials to be used in the prediction.

Prediction calculations are performed along radial lines. A higher number of radials will produce more accurate results, but the calculation will take more time.

4 In the Propagation Distance box, type the maximum distance from the repeater for which the signal strength will be calculated.

371


5 Do one of the following:■ In the Masked Path Loss from Donor box, type a value for the

repeater amplifier system loss.■ Click Calculate, and in the Calculate Masked Path Loss dialog

box, type a value for any other known losses in the Additional Losses box, choose the propagation model you want to use to calculate the path loss, and click OK. The value in the Masked Path Loss from Donor box is automatically updated.


For maximum accuracy, enter a measured value of pathloss in the Masked Path Loss From Donor box. The measured pathloss can be

determined by measuring the signal strength with a known EIRP from the donor sector. If you choose to calculate the masked path loss, ensure you specify an appropriate model. The most appropriate propagation model will depend on the specifics of the environment between donor sector and the repeater donor antenna. If you suspect obstruction at the repeater location, choose a deterministic model with the correct receiver height. You may need to create a model specifically for repeater installations.Mentum Planet will not update the stored masked pathloss automatically, even if the current value is generated using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box. If there are changes to the network that would impact the pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, you must apply a new value to the repeater, either by manually entering a new value in the Repeater Settings dialog box or re-calculating the value using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box.

372


To define repeater equipment settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Equipment.

The gain of a repeater in Mentum Planet is maintained at a constant level. Any changes to the donor sector and repeater system that affect

the power received by the repeater will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. For example, a change in the masked pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, the donor sector’s pilot power, or the antenna system at the donor sector which results in a change to the EIRP of the sector, will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. The EIRP value at the repeater will also change in line with a change in either of the repeater’s antenna systems. As such, it is important to review repeater settings following any changes of this nature.

373


2 On the Equipment panel, do either of the following to define the repeater EIRP:■ In the Power EIRP box, type the pilot EIRP based on the pilot

power of the first carrier on the donor sector. The value in the System Loss box is updated based on the value you enter.

■ In the Gain box, type a value for the repeater system gain. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.

3 In the System Loss box, type a value for the repeater system loss.

The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.

4 In the Noise Figure box, type a value for the noise contribution of the repeater to the uplink.

5 In the Forward Max Power Per Carrier box, type a value for the achievable limit of power for the carrier.

6 In the Reverse Eb/No adjustment box, type a value for any adjustment that should be applied to the required Eb/No for signals through the repeater in the reverse path.

This value can be used to take into account the effects of the fixed path of signals through the repeater, for example, to simulate the effect of a lack of diversity gain on repeated signals at the donor sector.


374


To define repeater carrier settings1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Carriers.

2 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check box beside each of the carriers that you want assigned to the repeater.

All of the carriers assigned to the donor sector are enabled by default.


To edit repeater settingsAfter you have added a repeater to a sector, you can edit the repeater at any time.

1 In the Project Explorer, in the tree view of the Sites category, expand the site and sector to which the repeater belongs.

2 Right-click the repeater that you want to edit and choose Edit.

The Repeater Settings dialog box opens.

375


3 If you want to change the donor sector (re-parent), choose a sector from the Donor Sector list.

4 Modify the other repeater settings as required.

For information, see “Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors” on page 363.

5 Click Apply and then click Close.

Locating repeaters in a Map window You can use the Project Explorer to locate repeaters in a Map window.

To locate repeaters in a Map window■ In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the repeater

and choose Locate.

The repeater is selected in the Map window.

You can also access all of the repeaters in your project from the Repeaters node in the Sites category of the Project Explorer.

376

Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000

18.
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding rapid planning

for cdma2000■ Understanding data rate

negotiation■ Workflow for generating a

rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

■ Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings

■ Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

■ Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000

■ Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning

■ Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000

■ Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

■ Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information

■ Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers

■ Deleting analyses

This chapter describes how to generate a rapid

planning analysis and view results.

A rapid planning analysis provides a quick

simulation of your network. You can use the results

of a rapid planning analysis to make adjustments to

your project settings and then run a more detailed

Monte Carlo analysis.

377


Understanding rapid planning for cdma2000Rapid planning uses minimal settings to generate a set of analysis layers that you can use to analyze your network quickly. The analysis runs only once and generates analysis layers automatically (as opposed to a Monte Carlo analysis, for which you can generate layers automatically or as a separate step). A rapid planning analysis does not require as much time as a Monte Carlo analysis, but it also does not generate the detailed subscriber information that is generated with a Monte Carlo analysis. For more information on Monte Carlo simulations, see “Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000” on page 398.

Prediction view files for cdma2000 analyses Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. By default, prediction view files are created when you generate an analysis. Using prediction view files is optional. You can determine whether or not to use them by considering the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. See “Optimizing cdma2000 analyses” on page 416 for more information.

cdma2000 analysis layers The analysis layers that you can generate using rapid planning depend on whether you choose to use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager or a nominal subscriber. For more information on choosing subscribers, see “Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning” on page 386.

■ If you use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager, the layers available are the same as the analysis layers available when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation, with the exception of the Forward - Throughput and Reverse - Throughput analysis layers. Throughput layers are not available for rapid planning.

■ If you use a nominal subscriber, the throughput layers are not available, and the Pilot - Pollution Index layer is also not available, because no traffic map is used in this kind of rapid planning analysis.

For details on each analysis layer, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

378

Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000CDMA User Guide

Understanding data rate negotiationBy default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 18.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates and that IS-95 is limited to cdma2000 radio configurations RC1 and RC2. It is also assumed that EV-DO traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.

Table 18.1 Data rate negotiation process for cdma2000


Subscriber Manager.



IS-95 & 1xRTT & EV-DO IS-95 & 1xRTT 1xRTT &

EV-DOEV-DO Only


Carried on 1xRTT), then on IS-95 (fixed rate)

Carried on 1xRTT then on IS-95 (fixed rate)

Carried on 1xRTT (fixed rate)

Not carried


Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95


Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT

Not carried

Circuit streaming Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95

Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT ten within IS-95


Not carried

379


Data rate downgradingIn the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 18.1 on page 379 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the EV-DO network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.



■ review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector- mobile report. See “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.


Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95


Negotiated within 1xRTT

Not carried


Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT, then within IS-95


Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT

Negotiated within EV-DO




EV-DOEV-DO Only

380


Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

Step 1 Define prediction view settings. See “Optimizing cdma2000 analyses” on page 416.

Step 2 Define rapid planning settings for the sectors that you want to include in your analysis. See “To define implementation settings” on page 349.

Step 3 If you want to use the same settings for a number of analyses, define default analysis settings. See “Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings” on page 381.

Step 4 Create a new rapid planning analysis. See “Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000” on page 382.

Step 5 Define the analysis settings and generate the analysis. See “Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000” on page 384.

Step 6 View the results of the analysis. See “Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 394.

Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settingsIf you want to use the same settings for a number of rapid planning analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.

381


To define default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings.2 Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK.


■ “Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000” on page 384

■ “Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning” on page 386

■ “Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000” on page 391

Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the cdma2000 Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.

A Monte Carlo analysis takes more time than rapid planning, but generates detailed subscriber information that a rapid planning analysis does not. For

The Runtime Parameters settings in the Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings dialog box apply only to Monte Carlo analyses. For more

information, see “To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427.

A rapid planning analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the cdma2000 technology. If you want to


382


more information on Monte Carlo analyses, see “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

To create a new rapid planning analysis for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose New Network Analysis.

The cdma2000 Analysis dialog box opens.

2 In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis.3 In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.4 From the Analysis Mode list, choose Rapid Planning and click OK.

A new cdma2000 analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.



If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node, choose Select Sectors,

and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use, and click Continue.If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see “Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000” on page 393.

383


To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses nodeIf you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the cdma2000 Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.

1 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the cdma2000_Analyses folder in the current project folder.

2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses.


Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000System settings enable you to define network characteristics that you want to simulation in your analysis (e.g., slow fading and soft handoff gain).

To define rapid planning system settings for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate.

The cdma2000 Simulation dialog box opens.


384


3 If you want to calculate soft handoff gain due to macro-diversity, enable the Use Soft Handoff Gain check box.

If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handoff will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handoff gain is not taken into account for the reverse link analysis for the mobile.

4 From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer.

The Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the third best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the third best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.

385


5 If you want to override the rapid planning settings on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel for this analysis, enable the Override All Cell Loads check box and type values for the following:■ Reverse Load—the percentage of cell loading that you want to

target for the reverse link■ Forward Available Traffic Power—the percentage of available

power for traffic that you want to target for the forward link cell loading. For example, a value of 75 means that only 75% of the available traffic power (i.e., PA power minus overhead power) is used in the analysis; a value of 100 means that all of the available traffic power is used. This parameter does not apply to EV-DO carriers.

■ EV-DO Forward Activity Factor—the average ratio of non-idle traffic slots to the total number of traffic slots.

Typically, you would use the Override All Cell Loads option if you are doing nominal planning or network dimensioning. If you are optimizing an existing network using switch statistics, you would use the rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel for the sector.


Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning When you choose subscriber types for a rapid planning analysis, you have two options:

■ You can choose a subscriber type that you have defined using the Subscriber Manager. For information on the Subscriber Manager, see “Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers” on page 289.

■ You can choose the Nominal Subscriber type, which enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics for a simple rapid planning analysis. This option is available only for rapid planning.

The Monte Carlo planning option requires the detailed information provided by the Subscriber Manager.

386


To choose a defined subscriber type for cdma2000 rapid planning1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree

view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, choose the Subscriber Manager option.3 Enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include

in the analysis.4 Choose another item in the tree view.

To choose a nominal subscriber for cdma2000 rapid planning Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define the minimum subscriber settings required to run a rapid planning analysis.

387


1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, choose the Nominal Subscriber option.

388


3 On the Nominal Subscribers tab, in the Mobile Equipment section, define values for the following:■ Max Transmit Power—maximum transmit power at the mobile

power amplifier in the box.■ Antenna Gain—the antenna gain for the mobile equipment

band type used by the nominal subscriber type ■ Body Loss—the signal loss as a result of the proximity of

objects located near the transmitter.■ Max Active Servers—the maximum number of handoff servers

supported by the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use

■ Noise Figure—the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use

4 In the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box, type a value to define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered.

The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Forward - Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.

5 From the Environment list, choose one of the following environment types for the nominal subscriber:■ Outdoor—open air environments■ Indoor—buildings or structures■ Deep Indoor—dense buildings, such as office towers■ Vehicular—moving vehicles

In order to view results for a chosen environment, you must have specified the environment parameters in the New Clutter Type or Edit Clutter Type dialog box in the Subscriber Manager and you must have assigned the clutter classes to the appropriate clutter types.

6 Click the Nominal Bearers tab.

389


7 In the Forward Bearer section, define values for the following:■ Required Forward Fundamental Eb/No—the received signal-

to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the fundamental channel for a given quality, such as FER, on the forward link.

■ Required Forward Supplemental Eb/No—the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the supplemental channels for a given quality, such as FER, on the forward link.

■ Forward Radio Configuration—choose the radio configuration to use for the forward link.

You can choose from RC1 to RC5. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate of 1. Configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported. For more information on the permitted radio configuration combinations for the forward and reverse link, see Table 15.2 on page 322.

■ Forward Service Traffic Rate—the data rate for the forward link.

■ Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset—the maximum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber.

This box, in conjunction with the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.

■ Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset—the minimum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber.

This box, in conjunction with the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a per-

390


sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.

■ Forward Fundamental Eb/No to FER—do one of the following:

■ Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to FER curve, and click Open.

■ Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER curve, and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.

For details about how the Eb/No to FER curve is used, see “Defining cdma2000 bearers” on page 299.

8 In the Reverse Bearer section, define values for the following:■ In the Required Reverse Fundamental Eb/No box, type the

received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the fundamental channel for a given quality, such as FER, on the reverse link.

■ In the Required Reverse Supplemental Eb/No box, type the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the supplemental channels for a given quality, such as FER, on the reverse link.

■ From the Reverse Radio Configuration list, choose the radio configuration for the reverse link.

You can choose from RC1 to RC4. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate (SR) of 1. Configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported. For more information on the permitted radio configuration combinations for the forward and reverse link, see Table 15.2 on page 322.

■ In the Reverse box, type the data rate for the reverse traffic.9 Choose another item in the tree view.

Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 The analysis area is the area over which the analysis is computed. You have the option of using the full area covered by the analysis or defining boundaries to limit the analysis area. By limiting the analysis area, you can significantly reduce the computation time by eliminating all of the areas in which you are not interested.

391


To define rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma20001 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the

tree view.2 On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:

■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions


■ Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes■ Click Update Bounds With Active View if you have

resized or zoomed your Map window. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window.

■ Use An Analysis Grid—enables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, “Working with the Grid Manager”, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

■ Use An Area Grid—enables you to choose a predefined area grid. For information on creating area grids, see Chapter 14, “Working with Grids”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.




392


Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 Before generating a rapid planning analysis, you must define the settings on each panel in the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box as described in “Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000” on page 384.

To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma20001 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, click Analyze.2 If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select


3 In the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK.

By default, the check boxes are enabled for all of the layers that you chose in the analysis layer filter.

A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include the layers in the analysis.

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information You can generate a network analysis for sectors identified with certain flags and conditions. For example, you could generate a network analysis for sites in Phase 1 that are installed and operational. To do this, you define the flags and conditions, and then generate a network analysis. In the Select Sectors dialog box, you choose the Flags Filter. For more information on flags and conditions, see “Working with flags”, in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.




generate and choose Generate.

393


5 Define the analysis settings as described starting in “Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000” on page 384, and then follow the procedure described in “To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000” on page 393.

Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers Once you have generated your analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.

To view cdma2000 analysis layers■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category,

right-click an analysis layer under the cdma2000 Analysis node and choose View.





right-click and choose Delete.

To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the cdma2000



“Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

394


2 In the Mentum Planet dialog box, click Yes.


395


396

Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000

19.
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding Monte Carlo

analyses for cdma2000■ Understanding cdma2000

analysis layers■ Workflow for generating a

Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

■ Optimizing cdma2000 analyses

■ Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings

■ Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

■ Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000

■ Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

■ Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000

■ Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis

■ Generating cdma2000 analysis layers

■ Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers

■ Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectorsThis chapter describes how to generate a Monte

Carlo analysis for cdma20000 and view results.

A Monte Carlo analysis generates:

■ information about sectors, carriers and subscribers in your network

■ analysis layersYou can also generate a rapid planning analysis,

which provides only analysis layers, but takes less

time. For more information on rapid planning, see

“Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses

for cdma2000” on page 377.

397


Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000A Monte Carlo analysis uses Monte Carlo simulation techniques to determine the characteristics of your network over repeated runs.A run consists of the distribution of random numbers of subscribers throughout the analysis area in a random pattern, and an analysis of the reverse link and forward link. On the last run, operating points and discrete subscriber information are generated. Once the runs are completed, you can view the results and generate analysis layers (either automatically or as a separate step).Statistically, individual runs are of little value. However, over many Monte Carlo runs, the average result provides a realistic representation of network performance. The results are averaged to create the operating points that are used when you generate analysis layers. The following sections describe the phases of a Monte Carlo run and explain the methods for determining how many runs are required.

Monte Carlo phasesThis section explains the phases of a Monte Carlo run:

■ placing subscribers in a random pattern■ reverse link and forward link analysis■ generation of operating points and subscriber information

Placing subscribers in a random patternEach run begins with the placement of subscribers in a random pattern throughout the analysis area. This pattern is created using input values from the carriers defined for the band and the subscribers defined in the Subscriber Manager. The random distribution pattern corresponds to the traffic map, and is an efficient method for establishing transmission patterns when the exact location of each subscriber cannot be established.

Analyzing the reverse link and forward linkThe goal of the reverse link and forward link analysis phase is to determine the subscribers that can be served, taking into account the impact of each served subscriber on the network.The reverse link analysis begins by considering the subscribers in the simulation, then the serving sectors for each subscriber.

398

Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000CDMA User Guide

The reverse link analysis ■ determines the best reverse link server that is also the best

forward link server■ identifies the second and third best reverse link servers■ calculates the handoff gain based on the degree of correlation of

the active serving sectors and adjusts the reverse link power accordingly


■ calculates the noise rise and checks that the limit is not exceeded on all sectors

■ checks that the cell radius and speed limit are not exceededThe forward link analysis

■ calculates the required forward link power of the serving sector■ determines whether the received serving sector pilot power-to-

interference ratio (Ec/Io) is above the target■ calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks

that the required coverage probability is achieved■ checks that the channel element, user limit, PA power,

throughput, and code limits are not exceededThe analysis also checks the carrier soft limits for noise rise and PA threshold, as defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. Subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.

Generating operating points and subscriber information On the last run, operating points and subscriber information are generated. Operating points provide detailed information about each sector, carrier, and subscriber type in the analysis. The operating points are averaged and stored.You can view the actual values (i.e., standard deviation and range) of the operating points by opening the operating points text (.txt) file that is stored in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project. For more information on

399


operating points, see “Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format” on page 545.You can also view the mean values of the operating points by designing a report using one of the following types of report data:

■ System-mobile■ Carrier-sector■ Carrier-sector-mobile■ Throughput

For more information, see “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.Subscriber information provides details on the coverage status of subscribers (also known as discrete subscribers). Snapshots of each subscriber’s status are compiled on each run of the simulation. When the simulation is complete, the coverage status of each subscriber is displayed automatically in the Map window. The discrete subscriber information is also stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) that you can view. For more information, see “Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 543. In order to get a visual snapshot of the results of data rate negotiation across the network, you can create a traffic map that highlights unserved subscribers. The unserved traffic maps are created using the discrete subscribers table that is generated during a Monte-Carlo analysis. See “Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map” on page 435.

Defining the number of Monte Carlo runsBefore you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, you must define the number of runs to complete. You have two options for determining the number of runs:

■ user-defined method■ convergence method

These options are defined on the Runtime Parameters panel of the cdma2000 Simulation tool dialog box, and are described in detail in the following sections. You can choose either the user-defined method, or the convergence method, or you can choose a combination of both methods. For more information on the Runtime Parameters panel, see “To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427.

400


User-defined method Using the Fixed Number of Runs option on the Runtime Parameters panel, you can define the exact number of runs to complete in the Monte Carlo analysis.You need to consider the minimum number of runs that will present an accurate model of the system; with too few runs, the results will not accurately reflect the distribution of subscribers within the network. Too many runs will not degrade the outputs of the analysis, but may take a long time. If the analysis does not achieve what you consider to be an accurate model of the network using the number of runs that you specified, you can generate additional runs. See “To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma2000” on page 437.The number of runs required to achieve a given level of accuracy can vary dramatically based on several factors, which include the following:

■ the number of bins in the analysis, which is directly proportional to the analysis area and resolution. The number of bins in the analysis has an impact as it will provide the number of potential points for subscribers. The more potential points for subscribers, the greater the likelihood of variation.

■ the number of subscribers to be spread. This, coupled with the type of subscriber (for example, high data rate subscribers) and the traffic map, has potentially the greatest impact on the number of runs required. If you spread very few subscribers over a large area, then you need many runs to get a good statistical representation. If these subscribers are spread in a limited area, then fewer runs are likely required.

■ the impact of each individual subscriber on the analysis, which is essentially the required Eb/No. Higher data rate subscribers create a bigger load and have a bigger impact in all respects. They are also are more likely to be served or not served.

■ the potential variation in the locations of the subscribers in the analysis according to the assigned traffic maps. A flat traffic map will likely require more runs than a map where all of the subscribers are concentrated.

■ the number of sectors in the analysis. A greater number of servers, coupled with the potential for overlapping coverage areas, handoff regions, and gaps in coverage, results in a higher

401


potential for different sectors providing service, and more runs being required.

In general, the greater potential variability then the greater the number of runs required to ensure a reasonable level of accuracy. It is often useful to do a single run first, especially for large analyses. A single run can identify obvious errors quickly, for example, incorrect PA power settings for a sector. To help determine whether additional runs are required, you view discrete subscriber information (see “Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000” on page 434) and you can generate reports to view the operating points. For more information on reports, see “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

Convergence method The Convergence Achieved option on the Runtime Parameters panel enables you to have more refined control over the simulation process than the Fixed Number of Runs option.The distribution of subscribers is affected by the traffic density. The greater the traffic density, the fewer runs will be required.Using this approach, the runs continue until the convergence target is reached. After each run, the tool calculates the convergence factor (see “Convergence factor calculation” on page 403). When the convergence factor is equal to or less than the value that you define in the Convergence Achieved box, the runs are complete.To achieve results that are statistically valid, you must determine an appropriate Convergence Achieved value. If you specify a lower value (for example, 1%), more runs will be required for the solution to converge. A lower Convergence Achieved value generally requires a higher resolution digital elevation model (DEM) to ensure accurate results. If the DEM has low resolution, small variations in the interference calculations between runs might cause significant differences in the coverage area for a particular site.The Convergence Achieved option requires a minimum of three runs to complete.

402


Convergence factor calculationThe following calculations are used to determine the convergence factor during a run.First, the number of dropped users is calculated using Equation 19.1.

Equation 19.1 Mean number of dropped users

Where: is the mean number of dropped users for a particular run


The divergence of consecutive values is continually calculated using the mean value. For example:

Equation 19.2 Divergence of consecutive values

Where: is the maximum number of dropped users

is the minimum number of dropped users

is the mean number of dropped users for a particular run


The value from Equation 19.1 and the divergence value from Equation 19.2 are then used to determine the convergence factor, as shown in Equation 19.3.

Equation 19.3 Convergence factor

Mean number of dropped users Sn

Sii 0=

n

∑⎝ ⎠⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟⎛ ⎞

n--------------------= =

S

n

Divergence Max Sn 4,Sn– 3,Sn– 2,Sn– 1,Sn }–Min Sn 4,Sn– 3,Sn– 2,Sn– 1,Sn}–{

–{=

Max

Min

S

n

Sn

Divergence( ) Sn( )⁄ 100×

403


Understanding data rate negotiationBy default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 19.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates and that IS-95 is limited to cdma2000 radio configurations RC1 and RC2. It is also assumed that EV-DO traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.

Table 19.1 Data rate negotiation process for cdma2000


Subscriber Manager.




EV-DOEV-DO Only


Carried on 1xRTT), then on IS-95 (fixed rate)

Carried on 1xRTT then on IS-95 (fixed rate)

Carried on 1xRTT (fixed rate)

Not carried





Not carried

Circuit streaming Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95

Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT ten within IS-95


Not carried

404


Data rate downgradingIn the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 19.1 on page 404 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the EV-DO network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.



■ review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector-




Negotiated within 1xRTT

Not carried


Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT, then within IS-95


Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT

Negotiated within EV-DO




EV-DOEV-DO Only

405


mobile report. See “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

■ create a traffic map from the un-served users based on a Monte Carlo analysis. See “Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map” on page 435.

■ use the Grid Info tool or the Info tool to view details about the data rate negotiation. See “Chapter 5: Working with the Grid Manager” in the Grid Analysis User Guide. For information about the Info tool, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide.

■ browse the discrete subscriber table for details about data rate negotiations. In particular, examine the following columns:

■ Block Reason. See “Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 543.

■ Achieved Downlink Rate. See “Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 543.

■ Achieved Uplink Rate. See “Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 543.

■ Negotiation State. See “Negotiation States”.

Negotiation StatesYou can generate a Monte Carlo analysis with discrete subscriber information. When you do so, the discrete subscriber table contains a Negotiation State column. There are five possible states:

■ Non-negotiated—a subscriber who is carried at the maximum data rate on both the reverse link and forward link.

■ Forward negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where the forward link is at less than the maximum forward link data rate, but the reverse link is at the maximum data rate.

■ Reverse negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where the reverse link is at less than the maximum reverse link data rate, but the forward link is at the maximum data rate.

■ Negotiated—a subscriber who is carried where neither the forward link or reverse link are at the maximum data rates.

■ Not Served—a subscriber can not be served.

406


Understanding cdma2000 analysis layersAnalysis layers are generated after the final Monte Carlo run. The following types of analysis layers are available to enable you to visualize and optimize the coverage of your network:

■ Pilot analysis■ Reverse link interference analysis■ Forward link interference analysis■ Handoff analysis■ Throughput analysis■ Path balance analysis■ EV-DO analysis (see “Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis

Layers” on page 453)cdma2000 analysis layers are stored in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project.

Pilot analysis Pilot analysis layers (see Table 19.2 on page 408) enable you to visualize pilot coverage and interference over the analysis area.As a subscriber becomes more distant from the serving site, the path loss increases, decreasing the pilot power (Ec). As the subscriber moves away from the serving site and closer to other sites, interference (Io) occurs. The boundary of pilot coverage varies due to load, environmental, and bearer conditions. Generating pilot analysis layers enables you to quantify this effect

cdma2000 analysis layers are generated separately from TDMA/FDMA analysis layers. For more information on TDMA/FDMA analysis layers,

see Chapter 7, “Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers”, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.

407


by calculating the maximum propagation loss for a given load, environment, or bearer. For more information, see “Pilot interference” on page 535.Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers

Layer Description

Pilot - Best Server Displays the coverage area of each sector’s pilot.The coverage area is based on achieving at least the Pilot Detection Threshold defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. See “To define quality settings” on page 350.

Pilot - Composite Best Server

Identical to the Pilot - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Pilot - Best Ec/Io Displays the pilot Ec/Io at each bin based on the power limits defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box (see “To define cdma2000 power settings” on page 351) rather than the Pilot Target Ec/Io value. See “To define quality settings” on page 350.

Pilot - Coverage Displays the coverage area of all the sectors within the analysis area

Pilot - 2nd Server Displays the second best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - 3rd Server Displays the third best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - 4th Server Displays the fourth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - 5th Server Displays the fifth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - 6th Server Displays the sixth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - 7th Server Displays the seventh best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors

Pilot - Best Ec Server Displays the best server at each location where the Best Ec is better than the value defined in the Best Ec Threshold box on the General tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, or null if the Best Ec is worse than the threshold value.

408


Pilot - Composite Best Ec Server

Identical to the Pilot - Best Ec Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Pilot - Best Ec Displays the Ec (the energy received per chip) for the best pilot.

Pilot - Total Ec Displays the total Ec for the pilots in the active set. The total Ec is computed as the sum of Ec powers of the pilots in active set.

Pilot - Pollution Index Displays the areas in your coverage region where pilot coverage is not sufficient. The Pilot - Pollution Index is a numeric grid (.grd) file that uses a percentage for each bin. Values closer to 100% indicate areas where pilot pollution and/or pilot coverage may be a problem.This index is created based on the number of users in an area (usage factor) and the probability of pilot pollution (pilot factor) in that area. High values occur when there is a low pilot-to-interference ratio and/or there is a high concentration of users in relation to the available signal strength. The usage factor is based on the traffic map and the usage factor curve defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box and the traffic factor is based on the pilot factor curve define in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.

Pilot - Delta Ec/Io Displays the difference in pilot Ec/Io between the best server and the server that you choose in the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer box on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box. See “To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000” on page 422 for details.

Pilot - Number of Polluters

Displays the number of pilot polluters at each bin. A pilot is a polluter if it is not a best or handoff server and its Ec/Io is within the Pilot Pollution Margin defined in the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box. See “To define general settings for cdma2000” on page 280.

Pilot - Worst Polluter Displays the worst pilot polluter at each bin.

Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

409


Pilot - Sum of Pilots minus Best Pilot

Displays the total pilot signal strength within the network minus the best pilot signal strength. This indicates whether the best pilot is the primary component of the composite signal. In areas where there are too many different signals of similar strength, the signal-to-interference ratio will be too high and calls may be dropped. It is more effective for cdma2000 networks to have a dominant pilot signal throughout the desired coverage area.

Pilot - Received Io Displays the total downlink noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the downlink received signal strength including thermal noise. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only.

Pilot - Total Ec/Io Displays the ratio of total Ec and received Io.

Pilot - Outdoor Io Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only.

Pilot - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference

Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only.

Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

410


Forward link interference analysis Forward link interference analysis layers (see Table 19.3) enable you to determine the interference generated on the forward link connections in your network.Table 19.3 Forward link analysis layers

Layer Description

Forward - Best Server Displays the service channel coverage area for each sector

Forward - Composite Best Server

Identical to the Forward - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Forward - Coverage Probability

Displays the probability of forward link coverage at each bin.

Forward - Eb/No Displays the forward link service Eb/No at each bin without limiting it to the forward link target Eb/No.The cdma2000 analysis layer generation process assumes that perfect power control will cause the power to set itself at a level that will achieve the target Eb/No. See “Controlling interference” on page 536.

Forward - FER Displays the frame erasure rate (FER) at each bin based on the FER to Eb/No curve defined in the cdma2000 Bearer dialog box. See “Defining cdma2000 bearers” on page 299.

Forward - Received Io Displays the total forward link noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the forward link received signal strength including thermal noise. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - Received Io.

Forward link- Outdoor Io

Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - Outdoor Io.

Forward - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference

Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference.

411


Reverse link interference analysis Reverse link interference analysis layers (see Table 19.4) enable you to determine the interference generated on the reverse link connections in your network.

Forward link - i-Factor Displays the other-to-own cell interference ratio based on all other sectors and the in-cell signal strength. This layer is the reciprocal of the Forward - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference layer in linear form. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - i-factor.

Forward link- Throughput

Displays the mean forward link throughput for each bin.

Forward link- Bearer Coverage


Forward link- Max Achievable Coverage


Table 19.4 Reverse link interference analysis layers

Layer Description

Reverse - Best Server Displays the reverse link coverage for each sector

Reverse - Composite Best Server

Identical to the Reverse - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector.

Reverse - Coverage Probability

Displays the probability of reverse link highest bearer coverage. The highest bearer is determined from the bearers available in the subscriber equipment settings depending on the maximum reverse link data rate defined in the Qualities settings.

Table 19.3 Forward link analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

412


Handoff analysis Handoff analysis layers (see Table 19.5) enable you to determine the handoff status of each sector included in an analysis. For more information on how handoff and soft handoff occur, see “Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks” on page 533.

Reverse - Req Mobile EIRP

Displays the EIRP values for a mobile at each bin that are required to close the reverse link. For a single channel, this is calculated as follows:Required EIRP = Required PA Power + Mobile Antenna Gain = Required Eb/No - Processing Gain + Penetration Loss + Masked Pathloss + Noise Rise + Composite Noise Figure + kTBFor total required EIRP for fundamental and supplemental channels, the equation is:

Total Required EIRP = fundamental required EIRP + (number of supplemental channels * supplemental required EIRP)The composite noise figure is taken from the link budget for the sector (and, optionally, the carrier). See “Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors” on page 331. The required mobile EIRP will vary for different subscriber types.

Reverse - Mobile EIRP Margin

Displays the difference between the maximum possible mobile EIRP and the actual required EIRP for each bin

Reverse - Load Displays the best server cell load for each bin. The load at a bin is the cell loading of the reverse link best server for that bin.

Reverse - Throughput Displays the mean reverse link throughput for each bin.

Reverse - Bearer Coverage


Reverse - Max Achievable Coverage


Throughput will only exist in areas where pilot coverage and path balance exists.

Table 19.4 Reverse link interference analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

413


All handoff calculations are based on the Handoff Margin value defined on the Quality panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see “To define quality settings” on page 350.Table 19.5 Handoff analysis layers

Layer Description

Handoff - Status Displays the handoff state of each sector within the analysis area. The handoff states are:■ Not in handoff (N)—there is only one available server■ Soft handoff (S)—the subscriber is served by two

sectors from two different sites■ Softer handoff (SS)—the subscriber is served by two

sectors from the same site■ Softer-Soft handoff (SS-S)—the subscriber is served by

three sectors. The subscriber’s best server and either the second or third best server is situated at one site and the remaining server is at another site.

■ Soft-Softer handoff (S-SS)—the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscriber’s best server is situated at one site and the next two best servers are situated at another site.

■ Soft-Soft handoff (S-S)—all three servers are located at different sites

■ Softer-Softer (SSS)—the subscriber is served by three sectors, all from the same site

■ 4 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by four sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 5 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by five sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 6 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by six sectors (irrespective of the sites)

■ 7 Active Servers—the subscriber is served by seven sectors (irrespective of the sites)

Handoff - Soft Handoff Gain

Displays the reverse link soft handoff gain at each bin. The gain is produced by the ability of the subscribers and sites to operate at a lower power value when engaged in soft handoff and still meet the system quality requirements for the FER.

Handoff - Active Server Count

Displays the total number of serving sectors (i.e., the sectors in soft handoff)

Handoff - Active Site Count

Displays the total number of serving sites (i.e., the sites where sectors are in soft handoff)

414


Other analysis The path balance analysis layer (see Table 19.6) enables you to determine whether coverage has been achieved on both the reverse link and forward link paths.

Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000Step 1 Ensure that you have defined a traffic map for the subscriber

types that covers the same area as your Monte Carlo analysis. See “Defining subscriber types for cdma2000” on page 321 and Chapter 10, “Working with Traffic Maps”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 Optionally, generate a rapid planning analysis. See “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377.

Step 3 Define prediction view settings. See “Optimizing cdma2000 analyses” on page 416.

Step 4 Create a new cdma2000 analysis. See “Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000” on page 420.

Table 19.6 Path balance analysis layer

Layer Description

Other - Path Balance Displays the balance between the forward link and reverse link. The forward link is considered covered at a bin if both pilot coverage and service coverage are achieved.Path balance is achieved when the probability of both the reverse link and forward link coverage is equal to or greater than the Cell Edge Coverage Probability value in the Circuit Switched Service or Packet Switched Service dialog box. See “Defining service types for cdma2000” on page 314.

Other - Combined Probability

The combined coverage probability for the forward link and reverse link (Forward - Coverage Probability layer and Reverse - Coverage Probability layer). For each pixel, the combined probability layer represents the minimum probability of the two layers.

415


Step 5 Define settings and generate a Monte Carlo analysis. See “Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000” on page 422.

Step 6 View and interpret discrete subscriber information and operating points. See “Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000” on page 434 and “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

Step 7 If required, generate additional runs. See “Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis” on page 437.

Step 8 Define, generate, and view analysis layers. See

■ “Defining cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 438

■ “Generating cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 440

■ “Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 441

Step 9 Generate statistical reports for analysis layers. See “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

Optimizing cdma2000 analysesYou can optimize analysis speed or disk space usage by choosing whether or not to use prediction view files. Using prediction view files is optional and your decision should be based on a consideration of the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case.By default, when you generate an analysis, prediction view files are created. Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin.Using prediction view files results in faster analyses because Mentum Planet only reads one file to access information about signal strength for all potential servers. If you do not use prediction view files, Mentum Planet opens individual prediction files to query signal strength. However, prediction view files occupy additional disk space and can take a significant amount of time to generate initially, especially if you are working with multi-resolution predictions over a large area.

416


Prediction view files work at a single resolution. If you are analyzing a large area with mostly low resolution data and small amounts of higher resolution data, the disk space requirements can be significantly higher than the combined disk space requirements of the prediction data if the analysis is carried out at the higher resolution. This is because the prediction view files will be created at the higher resolution over the entire area. Also, separate prediction views are created for each of the required analysis resolutions, which can further add to disk space requirements. For example, an area that is 100 km x 100 km with a 10-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 2 GB of disk space for prediction view files, whereas an area that is 200 km x 200 km with a 5-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 32 GB of disk space for prediction view files.

To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings1 Choose Edit ➤ Project Settings.2 In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab.

3 In the CDMA Analysis Optimization section, do the following to define the number of predictions considered at each location (especially in

417


calculating total forward link interference) and specify the maximum pathloss:■ In the Maximum Number of Predictions box, type a value for

the number of overlapping predictions considered at each location when you generate analyses. Limiting the number of overlapping predictions is useful in situations such as a dense urban area where there are thousands of overlapping predictions, but the total interference is dominated by a small number of the strongest signals. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.

■ In the Maximum Pathloss box, type a value for the maximum pathloss that will be considered (within the Maximum Number of Predictions restriction). This value enables you to exclude weak signals from your analyses. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.

4 Click OK.

Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settingsIf you want to use the same settings for a number of Monte Carlo analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.

418


To define default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings.2 Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK.


■ “To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000” on page 422

■ “To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis” on page 425

■ “To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000” on page 429

■ “To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427

Defining default analysis layers for cdma2000 After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, nodes are created in the Project Explorer under the cdma2000 analysis name for the carriers, subscriber types, usage types, and environments that were included in the analysis. cdma2000 analysis layers are generated for each environment under the usage type.By default, all of the available cdma2000 analysis layers are generated. If you have a large project, to avoid lengthy generation times, you can omit layers that you do not need using the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter. The cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter enables you to define a default list of analysis layers that will be available for all of the cdma2000 analyses that you create for the current project.

419


To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Analysis Layer Filter.

2 In the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK.

For more information on each analysis layer, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the cdma2000 Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.Rapid planning is a quicker analysis method than Monte Carlo, but does not provide the detailed subscriber information that a Monte Carlo analysis does. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377.

A cdma2000 analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the cdma2000 technology. If you want to


420


To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose New Network Analysis.

The cdma2000 Analysis dialog box opens.

2 In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis.3 In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.4 From the Analysis Mode list, choose Monte Carlo, and click OK.

A new cdma2000 analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.



If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node, choose Select Sectors,

and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use and click Continue.If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see “To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000” on page 433.

421


Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 You define the settings for the Monte Carlo analysis using the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box. When you are satisfied with the settings, you can generate the analysis directly from this dialog box.

To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate.

The cdma2000 Simulation dialog box opens.


422


3 If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effect of power control imperfections or errors, on the System panel, enable the Simulate Power Control Errors check box.

For more information on defining power control settings, see “To define power control settings for cdma2000” on page 283. For general information on controlling interference using power controls, see “Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks” on page 533.

4 If you want to calculate soft handoff within the Monte Carlo simulation to limit macro-diversity soft handoff gain, enable the Use Soft Handoff Gain check box.

If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handoff will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handoff gain is not taken into account for the reverse link analysis for the mobile.

5 If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effects of slow fading, enable the Model Slow Fading check box.

For more information on slow fading, see “How slow fading is modeled” on page 515.

6 If you want to use IS-95 carriers first for services that use RC1 and RC2 bearers, enable the Prefer IS-95 Carrier for RC1, RC2 Traffic check box.

By allocating IS-95 carriers first for services that use RC1 and RC2 bearers, more 1xRTT carriers can be allocated for services that use RC3-RC5 bearers (not supported on IS-95). If you do not enable this check box, the allocation of carriers is based on the preference weightings defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.

7 If you want to use the pilot Ec/Nt in the data rate layer generation or the coverage map layer generation on EV-DO carriers, enable any of the following check boxes:■ Use pilot Ec/Nt for data rate layer generation—the pilot

Ec/Nt is used in the calculation of the maximum achievable data rate layer. Idle slot transmission and early termination of multi-slot transmission are not modeled. When this check box is cleared, the forward Ec/Nt measured on the traffic channel is used.

■ Use pilot Ec/Nt for coverage layer generation—the pilotEc/Nt is used in the calculation of individual forward coverage

423


probability layers. Idle slot transmission and early termination of multi-slot transmission are not modeled. When this check box is cleared, the forward Ec/Nt measured on the traffic channel is used.

8 From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer.

The Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the fourth best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the fourth best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.


424


To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis 1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree

view.

2 On the Subscribers panel, enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the simulation.


To define Simulation Area settings for cdma2000 The simulation area controls traffic spreading for Monte Carlo analyses.

425


1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Simulation Area in the tree view.

2 On the Simulation Area panel, choose one of the following options:■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates

that the simulation area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis




3 In the Simulation Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the simulation.

426




To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters

in the tree view.

2 On the Runtime Parameters panel, in the Analysis Target section, do one of the following:■ To enable the simulation to run a specific number of times,

choose the Use Fixed Number of Runs option and type a value in the Number of Runs box.

■ To enable the simulation to run until a convergence target is reached, choose the Use Convergence Achieved option and type a value in the Convergence Required box.

427


■ To enable the simulation to run until both the specified number of runs have completed and the convergence target has been reached, choose the Use Number of Runs and Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.

■ To enable the simulation to run until either the specified number of runs have completed or the convergence target has been reached (whichever comes first), choose the Use Number of Runs or Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.

For more information on these settings, see “Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs” on page 400.

3 In the Options section, do any of the following:■ To collect information about discrete subscribers that you can

display once the analysis is complete, enable the Collect Discrete Information check box. For more information on displaying discrete subscriber information, see “Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000” on page 434.

■ To automatically generate cdma2000 analysis layers when the Monte Carlo runs are complete, enable the Automatically Generate Layers check box. By default, the analysis layers that are enabled in the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter dialog box are generated. If you do not enable this check box, you can still generate layers after the Monte Carlo runs are complete. For more information on generating analysis layers and the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, see “Generating cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 440.


428


To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000 1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the

tree view.

429


2 On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:■ Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictions—indicates

that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis




■ Use An Analysis Grid—enables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. This option is useful to ensure that the analysis area remains the same over repeated analyses. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, “Working with the Grid Manager”, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.




430


Defining discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000 You can define different colors for each coverage state associated with a subscriber and for each subscriber type defined. Coverage states are:

■ Served, Not Negotiated—The subscriber was served at the maximum data rate on both the forward link and reverse link.

■ Served, Forward Negotiated—The subscriber was served but the forward link was not at the maximum data rate although the reverse link was.

■ Served, Reverse Negotiated—The subscriber was served but the reverse link was not at the maximum data rate although the forward link was.

■ Served, Negotiated—The subscriber was served but neither the reverse link or forward link were at the maximum data rate.

■ Mobile PA Power—The subscriber was dropped because the mobile PA power was not sufficient to achieve the Eb/No target on the reverse link.

■ Noise Rise—The subscriber was dropped because the mobile signal caused one or more sectors to exceed its noise rise limit.

■ Channel Elements—The subscriber was dropped because there were insufficient channel elements available on the serving sector.

■ User Limit—The subscriber was dropped because the maximum user limit was reached on the serving sector.

■ Sector PA Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient PA power at the serving sector.

■ Traffic Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient traffic power on the forward link to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target.

■ Pilot Power—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient pilot power on the forward link, which means that the pilot power was not sufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

■ Unknown Drop State—The subscriber was dropped for an unknown reason.

■ Code Limit—The subscriber was dropped due to insufficient codes on the forward link.

431


■ Cell Radius Limit—The subscriber was dropped because he or she was outside of the maximum cell radius for the serving sector.

■ Speed Limit—The subscriber was dropped because he or she exceeded the speed limit for the sector.

■ Throughput Limit—The subscriber was dropped because the throughput limit for the serving site was exceeded.

To define discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Discrete Subscriber Preferences.

The Discrete Subscriber Preferences dialog box opens.

432


2 If you want to change the color used for a coverage state, do the following:■ Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the coverage

state.■ In the Color dialog box, choose or define the color, and click

OK.3 If you want to change the properties for the symbol that is displayed in the

Map window for a subscriber type, do the following:■ Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the

subscriber type.■ In the Symbol Style dialog box, modify the symbol properties

and click OK.

For more information on the Symbol Style dialog box, press the F1 key.

Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000Once you have finished defining settings for an analysis, you can generate it directly from the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box.

To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 1 Define the settings on each panel in the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box

as described in “Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000” on page 422.

2 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, click Analyze.3 If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select


4 If you chose to generate layers automatically, in the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK.

A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the dialog box closes and the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include each subscriber type and carrier in the analysis.

If you chose to generate layers automatically, the layers are generated and displayed in the Project Explorer under the analysis. If you did not

433


generate layers automatically, you can generate them as a separate step. See “Generating cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 440.

Adding an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses nodeIf you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the cdma2000 Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.

To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node1 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the

cdma2000_Analyses folder in the current project folder.2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

cdma2000 Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses.


Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 If you chose to collect information about discrete subscribers during the Monte Carlo simulation (see “To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427), the status of each subscriber is automatically displayed in the Map window when the simulation completes. The coverage

If you cancel an analysis generation before it has completed, the number of runs completed and the convergence level achieved (if

applicable) are indicated at the bottom of the Runtime Parameters panel of the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box.

434


states are displayed using the colors that you chose in the Discrete Subscribers Preferences dialog box.

The discrete subscriber information from each run of the analysis is stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project using the naming convention <AnalysisName>_<Run Number>. You can also display discrete subscriber information in a tabular form using a new Browser window. For more information on the columns and format of the table, see “Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format” on page 543.

To display discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 in table format1 Choose File ➤ Open Table.2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the cdma2000_Analyses folder of

your project and choose the MapInfo table (.tab file) that you want to display.


The discrete subscriber table opens in a new Browser window.

Creating an unserved subscriber traffic mapWhen you view discrete subscribers, you may notice a high number of subscribers who are not being served by a particular sector. In order to better understand the reason behind this, you can create a traffic map of unserved subscribers. Using the Grid Info tool, you can determine how much unserved traffic there is at a particular bin. If your network consists of a 3G technology

If you generate multiple runs for a Monte Carlo simulation, the discrete subscriber information that is displayed automatically applies only to

the last run. If you want to view discrete subscriber information that applies to all runs in a Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Display Discrete Subscribers.The Display Discrete Subscribers command will not work if you have cleared the Visible check box for the analysis in the Windows category of the Project Explorer.

435


overlaid on a 2G technology, you can use the unserved subscriber traffic map in a network analysis of the 2G network layer.

To create an unserved subscriber traffic map1 Do one of the following in the Project Explorer:

■ In the Project Data category, right-click the Traffic Maps node and choose Create Unserved Traffic Map from Monte-Carlo Analysis.

■ In the Network Analyses category, right-click the Monte Carlo analysis from which you want to create the unserved subscriber traffic map and choose Unserved Subscriber Traffic Map.

2 In the Unserved Subscribers Traffic Map Generator dialog box, in the Traffic Map Output Name box, type a name for the traffic map.

3 In the Subscriber Types section, enable the check boxes next to the subscriber types for which you want to view the unserved subscribers.

4 Click Generate.

The traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category.

5 Right-click the generated map and do any of the following:■ To view the map, right-click the generated map and choose

View.■ To update the traffic information for the sectors with traffic

information from a traffic map, choose Capture.■ To combine multiple compatible traffic maps into one new

traffic map, choose Combine.■ To scale the traffic values in a traffic map, choose Scale.

Before creating an unserved subscriber traffic map, you must have generated a Monte Carlo analysis and collected discrete subscriber

information. For the traffic map to contain meaningful values, the Monte Carlo analysis should consist of several runs.

Use the Zoom-In tool to zoom in on individual areas of the map and better view unserved subscribers.

436


Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis

After viewing the operating points (see “Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481) and discrete subscriber information, you might determine that additional runs are required to achieve greater accuracy.You can modify the runtime parameters of an existing analysis and perform additional runs. The new results are added to the operating points of the final run of the existing analysis.

To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma20001 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate.2 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters

in the tree view.3 On the Runtime Parameters panel as required, do one of the following:

■ If you originally used the Fixed Number of Runs option, increase the number of runs.

■ If you originally used the Convergence Achieved option, modify the convergence value.

For more information, see “To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427.

4 If you want to change the settings in the Options section, enable or clear the check boxes as required.

5 Click Append.

Updating cdma2000 rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results

Once you have generated a Monte Carlo simulation, you have the option of using the results of the simulation to update the target values for Reverse Noise Rise and Forward Total Traffic Power on the Sector Settings -

If you make changes to your project outside of the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box (for example, if you modify the usages assigned

to a subscriber type in the Subscribers category in the Project Explorer) these changes will not be reflected in the additional runs.

437


Implementation panel. These values are used in rapid planning. For more information on rapid planning, see “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377.

To update cdma2000 target values1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click a

Monte Carlo analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Apply Cell Loads.

2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

The rapid planning settings are updated for all sectors in the group chosen for the analysis.

Defining cdma2000 analysis layers If you chose not to generate layers automatically as part of the analysis, you can generate them afterward. To manage the analysis layers for an individual analysis, you can use the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box to define the availability of analysis layers for each environment. This enables you to generate the same analysis layers for all of the environments, or different analysis layers for different environments.

If you apply cell loads and there is 0 required traffic for a carrier-sector, a value of -200 dBm is applied to the Forward Total Traffic Power box

on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel.

You can also generate cdma2000 analysis layers at the same time as operating points and subscriber information. For more information, see

“To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000” on page 427.

438


To define the cdma2000 analysis layers to use in an analysis1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click

an analysis under the cdma2000 Analysis node and choose Layers.

The cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box opens, showing nodes for each carrier, subscriber type, quality, and environment, and the layers that are available for each.

■ If the check box is enabled for a node, all of the layers that apply to the node will be generated.

■ If the check box is cleared, no layers that apply to the node will be generated.

■ If the check box contains a black square, only some of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. You can expand the nodes to view which layers are chosen.

439


2 In the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, expand the environment nodes, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK.

This dialog box includes only the default analysis layers you chose in the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box. To modify the default analysis layers, see “To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list” on page 420.

For more information on each analysis layer, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

Generating cdma2000 analysis layers Once you have defined the analysis layers, you can generate the analysis.

To generate cdma2000 analysis layers■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category,

right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate Layers.

A dialog box opens that displays the status of the operation. Any errors are displayed in a separate dialog box. If required, path loss and signal strength predictions are updated during the analysis.

Generating analysis layers for flag-specific informationYou can generate a network analysis for sectors identified with certain flags and conditions. For example, you could generate a network analysis for sites in Phase 1 that are installed and operational. To do this, you define the flags and conditions, and then generate a network analysis. In the Select Sectors dialog box, you choose the Flags Filter. For more information on flags and conditions, see “Working with flags”, in Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

You can generate the cdma2000 analysis layers directly from the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box by clicking Generate.

440





generate and choose Generate.5 Define the analysis settings as described in as described in “Defining

Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000” on page 422, and then follow the procedure described in “To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000” on page 433.

Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers Once you have generated an analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.

To view cdma2000 analysis layers1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the

cdma2000 Analyses node, expand the carrier, subscriber type, usage type, and environment for which you want to view analysis layers.

2 Right-click an analysis and choose View.


If you rename an analysis in the Project Explorer, any layers currently open or displayed in the Map window will be closed.

To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the cdma2000



“Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports” on page 481.

441


Recoloring best serving sector layers The Best Serving Sector Recolor tool enables you to change the color scheme used to display best serving sector analysis layers (classified grid files).You can use the colors defined in a sector display scheme or choose from the default color schemes used to display TDMA/FDMA and CDMA best serving sector analysis layers. Sector display schemes enable you to display analysis layers based on sector properties, such as the forward link load for CDMA technologies or carried traffic for TDMA/FDMA technologies. When you use a sector display scheme with the Best Serving Sector Recolor tool, only the colors that have been defined for the scheme are used; other sector display scheme settings, such as symbol and size, are ignored.For information about defining sector display schemes, see “Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites” in Chapter 2, “Working With Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

To recolor best serving sector layers1 Choose Tools ➤ Best Serving Sector Recolor.

The Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box opens.

2 Click Browse, navigate to the CDMA2000_Analyses project folder, choose the best serving sector layer (.grc) file that you want to recolor, and then click Open.

442


3 In the Select Sector Display Scheme section, choose a color scheme and click Apply.

The best serving sector layers are displayed in the Map window using the new color scheme.






Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for cdma2000

You can obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis by selecting an area in the Map window and using the CDMA Pixel Info tool.

You can modify an existing sector display scheme from within in the Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box by right-clicking a local or

shared scheme and choosing Edit.

The CDMA Pixel Info tool is available only for Monte Carlo analyses.

443


For each subscriber type and carrier that you choose, the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box displays:

■ the pixel co-ordinates (location)■ the number of predictions available■ reverse link details, including:

■ Best Server■ Required ERP■ ERP Margin■ Coverage Probability

■ forward link details, including:■ Service Best Server■ Service Eb/No and Service Margin ■ Coverage Probability■ Received Noise

■ pilot details, including:■ received power■ Ec/Io■ masked path loss polluter indicator and server status at the

specified pixel location

To obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to obtain per-pixel information and choose Pixel Info.

The CDMA Pixel Info dialog box opens. The Type box displays the technology for which the analysis that you chose was generated. The Analysis box displays the analysis for which you chose to display pixel information.

444


2 From the SubCat list, choose the usage type for which you want to view analysis information.

Usage types are defined for a subscriber type, and consist of a service type, quality, and environments. Usage types are displayed in the SubCat list using the syntax of <short name> <first letter of the environment name>. In the example above, Voice is the short name and I indicates that the environment is Indoor. For more information on usage types, see “Defining subscriber types for cdma2000” on page 321.

3 From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to view analysis information.

4 Click in the Map window to display analysis information for each pixel in the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box.

5 Click Close.

You can also access the CDMA Pixel Info tool by clicking the CDMA Pixel Info button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.

445


Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectorsPilot pollution occurs when there is an excessive number of pilot signals with high power levels. Pilot pollution can create high levels of interference, resulting in dropped calls, poor voice quality, and poor data throughput.The Pilot Pollution Inspector enables you to identify polluting sectors at specific locations, modify the appropriate sector settings, and then view the effects of your changes. The level of pilot pollution is analyzed by comparing the powers of the pilot channels with the power of the best serving pilot channel, taking into account the active set (the set of pilots currently participating in the call) and the pilot pollution margin.Before you use the Pilot Pollution Inspector, you need to identify the areas that may be affected by pilot pollution. For example, you can generate a Rapid Planning or Monte Carlo analysis and examine the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer. You can also use drive test data or network data to identify potential problem areas. When you click a location in a Map window, the Pilot Pollution Inspector analyzes the location for pilot pollution based on specific carrier, forward loading, and subscriber settings. You can use settings from a network analysis or define these settings in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box.For a specified location, the Pilot Pollution Inspector displays the following information in a graph window:

■ Best serving sector■ soft handoff sectors■ polluting sectors (if any)

Horizontal lines in the graph window indicate the threshold levels for the best serving, handoff, and polluting sectors. You can define the number of polluting sectors that are displayed in the graph window, as well as the colors and pilot value (Ec/Io or Ec) used for the display. Additional location and sector information is displayed in the Analysis Info section (see Figure 19.1).

446


Figure 19.1 Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box

In the Mentum Planet Map window, lines are drawn from the specified analysis location to each of the corresponding sectors: Best Server, Handoff, Pilot Polluter, and Pilot Detected (see Figure 19.2). The color of the lines corresponds to the colors used in the graph window of the Pilot Pollution Inspector.

Threshold levels

Location and

Graph display ofanalyzed sectors

analysis information

447


Figure 19.2 Map window displaying the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io analysis layer. For the specified location, the Pilot Pollution Inspector adds lines indicating the best serving sector (green), handoff sectors (yellow), and polluting sectors (red).

After you have identified the polluting sectors, you can leave the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box open, use the Site Properties dialog box to change the antenna downtilt, azimuth, or height for the polluting sectors, and then update the display in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box to see the effects of your changes.

Workflow for analyzing pilot pollutionMinimizing pilot pollution is an iterative process; you may need to repeat the steps in the workflow to achieve the desired results. The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.Step 1 Generate a Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis or use drive

test data to identify potential polluters. See “Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000” on page 393 or “Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000” on page 433.

Step 2 Use the Pilot Pollution Inspector to identify polluters.

448


Step 3 Modify the configuration of polluter sectors. See “Editing sites and sectors” on page 353.

Step 4 Regenerate predictions for the modified sectors. See Chapter 8, “Generating Predictions”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 5 Use the Pilot Pollution Inspector to verify the improvements.

Step 6 Generate an additional Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis to evaluate the overall impact of the sector configuration changes.

To analyze pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors1 Do one of the following to open the Pilot Pollution Inspector:

■ In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis and choose Pilot Pollution Inspector.

■ On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Pilot Pollution Inspector button, click an area in the Map window, then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis and click Continue.

The Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box opens. If you open the Pilot Pollution Inspector from an analysis node in the Project Explorer, the sector, subscriber, carrier, and loading information from the analysis is used. You can use the settings from the analysis or edit them as required, as outlined in this procedure.

2 On the System tab, from the Carrier list, choose the carrier that you want to analyze.

If you opened the Pilot Pollution Inspector from an analysis node, the first carrier included in the analysis is chosen by default.

3 In the Forward Loading section, choose one of the following options to define the forward loading that will be used for the analysis:■ Use the Loading Defined in the Sector Settings—uses the

Forward Total Traffic Power value specified on the Implementation panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see “Defining cdma2000 sector settings” on page 341.

■ Use Global Loading—type a value to define the percentage of the total PA power that will be used for the analysis. This value

449


will override the total traffic power defined for individual sectors.

■ Use Loading From Analysis—choose an analysis from the list. The forward loading values from the analysis will be used.

4 Click the Subscribers tab.5 Choose one of the following options to define the subscriber type that will

be used for the pilot pollution analysis:■ Subscriber Type—choose a predefined subscriber type from the

list.■ Nominal Subscriber—type values for each of the following:

■ Antenna Gain—the antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber

■ Maximum Active Servers—the maximum number of handoff servers supported by the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber

■ Noise Figure—the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber

6 From the Environment list, choose the type of environment that will be used for the analysis.

7 Click the Analysis Settings tab.8 In the Maximum Polluters box, type the number of polluting sectors that

you want displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector graph window and the Map window.

9 From the Pilot Value list, choose the value that you want to use for the display in the graph window.

10 If you want to change the colors used in the graph window, in the Legend Profile section, do any of the following:■ To edit the current color settings, click Edit, define the colors for

the sector categories, and then click OK.■ To load an existing legend color profile, click Load, choose a

Pilot Inspector color (.pic) file, and then click Open.■ To save the current legend color profile, click Save, type a name

in the File Name box, and then click Save.

450


11 Click on a location in the Map window that you have identified as being affected by pilot pollution.

The Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box displays pilot pollution information for the location.

12 If you want to save a report containing information for the location currently displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box, click Export Report, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save.

The location and pollution information is saved in a Microsoft Excel file.

After you have clicked an area in the Map window, you can modify any of the System, Subscriber, or Analysis Settings and then click Update

to refresh the information displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box based on the new settings.

451


452

Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers

20.
Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding EV-DO

analysis layers■ Workflow for generating EV-

DO analysis layers

This chapter describes Evolution - Data Only (EV-

DO) analysis layers, and explains how to generate

them.

If you have purchased an EV-DO license, you can

generate EV-DO analysis layers.

453


Understanding EV-DO analysis layersEV-DO is a high-speed, data-only extension to cdma2000. EV-DO can be used in conjunction with 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers. To generate EV-DO analysis layers, you need to assign the EV-DO standard to at least one cdma2000 carrier (see “To define carrier settings for cdma2000” on page 284) and assign that carrier to sectors in your project (see “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 345). You must also define EV-DO reverse link bearers. The Service Data Rate of EV-DO reverse link bearers must match the uplink and downlink data rates of the associated Qualities. For information on configuring EV-DO reverse link bearers, see “To define EV-DO bearers” on page 305.EV-DO analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned EV-DO carriers, and consist of standard cdma2000 analysis layers and layers that are specific to EV-DO. For more information, see “EV-DO analysis layers” on page 458 and “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377 and “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

Forward link analysisOn the EV-DO forward link, the pilot signal and other control signals are transmitted at fixed intervals on each time slot. The remaining time on the time slot is dedicated to traffic data. At any given time, only one user is served by an EV-DO carrier.There is no power control applied to the forward link, which means that all base stations transmit at full power. However, the transmission rate is adapted to the fading channel environment in order to maintain a constant packet error rate (PER). The mobile continuously monitors the quality of received pilot signals from all sectors in its active set, predicts the signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) over the next packet period based on the current channel condition, and reports the current best serving sector and the highest data rate that it can achieve for a given PER. The serving sector transmits at the data rate chosen by the mobile.

If the EV-DO reverse link bearers and the associated Subscriber Manager settings are not configured correctly, then the analysis will be

attempted on 1xRTT carriers (if available).

454

Generating EV-DO Analysis LayersCDMA User Guide

The forward link analysis:■ predicts forward Ec/Nt and the highest achievable data for each

bin■ plots the forward coverage for each data rate■ computes the average aggregate forward throughput for each

sectorTable 20.1 lists the data rates that are available on the forward link for Rev. 0.

Table 20.2 lists the data rates that are available on the forward link for Rev. A.

Table 20.1 Forward link data rates for Rev. 0

Data rate (Kbps) Slots Ec/Nt (dB)

38.4 16 -12.50

76.8 8 -9.50

153.6 4 -6.50

307.2 2 -4.00

614.4 1 -1.00

307.2 4 -4.00

614.4 2 -1.00

1228.8 1 3.00

921.6 2 1.30

1843.2 1 7.20

1228.8 2 3.00

2457.6 1 9.50

Table 20.2 Forward link data rates for Rev. A


4.8 16 -21.50

9.6 8 -18.50

19.2 4 -15.50

38.4 2 -12.50

76.8 1 -9.50

455


9.6 16 -18.50

19.2 8 -15.50

38.4 4 -12.50

76.8 2 -9.50

153.6 1 -6.50

19.2 16 -15.50

38.4 8 -12.50

76.8 4 -9.50

153.6 2 -6.50

307.2 1 -4.00

38.4 16 -12.50

76.8 8 -9.50

153.6 4 -6.50

307.2 2 -4.00

614.4 1 -1.00

307.2 4 -4.00

614.4 2 -1.00

1228.8 1 3.00

921.6 2 1.30

1843.2 1 7.20

1228.8 2 3.00

2457.6 1 9.50

1536.0 2 3.50

3072.0 1 10.00

Table 20.2 Forward link data rates for Rev. A (continued)


456


Reverse link analysisThe reverse link of EV-DO carriers is similar to the reverse link of 1xRTT carriers. Unlike the EV-DO forward link, which is time-shared with each active user, the EV-DO reverse link is code-shared with embedded pilot pulses for coherent detection. Power control, data rate schemes, and soft handoff capabilities are similar to 1xRTT carriers.However, unlike 1xRTT carriers, the EV-DO reverse link does not have fundamental and supplemental channels, and the reverse link data rate is dynamically controlled by the base station based on sector loading. The access terminal (AT) initiates its transmission data rate at 9.6 kbps and may incrementally increase or decrease its data rate after every 26.67 ms frame, following a transition probability based on the Reverse Activity Bit (RAB) set by the base station. The data rate selected by the AT is reported to the base station via a data rate control (DRC) channel. The 1xEV-DO reverse link data rate is indicated by a reverse rate indicator (RRI) channel on the reverse link that is used to inform the base station of the rate at which the AT is transmitting.

The available data rates, shown in Table 20.3, are determined by the EV-DO revision (Rev. 0 or Rev. A), which you define when you create a 1xEV-DO Bearer. For more information, see “To define EV-DO bearers” on page 305.

The Acknowledgement (Ack) channels are not modeled in Mentum Planet because of their low interference and power consumption

relative to other channels.

Table 20.3 Reverse link data rates for 16 slots

Revision Service Data Rate (Kbps) Code rate (Turbo) Channel Data

Rate (kbps)

Rev. 0 9.6 1/4 38.4

Rev. 0 19.2 1/4 76.8

Rev. 0 38.4 1/4 153.6

Rev. 0 76.8 1/4 307.2

Rev. 0 153.6 1/2 307.2

Rev. A 4.8 1/5 24.0

Rev. A 9.6 1/5 48.0

457


EV-DO analysis layersWhen you generate an EV-DO analysis, you can create all of the standard cdma2000 analysis layers. You can also generate the EV-DO analysis layers

Rev. A 19.2 1/5 96.0

Rev. A 28.8 1/5 144.0

Rev. A 38.4 1/5 192.0

Rev. A 57.6 1/5 288.0

Rev. A 76.8 1/5 384.0

Rev. A 115.2 1/5 576.0

Rev. A 153.6 1/5 768.0

Rev. A 230.4 1/5 1152.76

Rev. A 307.2 1/5 1536.0

Rev. A 460.8 1/3 1382.4

Table 20.3 Reverse link data rates for 16 slots (continued)

Revision Service Data Rate (Kbps) Code rate (Turbo) Channel Data

Rate (kbps)

458


listed in Table 20.4. For more information on the standard cdma2000 analysis layers, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers

Layer Description

EV DO - Forward Max Achievable Data Rate

Displays the predicted highest achievable forward link data rate per bin. The data rate prediction is based on the predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin that is required to ensure a certain level of coverage probability.Both the pilot Ec/Nt (i.e., the predicted pilot channel Ec/Nt) and the forward Ec/Nt (i.e., the forward traffic channel Ec/Nt) are calculated at each bin. Forward Max Achievable Data Rate is generated using the predicted forward Ec/Nt. The amount of fade margin required depends on the coverage probability requirement and the slow fading standard deviation assumptions. When predicting the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate, the required fade margin is computed at each bin, and then a coverage probability is calculated for each data rate according the required Ec/Nt threshold, predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin. For each bin, the data rates with coverage probabilities lower than the required threshold are considered as having no coverage in the bin. There may be more than one data rate for which the coverage probabilities are above the coverage probability requirement. In this case, the highest data rate is considered as the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate for the bin.

459


EV DO - Forward Ec/Nt

Displays the ratio of forward channel chip energy to total spectral noise density for each bin. The mobile predicts the highest achievable data rate based on its Ec/Nt measurement on the pilot channel. However, the effective data transmission rate can be somewhat higher than the predicted data rate due to the idle slot transmission and early termination of multi-slot transmission. The idle slot transmissions reduce the interference in the network, and therefore increase the forward traffic channel Ec/Nt and the probability of earlier termination of multi-slot transmission.

You can account for the transmission of idle slots through the use of the forward activity factor (FAF) and idle transmission attenuation (ITA) parameters. Setting the FAF to a value that is less than 100% and the ITA to a value greater than 0 has the effect of reducing the sector traffic transmit power and the interference from the sector to other sectors. The power from a given sector is calculated as (PA Power * forward activity factor) + ((100 - forward activity factor)*(PA Power-idle transmission attenuation)). Regardless of the FAF and ITA settings, the Ec value is calculated based on the full PA power.

For rapid planning analysis, when the FAF value is set to 100%, the given sector is assumed to transmit at full power all the time. In a Monte Carlo simulation, the FAF is a calculated value. If the ITA value is set to 0 for a given sector then Mentum Planet will not reduce the power level and thus assume that that sector is transmitting at full power 100% of the time. This configuration produces an Ec/Nt that is equivalent to that which is measured on the pilot channel.

EV-DO - Pilot Ec/Nt

Displays the pilot Ec/Nt at each bin based on the power limits defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box . Fade margins are not taken into account.It is assumed that sectors are synchronized to transmit Pilot chips with full power at the same time. As a result, unlike the forward Ec/Nt, the forward activity factor (FAF) is not taken into account when computing the forward Ec/Nt at each bin.

EV DO - Forward Coverage At <data_rate>

Displays a coverage map for each EV-DO data rate (see the Data Rate column in Table 20.1). By default, this layer is generated using the predicted forward Ec/Nt.

Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

460


EV-DO - Forward Cell Throughput (Monte Carlo analyses only)

Displays the aggregate average cell throughput. The forward average throughput is calculated based on the forward pilot Ec/Io of each served subscriber. Because all subscribers share, in time, the same forward carrier, the average cell throughput for the reference scheduling scheme is based on the assumption that each subscriber is served on an equal time, round-robin basis. The Scheduler Gain curve, defined on the Implementation panel of the Sector Settings dialog box for EV-DO sectors, can be used to introduce a gain in cell throughput in comparison to the equal time round-robin scheduler, which is the reference scheduler scheme. The gain is a result of the throughput enhancement; at a cost to fairness in serving subscribers, of other Schedulers, such as the Proportional Fair scheduler, in the optimization of the timing, duration, and frequency when a subscriber is served; in other words, the difference in the way these schedulers trade-off throughput and fairness by taking advantage of multi-user diversity.If no Scheduler Gain curve is assigned, no gain is applied, resulting in a 100% value for gain, representing equal time, round-robin scheduling. Normally, the Proportional Fair scheduler would have a gain superior to equal time round-robin scheduling. The gain would increase from 100% for 1 subscriber to a peak of approximately 200% for 10 to 16 subscribers in an urban environment, because the former takes an increasing advantage of multi-user diversity (serving a subscriber primarily when the channel conditions are most favorable, referred to as “upfade”).

Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers (continued)

Layer Description

461


Workflow for generating EV-DO analysis layers

Step 1 Assign the EV-DO technology to at least one cdma2000 carrier and define EV-DO technology settings for the network. See “To define carrier settings for cdma2000” on page 284 and “To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000” on page 285.

Step 2 If you are generating a Monte Carlo analysis, define EV-DO reverse bearers. See “To define EV-DO bearers” on page 305.

Step 3 Assign the band for the EV-DO carrier to at least one sector in your project, and define EV-DO settings for the sector. See “To assign carriers to sectors” on page 345 and “Editing sites and sectors” on page 353.

Step 4 Generate an analysis, ensuring that you choose the EV-DO carrier, and view the results. See “Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000” on page 377 and “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

462

Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans

21.
Generating PN Offset Plans
This chapter contains the following sections:■ Understanding PN offset

planning■ Preparing input data for PN

offset planning■ Workflow for generating PN

offset plans■ Creating PN offset plans■ Working with PN offset plans■ Analyzing PN offset plans■ Displaying PN offset reports■ Applying PN offset plans

This chapter explains how to use the PN Offset

Planning tools to create, manage, and analyze PN

offset plans.

In a cdma2000 network, the forward link uses PN

offset assignments to distinguish sectors. It is,

therefore, important to carefully plan PN offsets in

order to minimize interference. Using the PN Offset

Plan Analysis tool, you can validate the PN offset

plan you generate.

463


Understanding PN offset planning A PN offset is one of 512 codes used to differentiate sectors for communication with mobiles. The PN offset is combined with other data and transmitted on each of the forward channels.If the same PN sequence is offset by more than one chip, the original PN sequence and the time-shifted PN sequence are almost non-correlated to each other. Therefore, every sector can use the same PN sequence as long as the assigned values are time offset from each other by a predetermined separation (PN increment).If these PN codes are not assigned properly, interference can occur because the propagation delay may set back the time offset between PN codes and cause confusion at the mobiles. The resulting interference is more harmful compared to other types of interference in a cdma2000 network, especially when it affects the active pilot. When the active pilot is affected, the false pilot (i.e., interference) is treated like the serving pilot and it is despread by a correlator. Ultimately, the interference signal becomes very strong after despreading due to the processing gain.The PN Offset Planning tool can be used to assign PN offsets to sectors correctly and minimize co-PN and adjacent-PN confusion. It can also be used to determine the optimal PN increment value based on factors such as predicted signal strength, search window size, estimated cell radius, and propagation path loss.

How PN codes are assigned in Mentum PlanetIn Mentum Planet, you can use one of two methods to plan PN offsets:

■ individual PN offset planning■ group PN offset planning

464

Generating PN Offset PlansCDMA User Guide

Using the group planning method, you can assign PN offset values to adjacent sectors as shown in Figure 21.1.

Figure 21.1 PN codes with a PN increment of three assigned to adjacent sectors

With this method, PN offsets are assigned in groups of three (i.e., for a specific pilot increment, the available PN offsets are organized into PN groups containing three consecutive PN offsets). PN offset values will be assigned to adjacent sectors as three consecutive PN offsets. Therefore, a three-sector site uses one PN offset group and a six-sector site uses two PN offset groups.The PN Offset Planning tool uses a variety of input data from your project, including the search window sizes from the Sector Settings dialog box, a neighbor list, and, optionally, an interference matrix. The search window size is an important element of PN offset planning because PN confusion interference occurs when a propagation delay causes a remote false pilot signal to fall into the mobile’s active search window. When assigning co-PN offsets, the PN offset planning algorithm ensures that a sufficient propagation delay difference exists between two co-PNs. Therefore, in the case of adjacent PN offsets, the algorithm ensures that a propagation delay will not cause a remote PN offset to fall into the mobile’s active search window. For more information on the search window parameters (i.e., SRCH_WIN_A and SRCH_WIN_N), see the online Help.

465


The PN Offset Plan Analysis tool can be used to evaluate the quality of PN offset plans by identifying the locations where co-PN and adjacent-PN interference may occur.

Preparing input data for PN offset planning You create a PN offset plan using a group of sites. Because PN offset planning is a complex process and requires input from several other Mentum Planet tools, it is recommended that you create a group of sites to be used across all tools. This will ensure that your output is consistent and valid. For more information on creating groups of sites, see Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.The following sections explain how to prepare data for PN offset planning.

Neighbor list A neighbor list is a required input for PN offset planning. To obtain the most accurate results, it is recommended that you import a neighbor list from switch data. However, the neighbor list can also be created from a modeled interference matrix. For more information on neighbor lists, see Chapter 12, “Working with Neighbor Lists”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Interference matrix A modeled interference matrix is an optional input to the PN offset planning tool; however, using an interference matrix will generate a more efficient plan. If you choose to include an interference matrix as input to the PN offset planning tool and you also use an interference matrix to create the neighbor list, the two interference matrices must cover the same sites. You can use a traffic map to create the modeled interference matrix for PN offset planning. For more information on interference matrices, see Chapter 11, “Working with Interference Matrices”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

If the PN offset analysis reveals that no PN offset was allocated to a sector, it could be because the sector has no coverage. This situation

can also arise when the neighbor list used to plan PN offsets is incomplete or incorrect.

466


Workflow for generating PN offset plans Step 1 Create a group of sites that you will use for your neighbor list and

PN offset planning. See Chapter 2, “Working with Sites and Sectors”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 2 Generate predictions for the group of sites. For more information on generating predictions, see Chapter 8, “Generating Predictions”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 3 Create a neighbor list using the group of sites. See Chapter 12, “Working with Neighbor Lists”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 4 If you are using an interference matrix, create a modeled interference matrix using the group of sites. See Chapter 11, “Working with Interference Matrices”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

Step 5 Set the search window sizes for the active and neighboring sets of sectors. See “To define implementation settings” on page 349.

Step 6 Define PN offset settings, generate a PN offset plan and if required, produce a PN offset report. See “Creating PN offset plans” on page 467 and “Displaying PN offset reports” on page 478.

Step 7 Analyze the PN offset plan for potential co-PN and adjacent-PN interference. See “Analyzing PN offset plans” on page 475.

Step 8 Apply the plan to the sectors in the group. See “Applying PN offset plans” on page 479.

Creating PN offset plans There are two methods of creating PN offset plans:

■ using sector settings—creates a plan by saving all current PN offset assignments. This is useful if you want to save the current assignments for comparison or to reuse later.

■ using the PN Offset Planning tool—creates a plan by generating PN offsets for all sectors in the group, or only for the sectors that do not already have PN offsets assigned. If the PN Offset box on the Implementation panel in the Sector Settings dialog box is

467


blank, a sector has no PN offset assigned. When you generate a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool, PN offsets are assigned to sectors in a way that minimizes co-PN and adjacent-PN interference.

You can create multiple PN offset plans and analyze them without committing the associated assignments to the sectors in the project.

To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset

Plans and choose New ➤ Save Current.2 In the Save Plan As dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Plan Name box, type a name for the new plan.■ From the Group list, choose the sector group for which you

want to create a PN offset plan.■ From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to

create a PN offset plan. 3 Click OK.

The new plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.

To create a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset

Plans and choose New ➤ Modeled.2 In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the sectors for which you want to

create a PN offset plan and click Continue.

If you want to globally edit all sectors so that no PN offsets are assigned, in the cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box, in the Cell

Equipment Parameters section, expand the Implementation node and type -1 in the PN Offset box.

468


3 In the PN Offset Planning Tool dialog box, under the General node, in the Plan Name box, type a name for the PN offset plan.

4 From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to generate the PN offset plan.

5 From the Keep Existing PN Offsets list, choose one of the following options:■ True—preserves PN offsets that are already assigned to any of

the selected sectors■ False—assigns new PN offset values to all of the selected

sectors 6 From the Neighbor List list, choose a neighbor list.

If no neighbor lists are available, you must create one (see “Neighbor list” on page 466).

469


7 Under the Pilot Increment node, do one of the following:■ To have the PN Offset Planning tool calculate an increment

value automatically, choose True from the Calculate Optimal Value list.

■ To define the amount of separation between PN offset values manually, in the Use Specified Value box, type the value that will be used to increment the PN offset value before it is assigned to one of the selected sectors. The value that you specify corresponds to one 64-chip sequence (i.e., a PN offset of 1 is equal to 64 chips). Typical values for this box are 3, 4, or 6, and specifying any of these reduces the number of available PN codes (e.g., a value of 1 means 512 PN codes are available to allocate to sectors; a value of 3 reduces the available number of codes to 170; a value of 4 further reduces the number to 128 codes; and so on).

8 If you want to use an interference matrix when generating the plan, under the Interference Matrix node, choose True from the Use Interference Matrix list, and then from the Interference Matrix list, choose a modeled interference matrix.

9 From the PN Allocation Goal list, choose one of the following:■ Minimize—allocates the smallest number of available PN

offsets. This option results in more co-PN sites and leaves more of the available PN offsets unused for the future.

■ Maximize—allocates the largest number of available PN offsets. This option results in fewer co-PN sites and leaves fewer of the available PN offsets unused for the future.

■ Sequential—allocates PN offsets to the sectors sequentially. PN offsets are assigned starting from 0 (or if a PN offset has been retained, the next value) in ascending order.

10 From the Group Planning list, choose one of the following options:■ True—group planning is used in the PN offset planning process.

In group planning, PN offsets are assigned in groups of three (i.e., for a specific pilot increment, the available PN offsets are organized into PN groups containing three consecutive PN offsets). Click the Browse (...) button in the Reserved PN Offset box to open the Group Reservation Editor dialog box. PN offset values will be assigned to adjacent sectors as three consecutive PN offsets. PN offsets are assigned starting from the north-most

470


sector and then clockwise to the other sectors. With a four or five-sector site, sectors 1, 2, and 3 will use one PN group and the remaining sectors will use the next available group. With a six-sector site, two PN offset groups will be used.

■ False—group planning is not considered in the PN offset planning process. Click the Browse (...) button in the Reserved PN Offset box to open the PN Offset Reservation Editor dialog box.

11 If you are using group planning, in the Group Reservation Editor, do any of the following and click OK:■ to exclude the PN offset 0, enable the Reserve 0 check box.■ to exclude specific PN offset groups, enable the check box next

to the group. The group is now labeled as “Reserved” and highlighted in gray.

12 If you are not using group planning but want to reserve PN offset values for future deployment, in the PN Offset Reservation Editor, enable the check box next to the PN Offset values you want to exclude and click OK.

In a cdma2000 network, mobiles scan for pilots having valid PN codes. Valid PN codes are multiples of the pilot increment value. For example, if the pilot increment value is 3, the valid PN codes are incremented by 3 up to 510 (i.e., 0, 3, 6, 9,..., 507, and 510). However, the amount of separation between the first and last PN codes may not meet the pilot increment requirement (0 and 510 are separated by 2, not 510). To prevent this situation, it is recommended that you leave PN code 0 reserved when generating a plan.

13 Under the Advanced node, from the Propagation Path Loss Exponent list, do one of the following:■ Choose a predefined morphology type for the area. Predefined

types correspond to the general morphology types and have values that range between 3 and 4.

■ Choose User Defined and type an exponent value from 2 to 10 in the Propagation Path Loss Exponent Value box.

Morphology types describe the physical environment and reflect the number of obstructions relative to no obstructions in a given area (for example, an exponent value of 3 indicates open space).

471


14 Under the Thresholds node, in the Interference Detection Threshold box, type the threshold for determining whether a distant pilot signal will be seen as interfering with the serving pilot signal.

If the difference in signal strength between the serving and distant pilot signals is greater than the specified threshold, the distant pilot signal is not considered to cause interference because the separation is great enough.

15 If you chose an interference matrix from the Interference Matrix list under the General: Interference Matrix node and want to prevent certain sectors from being labeled interferers, under the Non-Interferer Thresholds node, do the following:■ in the Percentage Affected Area box, type a value from 0 to 10

to indicate the percentage of affected area that may be tolerated. If the affected area is below this threshold, the sector is not considered to be interfering with the serving pilot.

■ in the Percentage Affected Traffic box, type a value from 0 to 10 to indicate the percentage of affected traffic that may be tolerated. If the affected traffic is below this threshold, the sector is not considered to be interfering with the serving pilot. If the interference matrix was not based on a traffic map, this parameter is ignored.

These settings enable you to allow sectors that would normally be considered interferers to have co-PN assignments. For example, two sectors may have co-PN assignments if the sectors have a hill between them (i.e., any interference would be so small that it would not be considered a problem).

16 Expand the Cell Radius node and, in the Active Server Threshold box, type the minimum signal strength required for a sector to be considered as a active server (i.e., a server that serves users as the best server, the second best server, or the third best server). A sector’s cell radius is estimated based on its active area (i.e., the area where the sector is an active server) for the purpose of PN offset planning.

The active server threshold is based on total transmitted power, not pilot signal strength. When the PN offset planning tool calculates the coverage area based on signal strength, any bin having a received signal strength below the specified threshold is ignored. If the signal is stronger than the threshold, coverage is assumed.

472


17 Click Generate.

The Generate Plan dialog box displays the status of the operation.

18 When the operation completes, click Close.

The new PN offset plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.

Working with PN offset plansAfter you create a PN offset plan, you can edit it and, if required, regenerate it. You can display a PN offset index and if required, edit the associated PN offset assignments directly. If you have an existing PN offset plan, you can add the plan to the project.

To view or edit the properties of a plan 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click a PN offset

plan and choose Properties.2 In the PN Offset Plan Properties dialog box, view or edit the properties

for generating the PN offset plan.

For more information about the properties, press the F1 key.

3 If you edited any of the settings, click Update, and when the operation completes, click Close.

To copy a PN offset plan 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that you want to copy and choose Save Copy As.2 In the Save Plan As dialog box, in the Plan Name box, type a name for

the new plan and click OK.

The new plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.

When you reserve a PN offset value and this value is part of a PN Offset group, the entire group is considered reserved and will be

excluded from the PN offset group planning process. You can clear the check box to make the entire group available.

473


To delete a PN offset plan 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that you want to delete and choose Delete.2 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

The PN offset plan is removed from the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer and the PN offset plan files are deleted.

To display PN offset assignments in the Map window ■ In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that you want to display and choose View.

The PN offset assignments in the selected PN offset plan are displayed as labels in the Map window.

To edit the PN offset assignments in a plan 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that contains the PN offset assignments that you want to edit and choose Edit.

2 In the PN Offset Plan Editing dialog box, modify the PN offset assignments in the PN Offset column as required and click OK.

To add a PN offset plan to a project 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset

Plans and choose Add.2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the PN offset plan that you want to

add and click Open.

The PN offset plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.

To turn the labels off, in the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that is on display and choose View.

474


To export PN offset assignmentsYou can export the PN offset assignments from a plan to a comma-separated value (.csv) file.

1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that contains the PN offset assignments that you want to export and choose Export.

2 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to store the file, type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.

Analyzing PN offset plansThe PN Offset Plan Analysis tool enables you to evaluate the quality of PN offset plans by identifying the locations where co-PN and adjacent-PN interference may occur. For example, you could use the PN Offset Planning tool to generate a number of different plans, and then use the PN Offset Plan Analysis tool to evaluate the quality of the different plans before you apply a plan to the sectors in your project. For information on generating PN offset plans, see “Creating PN offset plans” on page 467.You can generate any of the following analysis layers as part of a PN offset analysis:

■ Interference Type—displays the type of interference, which can be any of the following:

■ Co-PN interference■ Adjacent-PN interference■ Co- and Adjacent-PN interference■ No interference

■ Worst Adjacent-PN Interferer—displays the worst Adjacent-PN interferer for a given location.

475


■ Adjacent-PN - Delta Pilot Signal Strength—displays the difference in pilot signal strength between the best serving sector and the worst adjacent-PN interferer.

■ Worst Co-PN Interferer—displays the worst co-PN interferer for a given location.

■ Co-PN - Delta Pilot Signal Strength—displays the difference in pilot signal strength between the best serving sector and the worst co-PN interferer.

To analyze a PN offset plan1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that you want to analyze and choose Analyze Plan.

The PN Offset Plan Analysis dialog box opens.

The Worst Adjacent-PN Interferer and Worst Co-PN Interferer layers do not indicate the victim. The victim is the best serving sector and can be

determined from the Best Server analysis layer. For more information on analysis layers, see “Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407. This information is also contained in the PN offset plan analysis report. See “To display a PN offset plan analysis report” on page 478.

476


2 In the Interference Detection Threshold box, type the value for determining whether a distant pilot signal will be seen as interfering with the serving pilot signal.

If the PN offset plan was created using Mentum Planet, the default is the value that was used to create the plan. If the difference between the serving pilot signal strength and the distant pilot signal strength is greater than this threshold, the distant pilot is not considered

3 In the Output Layers section, enable the check box beside each of the PN offset analysis layers that you want to generate.

You must choose at least one analysis layer.

4 In the Resolution section, enable one of the following options to define the analysis resolution:■ Elevation File Resolution—uses the same resolution as the

digital elevation model (DEM) and signal strength prediction files.

■ User Defined—choose a resolution from the list. The available resolutions are multiples of the DEM resolution. Using a lower resolution will decrease the accuracy of the PN offset plan analysis, but will speed up the analysis process.

5 In the Analysis Area section, choose one of the following options to define the area that will be used for the analysis:■ Automatic—the total combined prediction area.■ Current Window—the area displayed within the current Map

window.■ User Defined Area—a predefined area grid. For information on

creating area grid files, see Chapter 14, “Working With Grids”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

6 Click OK.

The PN Offset Plan Conflict Analysis dialog box displays the progress of the analysis. Path loss or signal strength files will be updated automatically if required.

7 When the PN offset plan analysis is complete, click OK in the Mentum Planet dialog box.

The analysis layers are displayed in the Project Explorer under the PN offset plan node you chose in Step 1.

477


To view PN offset plan analysis layers in a Map window■ In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, under the PN

Offset Plans node, expand a PN offset plan for which you have generated an analysis, right-click an analysis layer, and choose View.


To display a PN offset plan analysis report■ In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan for which you want to view the PN offset analysis report and choose Display Analysis Report.

The PN offset analysis report is displayed in your default text editor. The report lists the settings used to create the PN offset plan, the PN offset usage, and the affected sectors.

Displaying PN offset reports After you generate or update a PN offset plan, you can display the following information in a report (.txt) file:

■ the current PN offset plan settings■ the total number of available, reserved, allocated, and unused PN

offset values■ the estimated average cell radius of the sites included in the PN

offset plan■ the number of sectors having PN offset assignments and the PN

offset values assigned to each sector

To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, under the PN Offset Plans node,

right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove.

You can calculate layer statistics for PN offset plan analysis layers by right-clicking a PN offset plan analysis layer and choosing Statistics.

For more information on calculating layer statistics, see “Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 503.

478


The Notes column of the PN offset report indicates whether a sector is “interfered” or “not allocated” based on the current PN assignments. While the algorithm in Mentum Planet always attempts to assign PN offsets in such a way as to minimize potential interference, in some cases the PN offset plan settings defined cannot be met using the available PN offsets. In this case, the algorithm will assign the PN offset value that will create the minimum amount of interference. If the Notes column indicates:

■ Interfered—there is potential co-PN or adj-PN interference at the sector based on the current PN assignments.

■ Not allocated, conflicting neighbors—there is a conflict contained in the neighbor list

■ Not allocated, invalid radius—there is no coverage at the sector.If there are many interferers flagged in the Notes column, the criteria defined in the PN Offset Plan dialog box may be too stringent (e.g., if the minimum signal strength is set too low, the radius of the cell’s active area may be over-estimated).

To display a PN offset report■ In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan for which you want a report and click Display Report.

The report is displayed in your default text editor.

Applying PN offset plansOnce you have created a PN offset plan and analyzed it for potential co-PN and adjacent-PN interference, you can apply it to the sectors in your project.

Before you apply a plan, if the sectors contain PN offset assignments that you want to save, you can create a PN offset plan using the PN

offset assignments from the sectors (see “To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings” on page 468).

479


To apply a PN offset plan to a project 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN

offset plan that you want to apply and do one of the following:■ To apply the plan to the carrier for which the plan was generated,

choose Apply ➤ Apply to Default Carrier.■ To apply the plan to all carriers, choose Apply ➤ Apply to All

Carriers.2 In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.

The PN offset assignments in the plan are applied to the sectors in your project.

480

Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports

22.
Generating cdma2000 Reports

reports■ Predefined report designs■ Workflow for generating

cdma2000 reports■ Generating a cdma2000

report using a predefined report design

■ Designing a cdma2000 report■ Generating a cdma2000

report■ Calculating statistics for

cdma2000 analysis layers

This chapter describes how to design and generate

reports about data in your cdma2000 network.

481


Understanding cdma2000 reportsA report is a table of data in HTML or Excel format that provides information about your network. You can design, preview, save, and generate reports. You can include the following types of data in a report:

■ general data—applies to all technologies enabled in your network. You can include the following types of general data in your report:

■ cell equipment data—data about the sectors in the project (you can choose W-CDMA, cdma2000, or TDMA/FDMA)

■ antenna data■ subscriber data■ data generated using the layer statistics tool

■ W-CDMA-specific data—applies only to W-CDMA. You can include the following types of W-CDMA-specific data in your report:

■ Monte Carlo simulation data■ W-CDMA analysis layer statistic data

■ cdma2000-specific data—applies only to cdma2000. You can include the following types of cdma2000-specific data in your report:

■ Monte Carlo simulation data■ cdma2000 analysis layer statistic data

You can design and generate a report or you can generate a report using one of the predefined report designs provided with Mentum Planet. For details on predefined report designs, see “Predefined report designs” on page 484.When you design a report, you define the types of data to include, and then choose the specific items within each type to include. The following sections provide details about the types of cdma2000-specific data available for reports.

cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data The Monte Carlo simulation data available for reports is divided into four categories:

■ Carrier-sector—the types of power received by the carriers and sectors listed in the report, for example, total power, in-cell

482

Generating cdma2000 ReportsCDMA User Guide

power, pilot power, traffic channel powers, and other channel powers

■ Carrier-sector-mobile—data on a carrier-sector basis about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handoff state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits

■ System-mobile—system-level data about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handoff state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits

■ Throughput—primary and secondary forward link and primary reverse link throughput data for sectors, carriers, and subscriber types

The data for each category is based on the average of the operating points generated during the Monte Carlo simulation. For overview information on operating points, see “Generating operating points and subscriber information” on page 399. For details on each operating point, see “Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format” on page 545.

Using more than one type of data in a reportYou can create a report using one or more types of data. If you choose to use more than one type, you may need to specify how you want the information to be related by choosing a key column for both the parent and the child table. In general, this is handled automatically for reports with similar data, but for some combinations, you will need to specify the relationship. For a row in the child table to reference a row in the parent table, the chosen key columns for both tables must contain matching data values. If they do not, the rows are omitted from the resulting report. For example, if you add carrier-sector-mobile data to carrier-sector data, and you choose Site Id as the key column for both tables, then the resulting table contains a row for each Site Id that exists in both tables.

483


cdma2000 analysis layer dataAfter you generate cdma2000 analysis layers, you can calculate statistics for an analysis layer using information from a clutter grid file, a traffic map, or a user-defined filter.The statistics generated include the analysis area and a percentage value, and any additional columns created by the applied traffic map, clutter, or filter. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 503.

Using report data to help in cdma2000 network analysisYou can use the data in a report to help you interpret and adjust the factors influencing coverage and performance in your cdma2000 network. In a typical cdma2000 analysis, you would generate a report using data from an initial Monte Carlo simulation for additional information about the analysis. If you determine that the simulation requires more runs, you can append more runs to the simulation and generate another report to view the results.

Predefined report designs A set of predefined report designs is provided for you to use to generate reports quickly and easily. Each predefined report design comprises two files:

■ a .wrp file, which identifies the columns included in the report. These files are stored in the Reports\CDMA folder in your project.

■ an Excel template file, which formats the information. These files are stored in the Reports\exceltemplates folder in your project.

The Excel files contain macros that create appropriate column names and provide other functions, for example, the carrier-sector report contains a macro that converts values from mW to dBm for easier interpretation and comparison. You can view the raw data for any report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the Excel report.The following sections describe the predefined report designs.

System-mobile-simple reportThis report provides a row for users served for each subscriber type and environment combination. Columns are color coded. Dark blue indicates general information, such as site and sector ID. Purple indicates served users.

484


Light blue indicates users that are not served. Figure 22.1 shows a portion of an example system-mobile-simple report.

Figure 22.1 Example system-mobile-simple report

Carrier-sector-mobile reportThis report shows users served on a per-sector basis. This report uses the same color scheme as the system-mobile-simple report.

Carrier-sectorThis report provides a summary of the powers per sector for each site/sector/subscriber type/environment combination.

System-mobileThis report provides a pivot table in Excel that enables you to click and drag items to create the set of columns that you want to view. It also provides pie charts for the available statistics.

ThroughputThis report provides a row for throughput for each site/sector/subscriber type/environment combination.

Columns in predefined reportsTable 22.1 describes the columns available for predefined reports and identifies the reports in which the column appears.

485


Table 22.1 Columns in predefined reports


Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

Site Id Name of the site.

Sector Id Name of the sector.

Site Sector Id Combined site and sector name.

Carrier Name Automatically assigned carrier name.

Channel Name User-defined carrier name.

Subscriber Type Name of the subscriber type.

Service Name of the service.

Quality Name of the quality.

Environment Name of the environment.

Primary Forward Link Throughput

Forward Link throughput as primary.

Secondary Forward Link Throughput

Forward Link throughput as secondary (handoff).

Primary Reverse Link Throughput

Reverse Link throughput as primary.

Secondary Reverse Link Throughput

Reverse Link throughput as secondary (handoff).

Percentage of Maximum Forward Link Pooled Throughput

Forward link throughput as a percentage of the maximum downlink pooled throughput.

Average Achieved Rate for Forward Link Primary Subscribers

Average achieved rate for Forward Link Primary Subscribers.

486


Average Achieved Rate for Forward Link Secondary Subscribers

Average achieved rate for Forward Link Secondary Subscribers.

Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Primary Subscribers

Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Primary Subscribers.

Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Secondary Subscribers

Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Secondary Subscribers.

Scheduler Gain Scheduler Gain.

Forward Link Captured Subscriber Throughput

The forward captured subscriber throughput is calculated by multiplying the number of served subscribers by the service data rate and by the packet call activity factor.

Not Served Number of subscribers not served for any reason.

Dropped Number of subscribers not served for any reason.

Not in Handoff Number of subscribers not in handoff.

Softer Handoff Number of subscribers in softer handoff.

Soft Handoff Number of subscribers in soft handoff.

Softer Soft Handoff Number of subscribers in softer-soft handoff.

Soft Softer Handoff Number of subscribers in soft-softer handoff.

Soft Soft Handoff Number of subscribers in soft-soft handoff.

Softer Softer Handoff Number of subscribers in softer-softer handoff.

4 Way Handoff Number of subscribers in four-server handoff.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

487


5 Way Handoff Number of subscribers in five-server handoff.

6 Way Handoff Number of subscribers in six-server handoff.

7 Way Handoff Number of subscribers in seven-server handoff.

Served Total number of subscribers who have been served.

Non-negotiated The number of users served where the Reverse Link is served at the highest available bearer rate, and Forward link is negotiated to a lower rate from the highest available.

Forward Link Negotiated

The number of users served where the Forward Link path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Reverse Link is at the highest available bearer rate.

Reverse Link Negotiated

The number of users served where the Reverse Link path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Forward Link is at the highest available bearer rate.

Negotiated The number of users served where both the Reverse Link and Forward Link paths have been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate.

Served by Repeater Total number of subscribers who have been served by repeaters on the sector as primary.

Handoff with Repeater Number of subscribers in handoff where a repeater on this sector is the handoff server.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

488


Mobile PA Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the forward link.

Reverse Link Noise Rise

Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors.A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit.

Forward Link Channel Element Limit

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the forward link.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

Reverse Link Channel Element Limit

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the Reverse Link.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

User Limit Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the forward link.

Cell Radius Limit Number of subscribers on the forward link not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius.

Speed Limit Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell.

Throughput Limit Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

489


Primary Dropped Due to Code

Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server.

Primary Dropped Due to PA

Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient PA power at the best server.

Primary Dropped Due to Pilot

Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server.

Primary Dropped Due to Traffic

Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient voice power.

Handoff Dropped Due to Forward Link CE

Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements.

Handoff Dropped Due to Reverse Link CE

Number of handoff connections refused during Reverse Link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements.

Handoff Dropped Due to Code

Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient channel codes.

Handoff Dropped Due to PA

Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient PA power.

Handoff Dropped Due to Traffic

Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient voice power.

Used Reverse Link Channel Elements

Number of Reverse Link channel elements used.

Required Reverse Link Channel Elements

Number of Reverse Link channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

490


Used Forward Link Channel Elements

Number of Forward Link channel elements used.

Required Forward Link Channel Elements

Number of Forward Link channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.

Total Forward PA Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscriber’s target.

Forward Code Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the forward link.

Pilot Power Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the forward link. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

Traffic Power Limit Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power on the forward link to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target.

Prev Total Rcv Power_mW

Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers.

Current Total Rcv Power_mW




Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

491


Pilot Power_mW Output power of the pilot channel.

Sync Power_mW Output power of the sync channel.

Paging Power_mW Output power of the paging channel.

Current Rcv Power_mW


In Cell Power_mW Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation.

Attenuated Power_mW In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor.

Total Traffic Power per Run_mW

Total power of all best server voice channels.This value includes the voice activity factor.

Average Traffic Power per Subscriber_mW

Average power of a single voice channel.This value does not include the voice activity factor.

Max Traffic Power per Channel_mW

Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor.

Min Traffic Power per Channel_mW

Minimum power of the best server voice channel.This value does not include the voice activity factor.

TrafficNoise Rise Noise rise on the reverse link.

Total Noise Rise Total noise rise on the reverse link.

Rx Eb_No Eb/No on the reverse link.

TrafficLoad Sector load on the forward link.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

492


Traffic Load_Percentage

Sector load on the forward link as a percentage.

Load_Percentage Reverse link load given as a percentage.

Total Load Total sector load.

Total Load_Percentage Total sector load as a percentage.

Frequency Re-use Efficiency

Frequency re-use efficiency given as a percentage, equal to:(in cell interference) / (total interference)*100

Other Cell Interference Factor

Other-cell interference factor (OCIF) given in a linear form, equal to:(other cell interference) / (own cell interference)

F-Factor F-factor given as a linear term, equal to:(own cell interference) / (total interference)

Mean Required Receive Power

Mean value of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the reverse link.

Standard Dev Required Receive Power

Standard deviation of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the reverse link.



Syst

em-m

obile

-sim

ple

Car

rier-

sect

or-m

obile

Car

rier-

sect

or

Syst

em-m

obile

Thro

ughp

ut

493


Workflow for generating cdma2000 reportsStep 1 Generate a Monte Carlo simulation. See “Chapter 19: Generating

Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

Step 2 If you want to include cdma2000 analysis layer statistics in a report, do the following:■ Generate cdma2000 analysis layers. See

“Understanding cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 407.

■ Generate statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers and add them to the Report Designer. See “Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 503.

Step 3 Optionally, design a report. See “Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design” on page 494 or “Designing a cdma2000 report” on page 495.

Step 4 Generate a report using a predefined report design or using the report design that you created. See “Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design” on page 494 or “Generating a cdma2000 report” on page 502.

Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report designUsing predefined reports removes the need for you to design a report before generating it. The predefined report designs use templates that are in Excel format. When you create a new project, the predefined report designs are automatically copied into the Reports folder for the project. If you are using an existing project and want to use the predefined report designs, you will need to copy all of the folders in the Mentum Planet 4\global\Reports folder to the Reports folder in your project.Each report contains macros that format the data. You can view the raw data used to create any predefined report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the report.

Modifying a predefined report designIf you want to modify a predefined report design, you can modify the Excel template without making changes to the report design (the .wrp file), but if you modify the report design, you need to modify the Excel template (i.e., if

494


you remove a column by clearing the check box on the Design tab of the Report Designer, you need to delete it from the Excel template as well). You should only modify the Excel template if you are familiar with Excel. To modify the report design, you need to load it into the Report Designer and modify it. See “To modify an existing cdma2000 report design” on page 501.

To generate a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports.

2 In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report design that you want to generate and click OK.

For details on the predefined reports that are available, see “Predefined report designs” on page 484.

3 From the Select Output Format list, choose Excel and click OK.

The report is generated and opens in Excel.

Designing a cdma2000 report The Report Designer enables you to create an overall design for a report before you generate it. You can customize the data that in the report and define the output format of the report.After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the operating points are automatically available in the Report Designer. If you want to use layer statistics in a report, you must manually add the data to the Report Designer. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 503.





495


The Report Designer enables you to preview the report before you save it or generate it. Previewing a report enables you to customize the data or output settings until you are satisfied with the result. Once you are satisfied with the design, you can save it until you want to generate the report. Report designs are stored in the Reports folder of your project. You can also load and modify report designs in the Report Designer even after you have generated reports. This option is useful, for example, if you want to add layer statistics data to an existing report that only contains Monte Carlo operating points.

To design a cdma2000 report1 Choose Data ➤ Design Report.

The Report Designer opens.

2 On the Data tab, in the Available Data section, expand one of the following nodes and choose the type of cdma2000 data to add to the report:■ Cell Equipment—contains data about sector settings. For more

information, see Chapter 5, “Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites” in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide, “Chapter 5:

496


Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites” on page 83, and “Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites” on page 327. Additional information can be found in “Appendix E: Import and Export Tables” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Antenna—contains data about the antenna patterns in the project. For more information, see Chapter 3, “Working with Antenna Patterns”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ Subscribers—contains data about the subscriber information in the Subscriber Manager. For information on the columns available in this report, see the Subscriber_Equipment_Types worksheet and the Subscriber worksheet in “Appendix E: Import and Export Tables” in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

■ <analysis name>—contains the following categories of data:■ Carrier-sector—contains mean values from per-sector

operating points. For more information, see “cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 482 and “Per-sector operating points” on page 548.

■ Carrier-sector-mobile—contains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see “cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 482 and “Per-subscriber type operating points” on page 549.

■ System-mobile—contains mean values from sub-category operating points. For more information, see “cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 482 and “Sub-category operating points” on page 546.

■ Throughput—contains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see “cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data” on page 482 and “Per-subscriber type operating points” on page 549.

■ Layer Statistics—contains statistics from a cdma2000 analysis layer. Layer statistics will only appear in the Available Data section if you have calculated them and added them to the report design. For more information, see “Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers” on page 503.

3 Type a description for the data in the Edit Description for the Data section, and click the right arrow.

The data is added to the Selected Data section.

497


4 To add more data to the report, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.5 If the Relation Selector dialog box is displayed, do the following:

■ To define the data from a parent table, do the following:■ From the Select Parent Table list, choose the table that

contains the rows to be referenced by the child table.■ From the Select Key Column From Parent Table list,

choose the column in the parent table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables.

■ To define the data from a child table, do both of the following:■ From the Select Child Table list, choose the table that

contains the rows that you want to be referenced by the parent table.

■ From the Select Key Column From Child Table list, choose the column in the child table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables.

■ Click OK to close the Relation Selector dialog box.6 To display a preview of the report, click Preview.


498


To define the data columns for a cdma2000 report1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Design tab.

2 To change the name of a column, click in the Column Label box and type a name.

3 To include or exclude columns from the report, do any of the following:■ To exclude a single column, clear the check box in the Show

column.■ To exclude all columns, click Clear All.■ To include all columns, click Show All.

4 To change the order of the columns, choose one or more columns and click the up arrow or down arrow.

To choose a column, click the column number.



499


To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Output tab.

2 In the Select Export Destination section, choose one of the following formats from the Format list:■ Excel—the report is opened in Microsoft Excel. Using Microsoft

Excel, you can save the report in .xls format. To use this option, you must have Microsoft Excel installed.

■ HTML—the report is saved in HTML (.htm) format. If you choose this option, you can choose, from the Output list, whether to save the report to a file or open it in a Web browser.

■ MapInfo—the report is saved in a MapInfo (.tab) file3 In the Export Settings section, define the settings that are specific to the

type of format that you chose.■ If you chose Excel in Step 2, you can define the sheet name (the

name of the first tab in the Excel file), template file name, and macros to use. Typically, you would use these fields if you have designed a custom Excel template and want to use it for your report data. If you are modifying a predefined report design, you can choose the predefined Excel template that corresponds to the data that you are including in the report (i.e., if you are including

500


carrier-sector data in your report, you should choose the carrier-sector Excel template).

■ If you chose HTML in Step 2, you can define HTML-specific export settings, including the file to be used for the report header and footer. If you want to use the header and footer provided with Mentum Planet, do the following:

■ Click Browse next to the Header Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Header.htm file in your project folder and click Open.

■ Click Browse next to the Footer Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Footer.htm file in your project folder and click Open.

■ If you chose MapInfo in Step 2, you can define MapInfo-specific settings. No template files are provided with Mentum Planet for this option.

For more information on the settings in this section, press the F1 key. If you do not define custom settings, the default settings will be used.

4 To define output settings for another format, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.5 To display a preview of the report, click Preview.


To save the cdma2000 report design 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Save As.2 In the Save Report dialog box, type a name for the report in the Report

Name box.3 From the Report Category list, choose cdma2000, and click OK.

The report design will be saved in the Reports\CDMA folder of your project. Report designs are saved with the file extension of .wrp.

To modify an existing cdma2000 report design1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Load.2 In the Open Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to open,

and click OK.

501


3 In the Report Designer, modify the settings of the report design.

For more information on these settings, see “To design a cdma2000 report” on page 496.

To delete a cdma2000 report design 1 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File ➤ Remove.2 In the Remove Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to

delete, and click Remove.

Generating a cdma2000 report After you have designed and saved a report design in the cdma2000 category, you can use the Generate Report dialog box to generate multiple reports simultaneously.

To generate a cdma2000 report1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand

cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports.

2 In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to generate.

3 From the Select Output Format list, choose the format for the report output.

The output settings for each format are defined on the Output tab of the Report Designer and saved in the report design that you are generating (see “To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report” on page 500). You can output the report in any of the three formats.

502


4 Click OK.

The report is generated and displayed or saved in the output format that you chose.

Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers

You can calculate statistics on the individual cdma2000 analysis layers that you have generated, including PN offset plan analysis layers. You can calculate statistics based on the entire numeric grid (.grd) file, an area grid, or a selection in the Map window. You can further customize the statistics based on a clutter grid file, traffic map, or a user-defined filter.For information on generating PN offset analysis report layers, see “Analyzing PN offset plans” on page 475.After you calculate statistics, you can add them to a new or existing report design.

To calculate cdma2000 layer statistics1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category or the PN

Offset Plans node in the RF Tools category, choose the analysis layers that you want to add to the report, right-click one of the analysis layers and choose Statistics.


2 To manually add additional analysis layers to the list, click Add Layer, navigate to the file that you want to add, and click Open.





When you calculate layer statistics, they are automatically displayed in Microsoft Excel. In order to use the Layer Statistics Analysis tool, you

must have Microsoft Excel installed.

503


3 In the tree view, choose Analysis Settings.


4 On the Analysis Settings panel, choose one of the following from the Analysis Area list:■ Current Window—statistics are generated based on the area

displayed in the Map window■ Entire Layer—statistics are generated based on the area defined

in the cdma2000 analysis layer(s) used■ Selected Rectangle—statistics are generated for the area that is

enclosed by the selected rectangle in the Map window. You can use the MapInfo rectangle tool to create a rectangle. For more information, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide.

■ Area—statistics are generated based on an area grid. For more information, see “Creating area grids” in Chapter 14, “Working With Grids”, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.

5 To remove bins with null values from the analysis layer calculations, enable the Exclude Null Values check box.

504


6 To generate additional statistics, broken down by a classification, enable the Use Classified Grid check box, click Browse to navigate to the file, choose the file and click OK.

The default classified grid file is the clutter grid file defined for the project.

Any classified grid can be used to perform different kinds of statistical analysis. For example, to produce a statistical breakdown for each sector, use a best server layer as the classification grid. This breaks the statistics down by best server area.

7 To generate traffic statistics, enable the Use Traffic Map check box and choose a traffic map from the Traffic Map list.

8 To filter the analysis area based on a grid file, enable the Apply Area Filter check box.

The area filter is applied globally to all layers.

9 If you want to define individual area filters for each layer, enable the Set Area Filter By Layer check box.

10 If you are applying area filters globally to all layers, do the following:■ To define the area raster, click Browse, navigate to the grid file,

and click OK.■ To define the condition for the filter, type an expression in the

Condition box. For example, choosing the SignalStrength.grd file and defining the expression would only consider pixels within the analysis area that have a signal strength greater than 100.

For more information on creating expressions, press the F1 key.

11 To discard statistical results that only contain zero values, enable the Discard Result That Only Contains Zero Statistics check box.

With this check box enabled, records where all columns contain zero values will be removed from the statistical report.

12 From the Export Format list, choose one of the following formats:■ Excel—statistics will be displayed in Microsoft Excel when they

are generated.■ Html—statistics are generated in an HTML (.htm) file and

stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\Html folder in the project. There will be one .htm file for each layer for which

v 100>

505


you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically.

■ MapInfo Table—statistics are generated in MapInfo (.tab) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder. There will be one .tab file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. To display the files, see “To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table format” on page 508.

13 If the Layers node in the tree view does not contain layers, click Add Layer, choose the numeric grid (.grd) file that you want to add, and click Open.

14 In the tree view, expand Layers and choose the analysis layer for which you want to obtain statistics.

The Layers panel opens to display layer information about the data type, resolution, and the area.

506


15 If you want to define classification settings for the analysis layer, define any of the available settings in the Classifications Settings section.

The settings that are available in this section are dependent on the data type of the analysis layer (classified or numeric). Do any of the following:

■ In the Classifications box, choose the classification for the analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified.

■ To split the classification by site and sector names, enable the Split Classification to Get Site and Sector Names check box. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified.

■ To define the data ranges for which to calculate statistics, type the threshold values in the Threshold Definition box, separated by semi-colons. The default thresholds are set by equally dividing the range of Zmin and Zmax values contained in the chosen analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is numeric.

■ In the Classification Name box, type a name for the classification in this box. This option is available for both the classified and numeric data types.

16 If you want to define area filters for individual layers and enabled the Set Area Filter By Layer check box on the Analysis Settings panel, click the Area Filters button.

Area filter settings are saved in LayerStatistics.set file located in the Settings/Layer Statistics folder within the project folder.

17 In the Area Filters dialog box, do the following:■ Click the Add Row button.■ Click the Browse (...) button next to the Area Raster box,

navigate to where the raster file is saved, and click Open.■ Click in the Condition box and define a filter condition for the

layer. Press the F1 key for more information on creating conditions.

18 Repeat the previous step until you have defined all the required filters and click OK.

507


19 Click Calculate Statistics.

The settings in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box are saved automatically for use the next time you calculate layer statistics.

To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table formatIf you saved your statistics in MapInfo (.tab) format, you can view them in a Map window.

1 Choose File ➤ Open Table.2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo

folder of your project and choose the MapInfo (.tab) file that you want to display.


The layer statistics table opens in a new Browser window.

To add cdma2000 layer statistics to a report design

1 After the statistics have been calculated, in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box, click Design Report.

The Report Designer opens, with the layers in the Available Data section.

2 Design the report using the instructions provided in “Designing a cdma2000 report” on page 495.

3 Generate the report using the instructions provided in “Generating a cdma2000 report” on page 502.

You can also access the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box by choosing Analysis ➤ Layer Statistics.

508

Appendices

Appendices

Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks

A.
Modeling W-CDMA Networks
This appendix describes factors that influence coverage in a W-CDMA network and how they are dealt with during the network analysis process:

■ Interference■ Slow fading margin■ Penetration losses

InterferenceW-CDMA networks are limited by interference. In other words, the amount of interference in the network determines the capacity and coverage of the network. The following sections describe the different types of interference that can affect W-CDMA networks.

Downlink interference Many signals are transmitted on the downlink. These signals can be grouped into two categories: physical channels and transport channels. Physical channels include

■ Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)■ Synchronisation Channel (SCH)■ Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH)

Transport channels include■ Paging Channel (PCH)■ Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)■ Downlink Shared Channel (DSCH)

511

Appendix ACDMA User Guide

Transport channels are mapped onto physical channels. The mobile receiver detects each physical channel individually because the channels are coded using Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors (OVSF) also known as channelization codes. A property of these codes is that they are orthogonal to each other, enabling the physical channels to be separated and spread over the same band and still be recoverable.The sources of downlink interference are:

■ Non-orthogonality—interference that occurs due to factors that reduce the orthogonality of a physical channel, which increases channel interference and reduces the available capacity. Generally, factors that reduce the degree of orthogonality include significant multipath signals with longer time delays, Doppler spread (which occurs when users are moving within a multipath environment), and power amplifier non-linearity. As the degree of orthogonality of these signals decreases (i.e., non-orthogonality increases), the interference due to these signals on the desired signal increases and reduces its signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the transmitted power from the site must be increased in order to achieve the required signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) Interference caused by the non-orthogonality of the signals transmitted from the site with which a mobile subscriber is communicating is sometimes referred to as in-cell interference.

■ Interference from other sites—interference that occurs out-of-cell. All the signal energy received at the mobile from these other sites is interference (i.e., there is no orthogonality associated with these signals from other sites). There are many locations in the network where this out-of-cell interference dominates.

■ Thermal noise—interference that occurs at the mobile due to its own thermal noise (i.e., kTB noise). Thermal noise is the internal noise of the mobile (i.e., noise that exists when the mobile is located far away from all other sources of interference).

■ Unknown interference—interference occurring from foreign sources. The source of this interference may not be completely unknown because there may be energy introduced into the carrier band from a known adjacent carrier. An examination of the spectrum mask of adjacent carriers may indicate the level of interference to expect. Foreign interference is the difference between the thermal noise, as described above, and the noise measured when you take the same mobile into a region of the network, with the network completely shut down.

512

Modeling W-CDMA NetworksCDMA User Guide

Uplink interference Uplink interference refers to noise at the site receivers. Just as there are many channels associated with the downlink, there are also many channels transmitted by the mobile on the uplink. Some of these are access channels, used for responding to pages, and general network feedback requirements. Others are used specifically for transmitting physical channels (voice or packet data) and for controlling downlink power while receiving data.On the downlink, transmitted energy is from one source (the site transmitting antenna) and the energy is received by many receivers (mobiles). Because the downlink uses channelization codes, there can be orthogonality, and this is realized at the distributed users. This concept does not apply on the uplink because there are many users transmitting primarily to the one site receiving antenna. The received signals are not time synchronized, and so there is no real possibility for orthogonality of the received signals. The sources of uplink interference are:

■ In-cell interference—caused by users communicating with the site. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the downlink power. Interference caused by users who are in second, or greater levels of handover, will likely have their equipment powers controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest CPICH signal.

■ Out-of-cell interference—caused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites

■ Front end noise and foreign noise—these sources are similar to that described for the downlink interference. The total received noise level (Io+No) at the site receiver from each user depends upon the required Eb/No to achieve an acceptable level of energy at the receiver. As the noise increases, which happens as more users access the network, the required power from the mobile also increases. When the required power from the mobile exceeds its maximum power, the call is dropped or the session is terminated. Just as the total traffic power is required to determine the downlink interference, the received noise at the site receiver is required to determine the power needed by the users to transmit a viable signal. Yet, the transmitted power of the mobile affects the received noise level.

CPICH interference It is necessary to determine the CPICH coverage for each site because the CPICH signal effectively determines the extent of network coverage on the downlink. The energy per chip per interference density (Ec/Io) is measured on the CPICH channel. It is continuously monitored by the mobiles and compared against the CPICH Target Ec/Io and the CPICH pollution margin.

513


The CPICH Target Ec/Io value is the signal-to-noise ratio required for a good quality of service and is defined on the Quality panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The CPICH pollution margin is the Ec/Io margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a CPICH signal will interfere with the desired signal, and is defined on the General panel of the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box.The sources of CPICH interference are

■ in-cell interference energy from the other channels transmitted from the same site as the CPICH signal

■ out-of-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites■ thermal (kTB) noise of the receiver■ energy from external sources

Downlink traffic interference The DPCH carries voice or data information and must be received by the user with sufficient power to satisfy quality of service requirements (i.e., the required Eb/No value must be met by the mobile signal) if the connection is to be maintained. The Eb/No value is defined as the energy per bit per noise power density. In reality, the noise is due not only to mobile receiver thermal noise (kTB noise) but also to noise from other signal sources.The sources of traffic signal interference are:

■ same-cell interference energy from the non-orthogonal component of the other channels transmitted from the same site from which the traffic signal originates

■ other-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites■ mobile receiver’s thermal noise■ energy from external or foreign sources

Because the signal is spread over the full bandwidth, the Eb/No benefits from the spreading (processing) gain.

Controlling interference Effective power control decreases the interference across the network. Downlink power control ensures the traffic power meets the mobile’s Eb/No requirement, without using excessive power. If the traffic power is excessive, capacity-limiting interference occurs on other traffic and CPICH signals. Likewise, on the uplink, inadequate power control can lead to interference on the network if the mobile is using excessive power to communicate with the site. As more users are added to a network, the received noise level at the site

514


increases. In order for the mobile to maintain an acceptable Eb/No, it needs to increase the transmitted power. If the user is moving closer to the site, and/or comes out of a shadowed area, the received signal at the site will increase quickly. This improves the voice quality of the signal but also greatly increases the interference experienced by other users and, in turn, reduces their voice quality. To prevent the increase in interference, very fast mobile traffic power control is required. W-CDMA technology achieves this fast power control by having the site measure the uplink Eb/No value and assess the quality of service for every user to which it is connected, many hundreds of times a second. With each measurement, two situations can arise:

■ the measured Eb/No is too high, in which case the site commands the mobile to decrease the power it transmits

■ the measured Eb/No is too low, in which case the site commands the mobile to increase the power it transmits

If a mobile is in soft handover, there are two or more servers in its active set. The mobile decreases the power it transmits if any of the servers commands, but only increases the power if all the servers command it. This difference gives rise to the soft handover gain, which is described in more detail in the next section.If a user moves behind a building, for example, the mobile must power up in order to continue to stay connected. Likewise, if a user moves close to a site, the mobile must power down in order to reduce the interference it creates. Power control signals are transmitted up to 1.5kHz on both the downlink and uplink. The ability of the network to fully realize the benefit of the power control is dependent on the response time of both inner and outer loop power controls. Outer loop power control is the more restrictive of the two, because it depends on the frame duration and interleaving of data between frames.Due to these response time considerations, the power level needed to achieve the required Eb/No will not be exactly maintained. To accommodate the power delays, it is desirable to model the power control error statistically.

Slow fadingThe phenomenon of slow fading impacts both the behavior and design of the network in a number of ways, including slow fading margin and soft handover gain.

How slow fading is modeledSlow fading is the change in signal strength due to shadowing and unexpected obstructions. You can statistically model the effects of slow fading and include this data in the analysis of your network. In addition to the implicit effects above, you can explicitly model the statistical effects of slow fading in the analysis of your network. Explicit slow

515


fading is only modeled as part of the Monte Carlo analysis for pixels that contain subscribers. The same slow fading values can be used for both the downlink and uplink, and are correlated between the different sectors with path loss values at that location.

Using a correlation model to model slow fadingThis section describes the calculations used by Mentum Planet to model slow fading using the angular correlation model.

Angular correlation model equationUnlike non-angular correlation models, which use a correlation factor for co-site sectors and another correlation factor for non co-site sectors, angular correlation models use a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. Equation A.1 enables you to determine the correlation factors for angular correlation models.

Equation A.1 Angular correlation model equation1

Where is the correlation factor at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles less than approximately 20o

is the value of the second term in Equation A.1 at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles greater than 20o

is the angle between the sites

In this equation, the correlation factor decreases from at 0o to approximately zero at 180o. The rate of decrease is controlled by the parameters and .

ExampleFigure A.1 displays an example of the correlation factor as a function of the angle between two sites. The data is from urban and suburban macrocells.

1.Cochannel Measurements for Interference Limited Small-Cell Planning, J. Van Rees,AEii, vol. 41, pp318-320, 1987.

ρij ρ0 B–( )e φ ij α⁄– Be φ ij β⁄ 0° φij 180°≤≤–+=

ρ0

α

B

β

φi j

φ i j ρ0α β

516


Figure A.1 The vertical axis represents the correlation factor, and the horizontal axis represents the opening angle in degrees.

Table A.1 describes the values used for each parameter in Figure A.1.

Determining the mean correlation factorAssuming uniformly distributed angles, the mean correlation factor is provided in Equation A.2.

Equation A.2 Mean correlation factor

Using the parameter values in Table A.1, the mean correlation factor is 0.22.

Table A.1 Values used in the correlation function parameters

Parameter Value

0.83

5o

B 0.6

70o

ρ0

α

β

ρ ρ0 B–( )α 1 e180 α⁄–( ) Bβ 1 e180 β⁄–( )+[ ] 180⁄=

517


Slow fading margin The fade margin defines the amount of additional power required for the transmitted signal to overcome obstacles in the environment and provide the service quality and reliability required. It has no impact on the average amount of power required in the uplink or downlink to achieve the desired performance. Its primary impact is to reduce the extent of the coverage. In determining the downlink and uplink power levels required to provide service to a user at some specified location (bin), an average power calculation is computed based upon the average path loss associated with the bin. Coverage is not guaranteed if the required average powers are close to the maximum mobile power limit. The mobile may not have enough fade margin to allow for power fluctuations, due to local shadowing. This is where coverage probability affects the required fade margin. A high coverage probability produces a relatively high fade margin suitable for speech services and vehicular users of all services. Reducing the coverage probability for mobile users with the ability to move their position to find the best reception reduces the fade margin.The fade margin requirement increases as the signal variability (standard deviation) increases. Its requirement will be reduced significantly in regions of the network where soft handover gain exists. This occurs because the shadowing of the two sites is not correlated. This implies that fade margin requirements are minimized where the nominal signal levels from the sites in soft handover are nearly equal.

Soft handover gains Macro-diversity soft handover gain occurs when a user is receiving a signal from more than one site. In this particular case, the variability of the path loss can have a significant impact on the power requirements. As a result of the variability in the received signals caused by the significant shadowing that can accompany these signals, a signal which might normally be greater from one site (e.g., Site_1) may, over some locations in the same general vicinity, be less than that from a different site (e.g., Site_2). In these situations, the user will be served primarily from Site_2, which will provide the required signal strength at the mobile using a lower transmitted power level than that which would have originated from Site_1. The impact of this is to realize a gain, thus reducing the required power and the interference in the network. The impact of this macro-diversity gain increases as the signal variability increases (i.e., the standard deviation increases), and as the difference between the nominal signal levels from each site decreases (the strength of the signals become more equal) as illustrated in Figure A.2.

518


Figure A.2 The impact of macro-diversity gain

The macro-diversity soft handover gain is fully realized only if the signals coming from the two sites are uncorrelated. Where a mobile is in soft handover with two or three sites with very limited angular separation there is an increased correlation and, hence, a decreased macro-diversity gain. It is also possible to consider the effects of additional gain due to signal combining at the mobile. This is made possible due to the rake receiver in the mobile, and, therefore, impacts only the downlink. It is uncertain what the net impact (if any) of this gain will be, since the signals from these two different sites are generally uncorrelated. Therefore, the possible gain associated with this type of signal combining is not implemented.

Penetration losses Path loss is calculated using models that are calibrated to give path loss predictions that are appropriate for outdoor services. Generally, surveys are conducted to test the accuracy of the prediction model and these values are invariably outdoor measurements. Not all users of services are outdoors. It is therefore necessary to address this discrepancy. Within a bin, some users may be outdoors, some users may be indoors near windows, and some users may be located at the center of buildings where higher penetration losses

519


occur. Some users of these services will be able to move about and use services where signals are stronger.Because of the large variability of signal levels within a bin, it may be possible for some users using some services to have coverage, while other users of the same services may not have coverage due to the higher penetration losses in other locations within the same bin. To deal with how and where a user uses a service, Mentum Planet allows different proportions of users to be allocated to the following environments, each with different penetration loss, in each clutter:

■ Outdoor■ Vehicular■ Indoor■ Deep Indoor

520

Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format
B. W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format
This appendix describes the fields in the discrete subscriber table that is generated when you collect information about the drop status of discrete subscribers during a Monte Carlo simulation. For some subscribers, many of the columns will be null. For more information about collecting information about discrete subscribers, see “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

Column Type Description

Snapshot Integer Count of total snapshots taken during Monte Carlo simulation. This value is the same for all entries in one snapshot file.

Subscriber_Number Integer Number of the discrete subscriber

SubCategory Character (128) Name of subscriber category, including the subscriber type, service type, quality type, and environment

Block_Reason Character (40) “Served” or reason for not serving subscriber

Best_Server Character (51) Site/Sector for serving sector or best failure

Achieved_Downlink_Rate Maximum achieved data rate on the downlink.

Achieved_Uplink_Rate Maximum achieved data rate on the uplink.

521

Appendix BCDMA User Guide

Negotiation_State Five possible negotiation states:■ non-negotiated

■ forward negotiated

■ reverse negotiated

■ negotiated

■ not served

See Table 8.1 on page 154

Carrier Character (32) Serving or preferred carrier. 0 indicates no carrier is defined.

Uplink_Transmit_Power Float Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm

Uplink_Coverage_Probability Float Probability of coverage

Downlink_Transmit_Power Float Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm

Downlink_Supplemental_Transmit Downlink transmit power on the supplemental channel.

Downlink_Coverage_Probability Float Probability of coverage

X Float Latitude

Y Float Longitude

Size Float The DEM resolution

Second_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in two way handover

Third_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in three way handover

Fourth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in four way handover

Fifth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in five way handover

Sixth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in six way handover

Seventh_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in seven way handover


522

Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format
C. W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format
This appendix describes the set of operating points that are created when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information, see “Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA” on page 147.

System variablesThe following table describes the system variables at the beginning of the operating points file.Table C.1 System variables


RUNS_MADE Integer Number of runs in the Monte Carlo simulation up to this point in time

RANDOM_SEED For internal use only

POWER_CONTROL_SEED For internal use only

SLOW_FADING_SEED For internal use only

523

Appendix CCDMA User Guide

Sub-category operating pointsThe following table describes the operating points related to the usage types defined for the subscriber types included in the analysis. Usage types consist of a service type, quality type, and environments.Table C.2 Sub-category operating points


SUB_CATEGORY String Usage to which the following operating points apply

UNSERVED Integer Number of subscribers not served for any reason

NOT_IN_HO Integer Number of subscribers not in handover

SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer handover

SOFT_HO Integer number of subscribers in soft handover

SOFT_SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in soft-softer handover

SOFTER_SOFT_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer-soft handover

SOFT_SOFT_HO Integer Number of subscribers in soft-soft handover

SOFTER_SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer-softer handover

FOUR_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in four-server handover

FIVE_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in five-server handover

SIX_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in six-server handover

SEVEN_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in seven-server handover

SERVED Integer Total number of subscribers who have been served in any handover type

524

W-CDMA Operating Points Table FormatCDMA User Guide

RVS_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the downlink

RVS_LOAD Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors.A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit.

RVS_CE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel elements. This field applies to both the downlink and the uplink.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

RVS_USER_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink.

RVS_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the downlink

FWD_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscriber’s target.

Table C.2 Sub-category operating points (continued)


525


Per-sector operating pointsThe following table describes the per-sector operating points that are common to all subscriber types.

FWD_PILOT_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the uplink. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

FWD_VOICE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient voice power on the uplink to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target

FWD_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the uplink

RVS_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers on the downlink not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius

RVS_CLUTTER_TYPE_SPEED_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell

FWD_DUE_TO_THROUGHPUT_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.

Table C.3 Per-sector operating points


SECTOR String Sector ID

CARRIER String Carrier ID

TIME_SLOT_INDEX Not used

Table C.2 Sub-category operating points (continued)


526


Per-subscriber type operating pointsThe following table describes the operating points that are per-subscriber type.

PREV_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers.

CURRENT_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.

TOTAL_IN_CELL_POWER_MW Float Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation

PILOT_POWER_MW Float Output power of the pilot channel

SYNC_POWER_MW Float Output power of the sync channel

PAGING_POWER_MW Float Output power of the paging channel

HS-DSCH Power Float For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel.

Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points


SUB_CATEGORY String Subscriber category to which the following operating points apply

NUM_USERS Integer Number of subscribers on the uplink captured by this sector

NUM_RPT_USERS Integer Number of subscribers served by a repeater on this sector

Table C.3 Per-sector operating points (continued)


527


NUM_HANDOFF_RPT_USERS Integer Number of subscribers served in handover with a repeater on this sector

FWD_NUM_USERS Integer Number of subscribers on the downlink captured by this sector

CURRENT_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.

ATTENUATED_POWER_MW Float In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor

IN_CELL_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation.This field is used to determine frequency reuse efficiency.

DROPPED_BY_RVS_LOAD Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the noise rise (load) limit on the downlink

REFUSED_BY_USER_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the limit on the maximum number of subscribers served by a sector

REFUSED_BY_RVS_CE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient primary channel elements

DROPPED_DUE_TO_RVS_CODE_LIMIT Integer Not used

DROPPED_DUE_TO_MOBILE_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers blocked on a cell because the required mobile ERP exceeds the maximum ERP

DROPPED_DUE_TO_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius

DROPPED_DUE_TO_SPEED_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell

Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued)


528


TOTAL_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Total power of all best server voice channels.This value includes the Voice Activity Factor.

AVERAGE_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Average power of a single voice channel.This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

MIN_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

MAX_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Maximum power of the best server voice channel.This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

REQUIRED_FWD_CE Integer Number of downlink channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.

USER_FWD_CE Integer Number of downlink channel elements used

UNSERVED_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of subscribers not served at this sector for any reason

NOT_IN_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels not in handover

SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft handover

SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer handover

SOFT_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft-softer handover

SOFTER_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer-soft handover



529


SOFT_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft-soft handover

SOFTER_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer-softer handover

FOUR_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in four-server handover

FIVE_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in five-server handover

SIX_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in six-server handover

SEVEN_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in seven-server handover

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_PILOT Integer Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_VOICE Integer Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient voice power

PRIMARY_DROPPED_BY_PA Integer Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient PA power at the best server

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_THROUGHPUT Integer Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient throughput at the best server

PRIMARY_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server

DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_CE Integer Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements



530


DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_VOICE Integer Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient voice power

HANDOFF_DROPPED_BY_PA Integer Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient PA power

HANDOFF_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE Integer Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient channel codes

DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_THROUGHPUT Integer Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient throughput



531


532

Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks

D.
Modeling cdma2000 Networks
This appendix describes factors that influence coverage in a cdma2000 network and how they are dealt with during the network analysis process:

■ Interference■ Slow fading margin■ Penetration losses

Interferencecdma2000 networks are limited by interference. In other words, the amount of interference in the network determines the capacity and coverage of the network. The following sections describe the different types of interference that can affect cdma2000 networks.

Forward link interference Many signals are transmitted on the forward link. These signals can be grouped into two categories: physical channels and transport channels. Physical channels include

■ Pilot Channel■ Synchronisation Channel (SCH)■ Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH)

Transport channels include■ Paging Channel (PCH)■ Random Access Channel (RACH)■ Forward Link Shared Channel

533

Appendix DSample document

Transport channels are mapped onto physical channels. The mobile receiver detects each physical channel individually because the channels are coded using Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors (OVSF) also known as Walsh codes. A property of these codes is that they are orthogonal to each other, enabling the physical channels to be separated and spread over the same band and still be recoverable.The sources of forward link interference are:

■ Non-orthogonality—interference that occurs due to factors that reduce the orthogonality of a physical channel, which increases channel interference and reduces the available capacity. Generally, factors that reduce the degree of orthogonality include significant multipath signals with longer time delays, Doppler spread (which occurs when users are moving within a multipath environment), and power amplifier non-linearity. As the degree of orthogonality of these signals decreases (i.e., non-orthogonality increases), the interference due to these signals on the desired signal increases and reduces its signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the transmitted power from the site must be increased in order to achieve the required signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) Interference caused by the non-orthogonality of the signals transmitted from the site with which a mobile subscriber is communicating is sometimes referred to as in-cell interference.

■ Interference from other sites—interference that occurs out-of-cell. All the signal energy received at the mobile from these other sites is interference (i.e., there is no orthogonality associated with these signals from other sites). There are many locations in the network where this out-of-cell interference dominates.

■ Thermal noise—interference that occurs at the mobile due to its own thermal noise (i.e., kTB noise). Thermal noise is the internal noise of the mobile (i.e., noise that exists when the mobile is located far away from all other sources of interference).

■ Unknown interference—interference occurring from foreign sources. The source of this interference may not be completely unknown because there may be energy introduced into the carrier band from a known adjacent carrier. An examination of the spectrum mask of adjacent carriers may indicate the level of interference to expect. Foreign interference is the difference between the thermal noise, as described above, and the noise measured when you take the same mobile into a region of the network, with the network completely shut down.

534

Modeling cdma2000 NetworksSample document

Reverse link interference Reverse link interference refers to noise at the site receivers. Just as there are many channels associated with the forward link, there are also many channels transmitted by the mobile on the reverse link. Some of these are access channels, used for responding to pages, and general network feedback requirements. Others are used specifically for transmitting physical channels (voice or packet data) and for controlling forward link power while receiving data.On the forward link, transmitted energy is from one source (the site transmitting antenna) and the energy is received by many receivers (mobiles). Because the forward link uses channelization codes, there can be orthogonality, and this is realized at the distributed users. This concept does not apply on the reverse link because there are many users transmitting primarily to the one site receiving antenna. The received signals are not time synchronized, and so there is no real possibility for orthogonality of the received signals. The sources of reverse link interference are:

■ In-cell interference—caused by users communicating with the site. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the forward link power. Interference caused by users who are in second, or greater levels of handover, will likely have their equipment powers controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest pilot signal.

■ Out-of-cell interference—caused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites

■ Front end noise and foreign noise—these sources are similar to that described for the forward link interference. The total received noise level (Io+No) at the site receiver from each user depends upon the required Eb/No to achieve an acceptable level of energy at the receiver. As the noise increases, which happens as more users access the network, the required power from the mobile also increases. When the required power from the mobile exceeds its maximum power, the call is dropped or the session is terminated. Just as the total traffic power is required to determine the forward link interference, the received noise at the site receiver is required to determine the power needed by the users to transmit a viable signal. Yet, the transmitted power of the mobile affects the received noise level.

Pilot interference It is necessary to determine the pilot coverage for each site because the pilot signal effectively determines the extent of network coverage on the forward link. The energy per chip per interference density (Ec/Io) is measured on the pilot channel. It is continuously

535


monitored by the mobiles and compared against the Pilot detection threshold and the pilot pollution margin.The pilot detection threshold value is the minimum pilot signal-to-noise ratio (Ec/Io) value required for adding a pilot to the active set and is defined on the Quality panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. The pilot pollution margin is the Ec/Io margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, and is defined on the General panel of the Mobile Technology – Network Settings dialog box.The sources of pilot interference are

■ in-cell interference energy from the other channels transmitted from the same site as the pilot signal

■ out-of-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites■ thermal (kTB) noise of the receiver■ energy from external sources

Forward link traffic interference The DPCH carries voice or data information and must be received by the user with sufficient power to satisfy quality of service requirements (i.e., the required Eb/No value must be met by the mobile signal) if the connection is to be maintained. The Eb/No value is defined as the energy per bit per noise power density. In reality, the noise is due not only to mobile receiver thermal noise (kTB noise) but also to noise from other signal sources.The sources of traffic signal interference are:

■ same-cell interference energy from the non-orthogonal component of the other channels transmitted from the same site from which the traffic signal originates

■ other-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites■ mobile receiver’s thermal noise■ energy from external or foreign sources

Because the signal is spread over the full bandwidth, the Eb/No benefits from the spreading (processing) gain.

Controlling interference Effective power control decreases the interference across the network. Forward link power control ensures the traffic power meets the mobile’s Eb/No requirement, without using excessive power. If the traffic power is excessive, capacity-limiting interference occurs on other traffic and pilot signals. Likewise, on the reverse link, inadequate power control can

536


lead to interference on the network if the mobile is using excessive power to communicate with the site. As more users are added to a network, the received noise level at the site increases. In order for the mobile to maintain an acceptable Eb/No, it needs to increase the transmitted power. If the user is moving closer to the site, and/or comes out of a shadowed area, the received signal at the site will increase quickly. This improves the voice quality of the signal but also greatly increases the interference experienced by other users and, in turn, reduces their voice quality. To prevent the increase in interference, very fast mobile traffic power control is required. cdma2000 technology achieves this fast power control by having the site measure the uplink Eb/No value and assess the quality of service for every user to which it is connected, many hundreds of times a second. With each measurement, two situations can arise:

■ the measured Eb/No is too high, in which case the site commands the mobile to decrease the power it transmits

■ the measured Eb/No is too low, in which case the site commands the mobile to increase the power it transmits

If a mobile is in soft handoff, there are two or more servers in its active set. The mobile decreases the power it transmits if any of the servers commands, but only increases the power if all the servers command it. This difference gives rise to the soft handoff gain, which is described in more detail in the next section.If a user moves behind a building, for example, the mobile must power up in order to continue to stay connected. Likewise, if a user moves close to a site, the mobile must power down in order to reduce the interference it creates. Power control signals are transmitted up to 1.5kHz on both the forward link and reverse link. The ability of the network to fully realize the benefit of the power control is dependent on the response time of both inner and outer loop power controls. Outer loop power control is the more restrictive of the two, because it depends on the frame duration and interleaving of data between frames.Due to these response time considerations, the power level needed to achieve the required Eb/No will not be exactly maintained. To accommodate the power delays, it is desirable to model the power control error statistically.

Slow fadingThe phenomenon of slow fading impacts both the behavior and design of the network in a number of ways, including slow fading margin and soft handoff gain.

537


How slow fading is modeledSlow fading is the change in signal strength due to shadowing and unexpected obstructions. You can statistically model the effects of slow fading and include this data in the analysis of your network. In addition to the implicit effects above, you can explicitly model the statistical effects of slow fading in the analysis of your network. Explicit slow fading is only modeled as part of the Monte Carlo analysis for pixels that contain subscribers. The same slow fading values can be used for both the forward link and reverse link, and are correlated between the different sectors with path loss values at that location.

Using a correlation model to model slow fadingThis section describes the calculations used by Mentum Planet to model slow fading using the angular correlation model.

Angular correlation model equationUnlike non-angular correlation models, which use a correlation factor for co-site sectors and another correlation factor for non co-site sectors, angular correlation models use a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. Equation D.1 enables you to determine the correlation factors for angular correlation models.

Equation D.1 Angular correlation model equation1

Where is the correlation factor at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles less than approximately 20o

is the value of the second term in Equation D.1 at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles greater than 20o

is the angle between the sites

In this equation, the correlation factor decreases from at 0o to approximately zero at 180o. The rate of decrease is controlled by the parameters and .

1.Cochannel Measurements for Interference Limited Small-Cell Planning, J. Van Rees,AEii, vol. 41, pp318-320, 1987.

ρij ρ0 B–( )e φ ij α⁄– Be φ ij β⁄ 0° φij 180°≤≤–+=

ρ0

α

B

β

φi j

φ i j ρ0α β

538


ExampleFigure D.1 displays an example of the correlation factor as a function of the angle between two sites. The data is from urban and suburban macrocells.

Figure D.1 The vertical axis represents the correlation factor, and the horizontal axis represents the opening angle in degrees.

Table D.1 describes the values used for each parameter in Figure D.1.

Determining the mean correlation factorAssuming uniformly distributed angles, the mean correlation factor is provided in Equation D.2.

Table D.1 Values used in the correlation function parameters

Parameter Value

0.83

5o

B 0.6

70o

ρ0

α

β

539


Equation D.2 Mean correlation factor

Using the parameter values in Table D.1, the mean correlation factor is 0.22.

Slow fading margin The fade margin defines the amount of additional power required for the transmitted signal to overcome obstacles in the environment and provide the service quality and reliability required. It has no impact on the average amount of power required in the uplink or downlink to achieve the desired performance. Its primary impact is to reduce the extent of the coverage. In determining the forward link and reverse link power levels required to provide service to a user at some specified location (bin), an average power calculation is computed based upon the average path loss associated with the bin. Coverage is not guaranteed if the required average powers are close to the maximum mobile power limit. The mobile may not have enough fade margin to allow for power fluctuations, due to local shadowing. This is where coverage probability affects the required fade margin. A high coverage probability produces a relatively high fade margin suitable for speech services and vehicular users of all services. Reducing the coverage probability for mobile users with the ability to move their position to find the best reception reduces the fade margin.The fade margin requirement increases as the signal variability (standard deviation) increases. Its requirement will be reduced significantly in regions of the network where soft handoff gain exists. This occurs because the shadowing of the two sites is not correlated. This implies that fade margin requirements are minimized where the nominal signal levels from the sites in soft handoff are nearly equal.

Soft handoff gains Macro-diversity soft handoff gain occurs when a user is receiving a signal from more than one site. In this particular case, the variability of the path loss can have a significant impact on the power requirements. As a result of the variability in the received signals caused by the significant shadowing that can accompany these signals, a signal which might normally be greater from one site (e.g., Site_1) may, over some locations in the same general vicinity, be less than that from a different site (e.g., Site_2). In these situations, the user will be served primarily from Site_2, which will provide the required signal strength at the mobile using a lower transmitted power level than that which would have originated from Site_1. The impact of this is to realize a gain, thus reducing the required power and the interference in the network.

ρ ρ0 B–( )α 1 e180 α⁄–( ) Bβ 1 e180 β⁄–( )+[ ] 180⁄=

540


The impact of this macro-diversity gain increases as the signal variability increases (i.e., the standard deviation increases), and as the difference between the nominal signal levels from each site decreases (the strength of the signals become more equal) as illustrated in Figure D.2.

Figure D.2 The impact of macro-diversity gain

The macro-diversity soft handoff gain is fully realized only if the signals coming from the two sites are uncorrelated. Where a mobile is in soft handoff with two or three sites with very limited angular separation there is an increased correlation and, hence, a decreased macro-diversity gain. It is also possible to consider the effects of additional gain due to signal combining at the mobile. This is made possible due to the rake receiver in the mobile, and, therefore, impacts only the forward link. It is uncertain what the net impact (if any) of this gain will be, since the signals from these two different sites are generally uncorrelated. Therefore, the possible gain associated with this type of signal combining is not implemented.

Penetration losses Path loss is calculated using models that are calibrated to give path loss predictions that are appropriate for outdoor services. Generally, surveys are conducted to test the accuracy

541


of the prediction model and these values are invariably outdoor measurements. Not all users of services are outdoors. It is therefore necessary to address this discrepancy. Within a bin, some users may be outdoors, some users may be indoors near windows, and some users may be located at the center of buildings where higher penetration losses occur. Some users of these services will be able to move about and use services where signals are stronger.Because of the large variability of signal levels within a bin, it may be possible for some users using some services to have coverage, while other users of the same services may not have coverage due to the higher penetration losses in other locations within the same bin. To deal with how and where a user uses a service, Mentum Planet allows different proportions of users to be allocated to the following environments, each with different penetration loss, in each clutter:

■ Outdoor■ Vehicular■ Indoor■ Deep Indoor

542

Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format
E. cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format
This appendix describes the fields in the discrete subscriber table that is generated when you collect information about the drop status of discrete subscribers during a Monte Carlo simulation. For some subscribers, many of the columns will be null. For more information about collecting information about discrete subscribers, see “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.


Snapshot Integer Count of total snapshots taken during Monte Carlo simulation. This value is the same for all entries in one snapshot file.

Subscriber_Number Integer Number of the discrete subscriber

SubCategory Character (128) Name of subscriber category, including the subscriber type, service type, quality type, and environment

Block_Reason Character (40) “Served” or reason for not serving subscriber

Best_Server Character (51) Site/Sector for serving sector or best failure

Achieved_Downlink_Rate Maximum achieved data rate on the downlink.

Achieved_Uplink_Rate Maximum achieved data rate on the uplink.

543

Appendix ECDMA User Guide

Negotiation_State Five possible negotiation states:■ non-negotiated

■ forward negotiated

■ reverse negotiated

■ negotiated

■ not served

See Table 19.1 on page 404

Carrier Character (32) Serving or preferred carrier. 0 indicates no carrier is defined.

Uplink_Transmit_Power (Reverse link)

Float Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm

Uplink_Coverage_Probability (Reverse link)

Float Probability of coverage

Downlink_Transmit_Power (Forward link)

Float Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm

Downlink_Supplemental_Transmit Downlink transmit power on the supplemental channel.

Downlink_Coverage_Probability (Forward link)

Float Probability of coverage

X Float Latitude

Y Float Longitude

Size Float The DEM resolution

Second_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in two way handoff

Third_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in three way handoff

Fourth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in four way handoff

Fifth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in five way handoff

Sixth_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in six way handoff

Seventh_Best_Server Character (51) Site/sector when in seven way handoff


544

Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format
F. cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format
This appendix describes the set of operating points that are created when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information, see “Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000” on page 397.

System variablesThe following table describes the system variables at the beginning of the operating points file.Table F.1 System variables


RUNS_MADE Integer Number of runs in the Monte Carlo simulation up to this point in time

RANDOM_SEED For internal use only

POWER_CONTROL_SEED For internal use only

SLOW_FADING_SEED For internal use only

545

Appendix FCDMA User Guide

Sub-category operating pointsThe following table describes the operating points related to the usage types defined for the subscriber types included in the analysis. Usage types consist of a service type, quality type, and environments.Table F.2 Sub-category operating points


SUB_CATEGORY String Usage to which the following operating points apply

UNSERVED Integer Number of subscribers not served for any reason

NOT_IN_HO Integer Number of subscribers not in handoff

SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer handoff

SOFT_HO Integer number of subscribers in soft handoff

SOFT_SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in soft-softer handoff

SOFTER_SOFT_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer-soft handoff

SOFT_SOFT_HO Integer Number of subscribers in soft-soft handoff

SOFTER_SOFTER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in softer-softer handoff

FOUR_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in four-server handoff

FIVE_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in five-server handoff

SIX_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in six-server handoff

SEVEN_SERVER_HO Integer Number of subscribers in seven-server handover

SERVED Integer Total number of subscribers who have been served in any handoff type

546

cdma2000 Operating Points Table FormatCDMA User Guide

RVS_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the forward link

RVS_LOAD Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors.A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit.

RVS_CE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel elements. This field applies to both the forward link and the reverse link.The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call.

RVS_USER_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the forward link.

RVS_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the forward link

FWD_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscriber’s target.

Table F.2 Sub-category operating points (continued)


547


Per-sector operating pointsThe following table describes the per-sector operating points that are common to all subscriber types.

FWD_PILOT_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the reverse link. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile.

FWD_VOICE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient voice power on the reverse link to meet the subscriber’s Eb/No target

FWD_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the reverse link

RVS_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers on the forward link not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius

RVS_CLUTTER_TYPE_SPEED_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell

FWD_DUE_TO_THROUGHPUT_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.

Table F.3 Per-sector operating points


SECTOR String Sector ID

CARRIER String Carrier ID

TIME_SLOT_INDEX Not used

Table F.2 Sub-category operating points (continued)


548


Per-subscriber type operating pointsThe following table describes the operating points that are per-subscriber type.

PREV_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers.

CURRENT_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.

TOTAL_IN_CELL_POWER_MW Float Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation

PILOT_POWER_MW Float Output power of the pilot channel

SYNC_POWER_MW Float Output power of the sync channel

PAGING_POWER_MW Float Output power of the paging channel

Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points


SUB_CATEGORY String Subscriber category to which the following operating points apply

NUM_USERS Integer Number of subscribers on the reverse link captured by this sector

NUM_RPT_USERS Integer Number of subscribers served by a repeater on this sector

NUM_HANDOFF_RPT_USERS Integer Number of subscribers served in handoff with a repeater on this sector

Table F.3 Per-sector operating points (continued)


549


FWD_NUM_USERS Integer Number of subscribers on the forward link captured by this sector

CURRENT_RCV_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.

ATTENUATED_POWER_MW Float In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor

IN_CELL_POWER_MW Float Power received on the final iteration of the simulation.This field is used to determine frequency reuse efficiency.

DROPPED_BY_RVS_LOAD Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the noise rise (load) limit on the forward link

REFUSED_BY_USER_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to the limit on the maximum number of subscribers served by a sector

REFUSED_BY_RVS_CE_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient primary channel elements

DROPPED_DUE_TO_RVS_CODE_LIMIT Integer Not used

DROPPED_DUE_TO_MOBILE_PA_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers blocked on a cell because the required mobile ERP exceeds the maximum ERP

DROPPED_DUE_TO_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius

DROPPED_DUE_TO_SPEED_LIMIT Integer Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell

Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued)


550


TOTAL_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Total power of all best server voice channels.This value includes the Voice Activity Factor.

AVERAGE_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Average power of a single voice channel.This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

MIN_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

MAX_VOICE_POWER_MW Float Maximum power of the best server voice channel.This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor.

REQUIRED_FWD_CE Integer Number of forward channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.

EVDO_FWD_THROUGHPUT Float Forward throughput for EV-DO

USER_FWD_CE Integer Number of forward channel elements used

UNSERVED_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of subscribers not served at this sector for any reason

NOT_IN_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels not in handoff

SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft handoff

SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer handoff

SOFT_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft-softer handoff



551


SOFTER_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer-soft handoff

SOFT_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in soft-soft handoff

SOFTER_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in softer-softer handoff

FOUR_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in four-server handoff

FIVE_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in five-server handoff

SIX_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in six-server handoff

SEVEN_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR Integer Number of channels in seven-server handoff

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_PILOT Integer Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_VOICE Integer Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient voice power

PRIMARY_DROPPED_BY_PA Integer Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient PA power at the best server

DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_THROUGHPUT Integer Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient throughput at the best server

PRIMARY_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE Integer Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server

DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_CE Integer Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements



552


DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_VOICE Integer Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient voice power

HANDOFF_DROPPED_BY_PA Integer Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient PA power

HANDOFF_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE Integer Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient channel codes

DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_THROUGHPUT Integer Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient throughput



553


554

Index

Index
AAdding
cdma2000 repeaters 363PN offset plan to project 474W-CDMA repeaters 115

AllocatingPN offsets 468spectrum

cdma2000 274W-CDMA 30

Analysescdma2000

creating Monte Carlo 420creating rapid planning 382defining layers 419, 438defining Monte Carlo settings 422defining rapid planning settings 384deleting 394, 443discrete subscriber settings 431generating 440generating Monte Carlo 433generating rapid pilot 393modifying settings 437overview 259

W-CDMAcreating Monte Carlo 168creating rapid planning 134defining layers 167, 186defining Monte Carlo settings 170defining rapid planning settings 136deleting 146, 191discrete subscriber settings 179generating 188generating Monte Carlo 181generating rapid pilot 144modifying settings 185

overview 15Analysis layers

cdma2000 393calculating statistics 503defining 419, 438defining defaults for 420EV-DO 454forward link interference 411handoff 413path balance 415pilot 407prediction view files 378rapid planning 378reverse link interference 412viewing 394, 441

W-CDMA 144calculating statistics 248CPICH 157defining 167, 186defining defaults for 168downlink interference 160handover 162HSDPA 202path balance 164prediction view files 130rapid planning 130uplink interference 161viewing 145, 189

Analysis settingscdma2000

defining Monte Carlo 420defining rapid planning 382modifying 437

W-CDMAdefining Monte Carlo 168defining rapid planning 134

555

IndexCDMA User Guide

modifying 185Analyzing PN offset plans 475Antennas

cdma2000repeater donor settings 369repeater service settings 367

W-CDMArepeater donor settings 121repeater service settings 119

Applying, PN offsets to sectors 480

BBands

cdma2000defining 276maximum number 274

W-CDMAdefining 32maximum number 30

Base station link budgetscdma2000

calculating power 331global edit 337

W-CDMAcalculating power 87global edit 92

Bearerscdma2000

defining 299editing 305

W-CDMAdefining 57editing 61

Best server analysis layerscdma2000

forward link 411reverse link 412

W-CDMAdownlink 160uplink 161

Best Serving Sector Recolor toolcdma2000 442W-CDMA 190

CCarrier In-Map Display tool


Carrier settingscdma2000 279W-CDMA 35

Carrierscdma2000

creating 275defining 274defining sector settings 345

W-CDMAcreating 31defining 30defining sector settings 99

Circuit-switched service types, definingcdma2000 314W-CDMA 71

Clutter typescdma2000

assigning clutter classes 298defining 294editing 298

W-CDMAassigning clutter classes 56defining 52editing 56

Configuration filescustom default settings


Configuring sitescdma2000 329W-CDMA 85

556


Controlling interferencecdma2000 536W-CDMA 514

Convergence, overviewcdma2000 402W-CDMA 152

Copying sitescdma2000 356W-CDMA 109

Copying, PN offset plan 473Correlation models

cdma2000overview 278settings 281

W-CDMAoverview 34settings 38

CPICHanalysis layers 157interference 513

Creatinginterference matrices 466Monte Carlo analyses


neighbor lists 466PN offset plans 467, 468rapid planning analyses


DData rate negotiation 154, 404Default settings files


Deletinganalyses

cdma2000 394, 443

W-CDMA 146, 191PN offset plans 474sites


Discrete subscriberscdma2000

settings 431, 432table format 543viewing information 434

W-CDMAsettings 179, 180table format 521viewing information 182

Donor antennascdma2000 repeaters 369W-CDMA repeaters 121

Downlink interference analysiscdma2000 411W-CDMA 160

Downlink traffic interferencecdma2000 536W-CDMA 514

EEb/No

analysis layerscdma2000 411W-CDMA 160

viewing with Pixel Info toolcdma2000 444W-CDMA 192

Editingbearers


clutter typescdma2000 298

557


W-CDMA 56PN offset search window settings 342PN offsets in a plan 474properties of PN offset plan 473quality types


repeaterscdma2000 375W-CDMA 127

service typescdma2000 317, 321W-CDMA 73, 77

session typescdma2000 312W-CDMA 68

subscriber equipment bandscdma2000 309W-CDMA 65

subscriber typescdma2000 324W-CDMA 80

EV-DO analysis layers 202, 454Exporting

PN offset assignments 475reports


FFade margin


FER analysis layercdma2000 411W-CDMA 160

Flagsusing to generate analysis layers


Frequency rangescdma2000 274W-CDMA 30

GGenerating

analysis layerscdma2000 440W-CDMA 188

Monte Carlo analysescdma2000 433W-CDMA 181

PN offset assignments 468rapid pilot analyses


reportscdma2000 502W-CDMA 247

using flagscdma2000 393W-CDMA 144

Global editbasestation link budgets


sector settingscdma2000 353W-CDMA 107

HHandoff

analysis layers 413soft handoff gains 540status 414

Handoveranalysis layers 162soft handover gains 518status 163

558


Hardware sector settingscdma2000 346W-CDMA 99

Helpaccessing 6getting technical support 4

Home operatorcdma2000 273W-CDMA 29

HSDPA analysis layers 202

IImporting

PN offset assignments 475Interference

controllingcdma2000 536W-CDMA 514

CPICH 513downlink 511forward link 533pilot 535reverse link 535uplink 513

Interference analysis layerscdma2000 412W-CDMA 161

Interference matricesfor PN offset planning 466

LLayer statistics

cdma2000 503PN offset analysis plans 478W-CDMA 248

Locatingcdma2000 repeaters 376W-CDMA repeaters 128

MMentum products 1Mobile equipment types, defining


Mobile Technology projectscdma2000 264W-CDMA 20

Monte Carlo analysescdma2000

analysis area settings 429appending runs 437convergence method 402discrete subscriber settings 432generating 422number of runs 401runtime parameter settings 427Simulation Area settings 425subscriber types 425system settings 422

W-CDMAanalysis area settings 177appending runs 185convergence method 152discrete subscriber settings 180generating 170number of runs 151runtime parameter settings 175Simulation Area settings 173subscriber types 173system settings 170

Multi-band networkscdma2000 328W-CDMA 84

NNeighbor lists

for PN offset planning 466

559


Network operatorscdma2000 273W-CDMA 29

Network settingscdma2000

carrier 284correlation model 281general 280power control 283

W-CDMAcarrier 284correlation model 38general 36power control 39

Network settings files, creatingcdma2000 268W-CDMA 24

Network technologies, definingcdma2000 273W-CDMA 29

Networksmulti-band


Nominal subscriberscdma2000 387W-CDMA 140

OOnline Help 6Opening

Project Settings dialog boxcdma2000 267W-CDMA 23

projectscdma2000 267W-CDMA 23

Operating pointscdma2000

overview 399

table format 545W-CDMA

overview 149table format 523

Operating points filescdma2000 399W-CDMA 149

Operatorsallocating spectrum


networkcdma2000 273W-CDMA 29

PPacket-switched service types, defining


Path balance analysiscdma2000 415W-CDMA 164

Penetration lossescdma2000 541W-CDMA 519

Pilotanalysis layers 407interference 535

Pixel Info toolcdma2000 443W-CDMA 191

PN Offset Plan Analysis toolanalyzing plans 475displaying reports 478viewing analysis layers 478

560


PN offset plansadding existing plan to project 474adding interference matrix 466analyzing 475applying to sectors 480copying 473creating 467, 468deleting 474displaying reports 478managing 473viewing properties of 473

PN offsetsediting in a plan 474editing search window settings 342importing and exporting assignments

475index, displaying 474overview 464search window sizes 343sector settings 349

Powerbase station link budgets


global editcdma2000 337W-CDMA 92

repeaterscdma2000 362W-CDMA 114

sector settingscdma2000 351W-CDMA 105

Power controlcdma2000

overview 279settings 283

W-CDMAoverview 35settings 39

ProductsMentum 1

Project settingsaccessing


creating default settings filescdma2000 268W-CDMA 24

Projects, creatingcdma2000 265W-CDMA 21

QQuality sector settings


Quality types, editingcdma2000 314W-CDMA 70

RRapid planning

cdma2000analysis area settings 391analysis layers 378generating 384nominal subscriber 387overview 378sector settings 349subscriber types 386system settings 384

W-CDMAanalysis area settings 143analysis layers 130generating 136nominal subscriber 140overview 130sector settings 103subscriber types 138

561


system settings 136Re-parenting repeaters


Repeaterscdma2000

adding to sectors 363carrier settings 375donor antenna settings 369editing 375link settings 373locating in a Map window 376overview 362prediction settings 371re-parenting 376service antenna settings 367

W-CDMAadding to sectors 115carrier settings 127donor antenna settings 121editing 127link settings 125locating in a Map window 128overview 114prediction settings 123re-parenting 128service antenna settings 119

Reportscdma2000

adding layer statistics 508deleting 502designing 495generating 502output 500overview 260pixel information 443predefined 484saving 501

types of data 482displaying PN offsets 478W-CDMA

adding layer statistics 254deleting 247designing 241generating 247output 245overview 16pixel information 191predefined 228saving 247types of data 226

Resources sector settingscdma2000 347W-CDMA 101

Reverse linkinterference 535interference analysis layers 412

SSaving, reports


Scrambling codescreating plans 217defining exceptions 220general settings 218modifying indexes 222overview 216saving 223viewing statistics 223

Sector settingscdma2000

base station link budgets 331carriers 345defining 341globally editing 353hardware 346implementation 349

562


PN offset 349power 351quality 350rapid planning 349resources 347

W-CDMAbase station link budgets 87carriers 99defining 96globally editing 107hardware 99implementation 103power 105quality 104rapid planning 103resources 101scrambling codes 103

Sectorscdma2000

adding repeaters 363W-CDMA

adding repeaters 115Service antennas

cdma2000 repeaters 367W-CDMA repeaters 119

Service typescdma2000

defining circuit-switched 314defining packet-switched 317editing 317, 321overview 314

W-CDMAdefining circuit-switched 71defining packet-switched 73editing 73, 77overview 70

Session typescdma2000

defining 309

editing 312W-CDMA

defining 66editing 68

Sitescdma2000

copying, pasting, or deleting 356editing 353overview 328

W-CDMAcopying, pasting, or deleting 109editing 107overview 84

Slow fading, modelingcdma2000 423W-CDMA 172

Soft handoff 540Soft handover 518Spectrum allocation


Subscriber equipment bands, editingcdma2000 309W-CDMA 65

Subscriber types, editingcdma2000 324W-CDMA 80

Subscriberscdma2000

and rapid planning 291clutter types 294mobile equipment types 307nominal subscriber 387overview 290service types 314session types 309subscriber types 321

unserved 183, 435W-CDMA

and rapid planning 49

563


clutter types 52mobile equipment types 63nominal subscriber 140overview 48service types 70session types 66subscriber types 77

System settings, definingcdma2000 384W-CDMA 136

TTechnical support 4Traffic maps

of unserved subscribers 183, 435

UUnserved subscribers 183, 435Uplink

interference 513interference analysis layers 161

Usage types, definingcdma2000 325W-CDMA 81

VViewing

carrier assignment informationcdma2000 356W-CDMA 110

discrete subscriber informationcdma2000 434W-CDMA 182

PN offset plan properties 473PN offset reports 478

564

planet mentum cdma user guide

Documents